Sei sulla pagina 1di 161

®

NOVUS

SERVICE MANUAL
This service manual is to be used in conjunction with the operator manual for the
product. The operator manual contains important information regarding instrument
description, location of controls, specifications, and normal operating procedures.

DANGER
LASER LIGHT
AVOID EYE OR SKIN EXPOSURE TO DIRECT
OR SCATTERED LIGHT, POSSIBLE
EXPLOSION HAZARD IF USED IN THE
PRESENCE OF FLAMMABLE ANESTHETICS.

ARGON ION LASER - 4 WATTS MAX CW*


HELIUM NEON LASER - 2 MILLIWATTS MAX* CW

*PRACTICAL LIMIT CLASS IV LASER PRODUCT

®
®

2400 Condensa Street


Santa Clara, CA 95051
(408)-764-3000

0614-134-01
AUG '98
®
®

This manual is copyrighted with all rights reserved. Under the copyright laws, this manual can not
be copied in whole or part without the express written permission of Coherent, Inc. Permitted
copies must carry the same proprietary and copyright notices as were affixed to the original.

Please note that while every effort has been made to ensure that the data given is accurate, the
information, figures, illustrations, tables, specifications, and schematics are subject to change with-
out notice.

Coherent and the Coherent Logo are registered trademarks of Coherent Inc.

Please direct all inquiries about this manual to:

Coherent, Inc.
Technical Support C-35
2400 Condensa Street
Santa Clara, CA 95051
(408) 764-3638

© Coherent Inc 03/96, 08/96, 09/97, 12/97, 08/98


0614-134-01
®
®

DISCLAIMER
Coherent service manuals are written specifically for use by Coherent service engineers who have
received formal training in the servicing of Coherent equipment, and by customers who have taken
and passed a Coherent certification service training course for the equipment being serviced.
Information on certification service training courses offered to customers can be obtained by con-
tacting the Technical Training Coordinator at (800) 367-7899.

Coherent does not accept responsibility for personal injury or property damage resulting from the
servicing of Coherent equipment by its customers or by third parties, except where such injury or
property damage is a direct result of Coherent's negligence. Customers, by accepting the service
manual, agree to indemnify Coherent against any claims alleging personal injury or property
damage resulting from the servicing of Coherent equipment by the customer or by third parties,
except where such injury or property damage is a direct result of Coherent's negligence. These
limitations include situations where Coherent personnel are advising customers on the repair of
Coherent equipment over the telephone.

The servicing of Coherent equipment by persons who have not passed a current Coherent certifica-
tion service training course for that equipment will void Coherent's product warranty.

Novus Service Manual Disclaimer 0614-134-01 08/98


®
®

REVISION INFORMATION
This is the AUG '98 release of the Novus Service Manual. Contact Coherent Medical Group Techni-
cal Support to determine if this is the most current release of this service manual.

Each page of this manual has a MM/YY date at the bottom. This indicates the release date for the
individual page. Note that when the manual is updated, not all of the pages are necessarily up-
dated, so some pages may have a MM/YY earlier than the release date for the manual (the release
date for the manual is the MM/YY that appears on the cover and in the first sentence of this revi-
sion information page). The following list provides a complete list of the release date information,
by section, for this release of the service manual.

Cover page, copyright page, disclaimer page, this page, table of contents page or pages are all dated
with the release date of the manual (08/98).

SECTION 1 All pages, 08/98

SECTION 2 All pages, 08/98

SECTION 3 All pages, 08/98

SECTION 4 All pages, 08/98

SECTION 5 All pages, 08/98

SECTION 6 All pages, 08/98

SECTION 7 FSB's released for this service manual are listed in the Novus FSB
Index. Each time an FSB for this manual is released or updated the
Index is also updated and distributed with the FSB. The current
Index is placed behind the single sheet that makes up Section 7, and
the FSB's are placed in order behind the Index. Contact Coherent
Medical Group Technical Support for the date of the most current FSB
Index.

SECTION 8 All pages, 09/97

Novus Service Manual Disclaimer 0614-134-01 08/98


®
®

Contents
DISCLAIMER ................................................................................................................................... 3
REVISION INFORMATION.......................................................................................................... 4
1.0 GENERAL INFORMATION ............................................................................................. 1
1.1 USE OF THIS MANUAL .................................................................................................................. 1
1.2 CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL .................................................................................. 1
1.3 NOVUS 2000 CONFIGURATIONS ................................................................................................. 2
1.4 CE MARK ........................................................................................................................................... 2
2.0 INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................. 1
3.0 CALIBRATIONS & ADJUSTMENTS ............................................................................. 1
3.1 OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................................................ 1
3.1.1 Safety Precautions .............................................................................................................................. 2
3.2 SERVICE TURN ON & DC VOLTAGE CHECKS ........................................................................ 3
3.3 FILAMENT CHECKS ....................................................................................................................... 5
3.4 TUBE RESONATOR CHECK & ALIGNMENT ........................................................................... 6
3.5 OPTICAL HEAD CHECKOUT & ALIGNMENT ......................................................................... 8
3.5.1 Adjust the Optical Fiber .................................................................................................................. 10
3.5.1.1 Fiber Alignment (Early Version Only)............................................................................................ 11
3.5.1.2 Fiber Alignment (New Version Only).............................................................................................. 12
3.5.2 Green Filter Alignment .................................................................................................................... 13
3.6 POWER CALIBRATION ................................................................................................................ 13
3.6.1 Power Calibration With Two Pot Dual Channel Photo-Sensor Board ........................................ 14
3.6.2 Power Calibration With Four Pot Wavelength Selectable Photo-sensor Board ......................... 15
3.7 FINAL FIELD CHECKOUT .......................................................................................................... 16
4.0 THEORY OF OPERATION ................................................................................................ 1
4.1 INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................. 1
4.1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 1
4.1.2 Functional Subsystems ........................................................................................................................ 1
4.2 POWER DISTRIBUTION (SINGLE PHASE) ................................................................................ 3
4.2.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 3
4.2.2 CB1 On, Contactor Off ....................................................................................................................... 3
4.2.3 Turn On ............................................................................................................................................... 4
4.2.4 AC Distribution Past The Contactor ................................................................................................ 4
4.2.5 Shutdown Of The Main Contactor ................................................................................................... 5
4.3 POWER DISTRIBUTION (3 PHASE) ............................................................................................ 6
4.3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 6
4.3.2 CB1 On, Contactor Off ....................................................................................................................... 6
4.3.3 Turn On ............................................................................................................................................... 6
4.3.4 AC Distribution Past The Contactor ................................................................................................ 7
4.3.5 Shutdown Of The Main Contactor ................................................................................................... 8
4.4 COOLING SYSTEM ......................................................................................................................... 8
4.4.1 Overview .............................................................................................................................................. 8
4.4.2 AC Supply ............................................................................................................................................ 9
4.4.3 Fan Speed Control PCB .................................................................................................................... 9
4.4.4 Flow Monitoring ................................................................................................................................ 9
4.4.5 Coolant Temperature Sensing .......................................................................................................... 9
4.4.6 Passbank Overtemperature Thermostat In The Laser Power Supply ....................................... 10
4.5 CONTROL ELECTRONICS .......................................................................................................... 10
®
®

4.5.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 10


4.5.2 Microprocessor ............................................................................................................................... 11
4.5.3 ROM/RAM Memory, Address Decoding, External Interrupt Processing ................................ 12
4.5.4 D/A Conversion ............................................................................................................................... 12
4.5.5 Analog to Digital Conversion ......................................................................................................... 13
4.5.6 Counter/Timers ............................................................................................................................... 14
4.5.7 Dual UART and Communication Ports ........................................................................................ 16
4.5.8 Digital I/O Circuits ......................................................................................................................... 17
4.5.9 Slit Lamp Drive Circuit ................................................................................................................. 23
4.5.10 Watchdog Circuit ............................................................................................................................ 24
4.6 DISPLAY SUBSYSTEM ................................................................................................................ 24
4.6.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 24
4.6.2 Microcontroller Circuits ................................................................................................................ 25
4.6.3 RS-485 Bus ...................................................................................................................................... 26
4.6.4 Status Indicators ............................................................................................................................. 26
4.6.5 Error Displays ................................................................................................................................. 27
4.6.6 Reset, Status, Color, Repeat Switch Circuit ................................................................................. 27
4.6.7 Seven Segment Display Circuits (Power, Count, Time) .............................................................. 27
4.6.8 Power, Exposure Time, Aiming Beam Intensity, and Repeat Rate Knob Circuits ................... 27
4.7 SAFETY MONITOR SUBSYSTEM ............................................................................................ 28
4.7.1 Overview .......................................................................................................................................... 28
4.7.2 Over, Under, > Max, >Min Power Circuits .................................................................................. 28
4.7.3 Undertime Fault Detection Circuit ............................................................................................... 31
4.7.4 Overtime Fault Detection Circuit ................................................................................................. 32
4.7.5 ESF Out Fault Detection Circuit ................................................................................................... 33
4.7.6 SS OPEN, > MIN & FSW INACTIVE Fault Detection Circuit ................................................. 34
4.8 LASER POWER SUPPLY ............................................................................................................ 34
4.8.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 34
4.8.2 The Single Phase Power Supply ..................................................................................................... 34
4.8.2.1 Primary Power Input and B+ Supply ............................................................................................ 37
4.8.2.2 Firing Control Circuit ..................................................................................................................... 37
4.8.2.2.1 SCR Triggering ................................................................................................................................ 38
4.8.2.2.2 Developing the /CHARGE/ Signal ................................................................................................. 39
4.8.2.3 Zero Crossing Circuit ...................................................................................................................... 40
4.8.2.4 Light Command Circuit .................................................................................................................. 41
4.8.2.5 Passbank Drive Circuit, and Passbank.......................................................................................... 42
4.8.2.6 Tube Start Circuit ............................................................................................................................ 43
4.8.2.7 Magnet Control Circuit ................................................................................................................... 43
4.8.2.8 Crowbar Circuit ............................................................................................................................... 44
4.8.2.9 Capacitor Charge Indicator Circuit .............................................................................................. 45
4.8.2.10 225V B+ Contactor Trip Circuit .................................................................................................... 45
4.8.3 Three Phase Laser Power Supply ................................................................................................... 45
4.8.3.1 Primary Power Input and B+ Supply ........................................................................................... 47
4.8.3.2 IGBT Drive Power Amplifier ........................................................................................................ 48
4.8.3.3 B+ Switching Control Circuit ........................................................................................................ 49
4.8.3.3.1 B+ Switching Control Circuit Output and Timing ...................................................................... 49
4.8.3.4 Light Command Circuit ................................................................................................................. 54
4.8.3.5 MOSFET Drive Circuit, and MOSFET's ..................................................................................... 55
4.8.3.6 Tube Start Circuit ........................................................................................................................... 56
4.8.3.7 Magnet Control Circuit .................................................................................................................. 56
4.8.3.8 Crowbar Circuit .............................................................................................................................. 56
®
®

4.8.3.9 IGBT Overcurrent Trip Protection .............................................................................................. 57


4.8.3.10 Capacitor Charge Indicator Circuit ............................................................................................ 58
4.8.3.11 B+ Overvoltage Protection Circuit ............................................................................................... 58
4.9 SOFTWARE ................................................................................................................................... 58
4.9.1 Control Electronics Software ........................................................................................................ 58
4.10 OPTICS SUBSYSTEM ................................................................................................................. 60
4.10.1 Photo-Sensor Board ....................................................................................................................... 60
4.10.1.1 Photo-Sensor Board, Dual Channel (0612-904-01) ..................................................................... 60
4.10.1.2 Photo-Sensor PCB, 2-Channel, 2 Gain ........................................................................................ 61
4.10.2 HeNe Tube and Polarizer ............................................................................................................... 61
4.10.3 Green Only Solenoid ..................................................................................................................... 61
4.10.3 Safety Shutter ................................................................................................................................. 62
5.0 TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................................................. 1
5.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................................................................... 1
5.1.1 Service Philosophy ........................................................................................................................... 1
5.1.2 Level Of Field Repair ...................................................................................................................... 2
5.1.3 Safety Precautions ........................................................................................................................... 2
5.2 INTERIOR ACCESS ...................................................................................................................... 3
5.2.1 Opening the Side Doors ................................................................................................................... 3
5.2.2 Opening the Display Cover ............................................................................................................. 5
5.3 SERVICE MODE ............................................................................................................................ 5
5.3.1 Entering Service Mode .................................................................................................................... 5
5.3.2 Leaving Service Mode ..................................................................................................................... 5
5.3.3 Service Mode Characteristics ......................................................................................................... 6
5.4 CURRENT CONTROL MODE ..................................................................................................... 6
5.4.1 Entering and Using Current Control ............................................................................................. 6
5.5 DIAGNOSTIC MODE .................................................................................................................... 6
5.6 FAULT ISOLATION PROCEDURES ........................................................................................ 10
5.6.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 10
5.6.2 Power Up Fault Isolation .............................................................................................................. 10
5.6.2.1 Single Phase Systems ..................................................................................................................... 10
5.6.2.2 Three Phase Systems ..................................................................................................................... 11
5.6.3 “No Error Code Reported” Fault Isolation ................................................................................. 11
5.6.4 Main Contactor Trip Fault Isolation ........................................................................................... 12
5.5.5 Error Code Fault Isolation ........................................................................................................... 13
5.7 OVER/UNDER POWER PROBLEMS ...................................................................................... 30
5.8 SEQUENCE OF EVENTS ............................................................................................................ 32
5.8.1 Initialization and Self Test Sequence .......................................................................................... 32
5.8.3 Main Loop Sequence ..................................................................................................................... 36
5.8.4 Exposure Sequence ....................................................................................................................... 37
6.0 PARTS LIST ...................................................................................................................... 1
8.0 SCHEMATICS AND DRAWINGS .............................................................................. 1
8.1 LIST OF SCHEMATICS ............................................................................................................... 1
®
®

1.0 GENERAL INFORMATION

1.1 USE OF THIS MANUAL

This manual contains service instructions for the Coherent Series NOVUS Argon Laser Photocoagulators.
Instructions in this manual are intended for use by Coherent Service Engineers or by customer technicians
who have completed a training course on the laser system. Coherent Inc. cannot be responsible for service or
repairs attempted by unauthorized persons, and the use or copying of these service instructions by same is
prohibited.

These service instructions are to be used in conjunction with the Coherent NOVUS Argon Laser
Photocoagulator Operator Manual. The operator manual contains important information regarding
instrument description, location of controls, specifications, and normal operating procedures.

As required, Coherent Medical Group Service Department releases field service bulletins to update this
service manual. The manual is not complete unless it includes all released field service bulletins.

1.2 CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL

Logic signal names which are "NOTTED" will appear inside slash marks. For example:

/HENE ENABLE/

Signals which are notted are "active", or true, when the logic level is low. When the logic signal
/HENE ENABLE/ is low, the HeNe is enabled. When the logic signal /HENE ENABLE/ is high, the HeNe is disabled.

The schematics for the laser power supply do not include individual numbers for different logic elements/op
amps contained within a single component. For example, on schematic 0613-029-01, sheet 10, U15 is an
LM339, and contains four separate op amps. Each op amp is labeled as U15. Text references to the individual
op amps will differentiate by including the output pin number after the component number, i.e., "U15-13" is
the U15 op amp whose output pin is pin 13 of U15.

Voltage levels in the NOVUS can be referenced to analog ground, digital ground, or, in the laser power
supplies, to P- or B-. Text references to voltage levels will be followed by an indication of the reference for
the voltage level. For example, the voltage level 155 VDCB- indicates a voltage of 155 VDC above the B-
reference.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL GENERAL INFORMATION


0614-134-01 08/98 1-1
®
®

1.3 NOVUS 2000 CONFIGURATIONS

The NOVUS comes in single phase and three phase versions. The machines are operationally identical,
but to the servicing technician, there are significant differences between the single phase and three phase
versions of the machine. The Safety Monitor, Control Electronics, and optics are the same for all systems.
The software shipped in three phase systems will work in single phase systems, but the earlier versions of
the software shipped with single phase systems will not work with three phase systems. The AC
distribution, interconnecting cabling, and laser power supplies are different for each system type, and are
covered separately in this manual.

Since the introduction of the NOVUS 2000, there have been three other NOVUS products introduced: the
NOVUS L and The Dual Fiber NOVUS. Both products are essentially the same as the NOVUS 2000
described in this manual, differing as described in NOVUS FSB's #0004 (NOVUS L), #0010 (Dual Fiber
NOVUS) & #30 (NOVUS E) .

1.4 CE MARK

The CE mark is a certification label which allows Coherent to sell the NOVUS Laser throughout the
European community. This label certifies that the NOVUS laser meet all regulations set forth by various
countries of Europe. It is important to ensure this label is on the laser chassis.

This device complies with the


requirements of Directive 93/42/EEC
concerning medical devices

Notified Body Identification Number: 0086

GENERAL INFORMATION NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


1-2 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

2.0 INSTALLATION

2.1 SYSTEM INSTALL

The NOVUS is installed by a factory trained Field Service Engineer. Untrained persons are not qualified to
install the NOVUS. Installation by unqualified persons can result in damage to the NOVUS, injury to the
person/persons attempting the installation, and/or system performance that is unsafe to the user and/or
patient. Perform the following steps to install a NOVUS:

1. Check site for proper setup. This should include proper AC service, and adequate room for the console
and any attached delivery systems. No external water cooling is required.

The single phase NOVUS requires 45 AMP service, 208-230 VAC ±10%, 50/60Hz. Measure the line
voltage. It should be below 253 VAC, and above188 VAC, to meet specifications. High line voltage
can lead to damage to the NOVUS. Low line voltages can prevent the NOVUS 2000 from providing
its specified range of laser power, and lead to faults during operation. For 50Hz, see topic 2.2.

Systems sold for installation in the United States have an ETL sticker on the back of the unit. The
NOVUS is ETL listed to meet UL544 when hard wired to electrical service. If the customer chooses
not to hardware to electrical service (i.e., to use a plug and receptacle), you must remove the sticker
from the system.

The three phase NOVUS requires 20 AMP service, 380-415 VAC + 10%, 50/60 Hz. Measure the line
voltage. It should be below 450 VAC and above 340 VAC, to meet specifications. High line voltage
can lead to damage to the NOVUS. Low line voltages can prevent the NOVUS from providing its
specified range of laser power, and lead to faults during operation. Fast acting 20 Amp circuit
breakers may trip when the NOVUS is turned on, due to large peak current. If this occurs, a motor
start breaker should be installed to replace the fast acting breaker. For 50Hz, see topic 2.2.

2. Check that all boxes are present, and for any shipping damage.

3. Remove the console and accessories from the crate.

The NOVUS is bolted to the crate base pallet. To remove the NOVUS from it crate, first lift the
shipping crate cover up and off of the crate. Remove the foam packing material from the top of the
NOVUS, and set it aside. Note that two wooden ramps are included in this packing material. These
ramps are provided to allow wheeling the NOVUS off of the crate pallet, once it has been unbolted
from the pallet. Four bolts secure the NOVUS to the pallet. To access the bolts, the NOVUS side
doors must be opened. Open the side doors as follows:

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL INSTALLATION


0614-134-01 08/98 2-1
®
®

The side doors are hinged on the end


towards the front of the unit, and swing
out from the rear. To release a side door,
locate the small hole at the bottom rear
edge of the door (back of unit), insert a
small tool (i.e. screwdriver, hex key) a Access hole
few inches into the hole, then press
down lightly on the tool, to cause the
inserted portion to move upwards,
Inside of door
where it will press against and engage a TOOL
release tab. The door will release, and
can be swung open.

SIDE VIEW, TOOL INSERTED


Once the side doors are open,
remove the four securing bolts
which run through the base of the NOVUS and pallet. The bolt heads are accessed inside the
door covers, and can be unscrewed without securing the nut end.

Once the bolts are removed, place the ramps between the pallet and floor, then roll the
NOVUS off the pallet.

4. Check the contents of all boxes against the enclosed packing list, and for any shipping damage.

5. Check all connectors and assemblies in the unit for damage, loosening.

6. (3Ø only) Re-tap the transformer (if necessary).

For three phase systems, the isolation transformer and contactor transformer are tapped to operate
off of a line voltage of 380 VAC. If line voltage at the installation site is above 398 VAC, re-tap the
two transformers to the 415 VAC setting, as shown in the drawing on next page.

7. Have the system connected to electrical service.

If the unit is to be hard wired, it is the responsibility of the customer to have their electrician wire the
NOVUS power cord to the wall box.

Systems sold for installation in the United States will have an ETL sticker on the back of the unit. The
NOVUS is ETL listed to meet UL544 only when hard wired to electrical service. If the customer
chooses not to hardware to electrical service (i.e., to use a plug and receptacle), you must remove the
sticker from the system. Note that the sticker was removed on the service report, i.e., "System not
hard wired, ETL sticker removed".

8. Fill the water reservoir with distilled water.

More water will need to be added after the initial turn on, as water circulates through the cooling
system. Use caution, and do not OVERFILL (1 gallon of distilled water will be more than sufficient
for filling the system).

INSTALLATION NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


2-2 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

9. Connect the fiber, footswitch, and delivery system cables.

(Refer to 8-30). Note that the slit lamp delivery system should plug into the power receptacle on the
back of the NOVUS. The delivery system must therefore be configured for 220VAC operation. For
most non-combination systems, the footswitch and delivery system cable are separate, and plug into
two different jacks on the back of the NOVUS. There is also a BRH jack, and a BRH plug for
installations that do not route the BRH disable line to a remote location (e.g., a switch on the room
door).

10. Turn on the system circuit breaker with the side doors still open.

Power is now present inside the unit, although the unit is not yet turned on. Wait a few minutes,
insuring that the components that handle primary power (i.e., the power up circuits and main
contactor) are not damaged. Watch for any visual indications of failure.

3 Ø Novus Transformer Tapping

TUBE

FILAMENT TRANSFORMER

Contactor
transformer is
mounted on
inside of rear
panel, just
above the
illumination
PCB.

415
1 2 3 4 5
380
0

Shipped as shown, for 380 VAC operation. For line


Shipped as shown, for operation
with 380 VAC. For line voltages above 398 VAC, voltages above 398 VAC, move the wire connected to
move the wire connected to "380" to "415". the middle (#3) tab to the tab farthest toward the front
of the unit (#5).
STEPDOWN TRANSFORMER PRIMARY CONTACTOR TRANSFORMER PRIMARY

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL INSTALLATION


0614-134-01 08/98 2-3
®
®

11. Turn the system on and observe for normal turn-on sequence.

The front panel lighting will turn on, and the LED's will illuminate momentarily. The HeNe will turn
on. The eye safety (if applicable), green filter, and safety solenoids will be operated (clicking can be
heard). The front panel then begins the cathode warm up time countdown, displaying the count as it
moves towards zero. The pump must be circulating water through the cooling system. Check
around the tube, passbank, heat exchanger, pump, and tubing for any sign of leakage. After the
countdown is completed, the system will do a series of laser firings (safety shutter is closed, and no
laser emission from the fiber will occur), and then move to standby.

If any errors are detected during the power up sequence, the error (or errors) will be displayed on the
front panel. Multiple errors are displayed successively, one at a time, and repeatedly. Use the error
code tables and explanations in section five of this manual to determine possible causes, and
corrective action, for any errors. Note that a defective flow switch or inadequate cooling flow
detected during power up will cause the unit to beep three times, then shut down.

12. For single phase NOVUS systems with the Autotransformer, measure the autotransformer output
voltage and re-tap the "out" wire as necessary to obtain a 220 VAC output. Refer to NOVUS FSB # 31.

13. Recheck the cooling system reservoir, and add distilled water as necessary.

14. Perform Topic 3.3 (Filament Checks) in Section 3 of this Service Manual.

15. Perform Topic 3.7 (Final Field Check Out) in Section 3 of this Service Manual.

16. Demonstrate system operation to the customer.

17. Fill out the "self mailer" Installation Quality Audit Report, and place it in the mail.

2.2 50HZ NOTES

In addition to the installation instructions in section 2.1, for single or three phase 50Hz operation, the follow-
ing must be done:

On the FAN CONTROL PCB, move the black jumper to the two pins labeled "50C" (two pins on the
right).
60 C

50 C
60S

50S

60 HERTZ
Jumper JUMPER POSITION
60 C

50 C
60S

50S

JUMPER IS
HERE.
FAN CONTROL PCB

50 HERTZ
JUMPER POSITION

INSTALLATION NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


2-4 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

2.3 PRODUCT SPECIFICATION

Laser Tube Coherent Super INNOVA® Ceramic-CoolDisk-ceramic/tungsten copper design

Wavelength ≈8% of 528nm


488 - 514nm blue-green argon; 514nm green only argon;

Power at Fiber 2.5W of blue-green argon; 1.0W of green only argon

Exposure Times 0.01 seconds to continuous

Auto-repeat 0.1 - 2.5 seconds between exposures; 9 exposures per second maximum.

Weight 113kg (250lbs.)

Dimensions 36cm W X 61cm D X 95cm H (14in. X 24in X 37.5in)

Power Requirements 208 - 240V AC, single phase, 45A, 50/60 Hz


380 - 415V AC, three phase, 20A, 50/60 Hz

Cooling Self-contained cooling. Internally liquid cooled (no external water hook-ups
required)

Aiming Beam HeNe; intensity adjustable to a maximum of 1mW

S.A.F.E. Fiber "Smart" fiber ensures that fiber is safely connected to appropriate delivery system
before laser will fire.

Delvery System
Options Coherent LDS-20™ and LDS-10-A™; Zeiss 30SL, ZEISS SL130; Coherent Laser
IndirectOphthalmoscope; Acculite™ endoprobe. Also compatible with the Coherent
family of Nd:YAG lasers when used with the Coherent LDS-20 delivery system.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL INSTALLATION


0614-134-01 08/98 2-5
®
®

3.0 CALIBRATIONS & ADJUSTMENTS

3.1 OVERVIEW

This section contains procedures for the field checks and adjustments required to maintain the NOVUS 2000.
The procedures assume the reader has successfully completed a Coherent service training course on the
NOVUS 2000. The information in this manual is subject to update by field service bulletins and service
manual revisions.

Whenever any preventive or corrective maintenance is performed on the NOVUS 2000, the system must pass
all portions of the Final Field Checkout (topic 3.7) before the system is returned to the user.

Topic 3.2, SERVICE TURN ON & DC VOLTAGE CHECKS- performed for basic service turn on
and check out of a system before proceeding with preventive or corrective maintenance.

Topic 3.3, FILAMENT CHECKS - performed whenever the tube or filament transformer is changed
and whenever the system is connected to a new mains supply.

Topic 3.4, TUBE RESONATOR CHECK & ALIGNMENT- performed whenever the system fails to
meet the specified tube power outputs in the Final Field Checkout.

Topic 3.5, OPTICAL HEAD CHECKOUT & ALIGNMENT- performed whenever the system fails to
meet the specified tube power outputs in the final field checkout, or when there is some visible
indication of a beam alignment problem.

Topic 3.6, POWER CALIBRATION - performed whenever the systems fails the fiber calibration
check or any of the delivery system calibration checks in the Final Field Checkout.

Topic 3.7, FINAL FIELD CHECKOUT - performed to confirm that the system is functioning
properly. This procedure must always be performed following any corrective or preventive
maintenance to confirm system is operating to specifications.

These instructions are written to apply to the NOVUS 2000 configured for European or domestic power
input, with single or dual fiber port, as produced at the release of this manual.

NOTE: Some power meters may not provide accurate power readings when used in close proximity
to the NOVUS 2000, due to induced currents from the tube magnet and/or laser tube power supply.
Use the power meter on battery power (to eliminate mains noise and induced noise into the power
cord) and keep the cable between the power meter display and head away from the power supply
and tube as much as possible.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL CALIBRATIONS & ADJUSTMENTS


0614-134-01 08/98 3-1
®
®

TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:

• Calibrated Digital Voltmeter (DVM).


• Calibrated clamp-on AC ammeter.
• Calibrated power meter (Coherent Fieldmaster with LM-2 and 1000/1 attenuator head
recommended).
• Calibrated oscilloscope.

Special purpose test equipment/tools:

Power meter nut - P/N 0624-457-01 - The LM-2 head can be screwed onto the nut to allow the power
out of the fiber port to be measured without having to hold the head in place.

SMA adaptor - P/N 2105-0210

3.1.1 Safety Precautions

In addition to the general safety precautions which apply to working with electricity and lasers, the Coherent
certified NOVUS 2000 Service Engineer should be familiar with the following specific precautions concerning
the NOVUS 2000:

• Only Coherent Certified NOVUS 2000 Service Engineers should attempt any service on this
system.

• The laser tube power supply (all versions) is a floating supply, referenced to "B-", and not to
chassis ground. B- can be several hundred volts below chassis/digital/analog ground. Both the B+
and B- lines can be lethal.

For example, the±15


• Do not confuse the B- reference with the analog, digital, or chassis grounds.
VDCB- power supply located in the laser tube power supply is referenced to B-. The +15 B-
VDC
voltage is 15 volts above the level of B-, which can be several hundred volts less than chassis, analog,
or digital ground.

In practice,
• Never allow a cross connection between B- and analog, chassis, or digital ground.
this occurs most often due to something conductive falling into the unit, or by the improper use of
test equipment.

If using an oscilloscope (or any type of test equipment which plugs into a wall outlet), use a
ground isolation plug between the oscilloscope power plug and wall socket (or some other
method which will isolate the oscilloscope chassis grounding).

If using a dual trace oscilloscope (or any test equipment which has multiple grounding
leads), never connect ground leads to different ground references at the same time. The
grounding in the test equipment is common electrically, so connecting one ground lead to the
B- reference and another to the chassis, analog, or digital grounds will result in a direct short
between B- and chassis ground. Such a short will result in immediate and severe damage to
the system, and represents a potential hazard to the test equipment and servicing engineer.

CALIBRATIONS & ADJUSTMENTS NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


3-2 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

If any test equipment is attached to the B- line through a grounding lead, all grounded
surfaces on that test equipment will be at B- potential.

• Even with the key switch off, there are potentially lethal voltages present inside the console.

• Storage capacitors in the laser tube power supply are capable of holding a lethal charge, even
after power has been removed from the unit.

The system is designed to discharge these capacitors at shut down, but the servicing engineer
should never assume that the capacitors are discharged. If service or repair requires contact
with any storage capacitor, first disconnect the system from AC service, use a grounding
probe to discharge any residual charge on the capacitor, then confirm discharge with a volt
meter. Once disconnected and discharged the capacitor will typically still develop a
significant charge.

• Do not rely on the B+ LED indicator on the SCR Control PCB as an indication that the B+ has
been discharged to a safe level.

The LED flashes at a rate relative to the magnitude of B+ and it is used to observe the laser
tube power supply operation. It is not an indication that B+ is present or not present.

• If the SCR Control PCB is not in place when the system is turned off, the B+ voltage will not
In this case, the B+ discharging to a
discharge through the magnet at shut down (as it normally is).
low level will take much longer than it would with the magnet connected across the discharge path.

• The treatment laser beam and its reflections are potential burn hazards, and can ignite
flammable materials. Use extreme caution when operating the system with covers opened or
removed. The covers contain the beam and reflections safely within the console. Only those persons
required should be present during servicing, and eye protection that safely attenuates the argon
wavelengths should be worn by those present.

Use extreme
• The treatment laser beam and its reflections are potential hazards to the eye.
caution when operating the system with covers opened or removed. The covers contain the beam
and reflections safely within the console. Only those persons required should be present during
servicing, and eye protection that safely attenuates the argon wavelengths should be worn by those
present.

3.2 SERVICE TURN ON & DC VOLTAGE CHECKS

1. Set up & turn on.

a. Disconnect the system from AC mains, and any connected delivery system fibers. Open the side
doors, remove the laser tube power supply cover, then confirm the Fan Speed Controller PCB jumper
is matched with the site mains frequency (50 or 60 Hz).

b. Reconnect the system to AC mains, then turn on the system with the key switch.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL CALIBRATIONS & ADJUSTMENTS


0614-134-01 08/98 3-3
®
®

2. Confirm the following.

a. Cooling fan operates.

b. Coolant flow is present (seen in reservoir).

3. Verify the DC power supply voltages (referenced to ground).

Measure the voltages at the following locations on the CPU PCB. TP1 or TP9 can be used as ground
reference points. The diodes are located in the upper left corner of the CPU.

+5.00 ±.25 VDC @ CR21 cathode

+15.0 ±1.0 VDC @ CR22 cathode

-15.0 ±1.0 VDC @ CR23 anode

+12.0 ±1.0 VDC @ CR24 cathode

4. Verify the±15 VDCB- and ±12 VDCB- (referenced to B-).

CAUTION: Connect and disconnect leads when the system is off. Measurements are made on the SCR PCB.

For the Domestic 208 Volt Novus:

Note: T0 can be used as the B- reference point.

• +12.0 ±1.0 VDCB- @ T15.

• -12.0 ±1.0 VDCB- @ T17.

For the International 380 Volt Novus:

Note: T0 or T2 can be used as B- reference points.

• +15.0 ±1.0 VDCB- @ T1.

• -15.0 ±1.0 VDCB- @ T3.

• +12.0 ±1.0 VDCB- @ T6.

CALIBRATIONS & ADJUSTMENTS NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


3-4 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

• -12.0±1.0 VDCB- @ T7.

The two cathode leads


are shipped connected to
terminals nine and seven.
Do not move the center
transformer tap.

11
10
9
To tube cathode
8
7
6
5 The AC clamp-on
ammeter can be
attached to either of
AC clamp-on the two cathode leads
ammeter

3.3 FILAMENT CHECKS

Cathode current is typically between 23 - 26 amps, but should always fall between what is prescribed in the
Tube Data Sheet. Perform the following procedure to check filament current and re-tap the transformer if
necessary.

1. Connect the AC clamp-on ammeter to either of the two cathode leads.

2. Observe the filament current of the tube and verify that it is within the specifications prescribed in the
Tube Data Sheet.

If the filament current does not meet specifications stated in the Tube Data Sheet proceed with step 3.
If it does meet the specification proceed with step 6.

3. Disconnect the cathode leads from the terminal block.

4. Move the cathode leads to positions 6 and 10, and remeasure the filament current.

NOTE: The transformer center tap is to remain on position 8. Do not move the center tap.

If the filament current meets specifications proceed with Topic 3.4. If the filament current still does
not meet specifications proceed with step 5.

5. Move the two cathode leads to positions 11 and 5 on the terminal block and remeasure.

6. Verify the cathode leads are secure in the terminal block.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL CALIBRATIONS & ADJUSTMENTS


0614-134-01 08/98 3-5
®
®

3.4 TUBE RESONATOR CHECK & ALIGNMENT

1. Check power out of the optical head in ALL LINE and GREEN.

a. Go to service mode and current mode.

• To go to service mode: Move the control electronics PCB switch SW2-1 and 2 from the
"OFF" to the "ON position. The system must see this transition from "OFF" to "ON", in order
for it to go into service mode.

• To go into current mode: Move the SCR PCB switch SW1 from the "OFF" to the "ON"
position.

b. Use a calibrated power meter to measure the tube output power at the optical head (fiber
unattached) with 35 amps of tube current.

ALL LINE - no less than 3.2 watts.

GREEN - no less than 1.2 watts.

c. If the output power meets these minimums, the tube resonator alignment is good. If not, go to
step 2.

2. Check and clean any dirty optics on the optics plate.

3. Recheck power out as in step 1.

If the output power now meets the minimum power specifications, the tube resonator alignment is
good. If the power is still low, go on to step 4.

4. Align the tube resonator OC mirror position as follows.

CAUTION: Do not use a ball driver to do this adjustment, the screws are part of the tube and if they are
damaged a new tube will be required.

• Check the mode of the tube. The mode rings should be round, not elliptical. In order for the modes
to be observed the top cover will have to be lifted and supported.

Remove the four nuts holding the top cover of the NOVUS. Lift the cover and support
it so
the beam can be seen on the wall.

• The OC adjustment is accomplished by accessing the four holes on the optics plate and adjusting
any one of the four hex screws. The vertical adjustment screws will be designated as X, and the
horizontal adjustment screws will be designated as By
Y. adjusting the X or Y screws, the OC mirror
holder plate orientation changes by varying the tilt of the OC mirror holder plate in relation to the
tube. (Refer to the drawing).

CALIBRATIONS & ADJUSTMENTS NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


3-6 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

While observing the mode, make a small X or Y adjustment. The X adjustments will tilt the
orientation of the OC mirror plate vertically, and the Y adjustments will tilt the OC mirror
plate horizontally.

Make small adjustments in both the X and Y screws until the mode is round then recheck
power as in step 1. Small adjustments can be made using the power meter to get maximum
power once the mode is round.

Note: If one of the X or Y screws are loosened be sure the corresponding X or Y screw is
tightened down the same amount to retain the tension.

5. Check all four of the tube adjustment screws. It must be tight when the tube alignment is completed.

Y Adjustments

X Adjustments

TOP VIEW

OC Mirror Holder Plate

OC Mirror

X or Y Adjustment Screws

TUBE

SIDE VIEW

FIG. 3.1
NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL CALIBRATIONS & ADJUSTMENTS
0614-134-01 08/98 3-7
®
®

3.5 OPTICAL HEAD CHECKOUT & ALIGNMENT

1. Check-adjust M1 mirror to position beam onto Photocells.

a. Go to Service and Current mode. Remove the connector to see the Photocell board. Fire the laser
and turn the power down to a minimum power setting.

b. Check the position of the argon beam on the photocells.


This can be done by inserting a small thin
piece of paper into the beamsplitter and observe the beam hitting the photocells. The beam must be
completely on the photocells.

c. If the argon beam is not on the photocells. Loosen the two M1 mirror bracket screws and adjust the
mirror so as to position the beam on the photocells. (Rotating the M1 mirror will move the argon
beam right and left on the photocells - sliding the M1 mirror will move the beam up and down on the
photocells).

M1 mirror adjustments Photocell Molex connection

slide to move beam up and down


photocells

beam splitter

rotate to move right or left

FIG. 3.2

d. Remove the focus cell and check the position of the beam coming through the fiber focus assembly.
The argon beam should be in the center with enough room in every direction to move the assembly
for fiber alignment. If the beam is not in the center or the assembly does not have the movement
needed, repeat step c above and position the argon beam on the photocells in a direction to enable the
beam to be in the center of the fiber focus assembly. Repeat steps c and d as necessary.

2. Check-adjust the HeNe to be coaxial to the treatment beam.

CAUTION: Do not use ball end hex keys on the screw for the HeNe. The screws are small and soft
and therefore can be damaged unless great care is taken.

CALIBRATIONS & ADJUSTMENTS NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


3-8 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

Near Field Mirror

Near field spot


HeNe Beam

Argon Beam
Far field spot

Far Field Mirror

FIG. 3.3

a. In order for the laser beam to be observed on the wall, the top cover must be lifted and supported,
and the fiber must be removed from the optics head.

b. Position the laser so the argon beam hits a surface at least three to four feet away from the laser.
Fire the laser so the argon beam hits the surface and mark this spot with a piece of paper or tape.
This is the far field spot.

c. Place a piece of tape with a small hole on it over the fiber mount port. Adjust the tape while the
laser is fired so the beam goes through the small hole. This is the near field spot.

d. Adjust the near field HeNe mirror so the HeNe beam goes through the near field spot.

e. Adjust the far field HeNe mirror so the HeNe beam hits the far field spot.

f. Repeat steps d and e until the HeNe and the argon beam are on the same path.

3. Check-adjust the argon beam for the dual fiber system.

a. Remove both fiber focus lens assemblies.

b. Measure or mark the distance of the fiber ports on a piece of paper or tape at the optics bench.

c. Fire the laser in fiber port one and place a piece of paper or tape on the wall (two or three feet)
distance from the laser with the beam hitting the marked spot for fiber one.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL CALIBRATIONS & ADJUSTMENTS


0614-134-01 08/98 3-9
®
®

d. Fire the laser in fiber port two and adjust the second fiber mirror until the beam strikes the marked
spot on the wall for the second fiber.

This distance
should be the same as this distance

FIG. 3.4

3.5.1 Adjust the Optical Fiber

The fiber alignment procedure between earlier and newer NOVUS 2000 are different. The earlier single-fiber
NOVUS 2000 systems have a permanently attached optical fiber which is attached to the optical head assem-
bly and routed out through the back of the console and to the delivery system. The new NOVUS 2000
systems has two optical fibers (internal and external). The internal fiber is connected in series between the
optical head assembly to the external bulk head. The external fiber, which is part of the delivery system
connects to the external bulk head.

Aligning the optical fiber for the older version NOVUS 2000, refer to Topic 3.5.1.1. Aligning the optical fibers
for the new NOVUS 2000, refer to Topic 3.5.1.2.

NOVUS 2000

DELIVERY
Optical
Optical Fiber SYSTEM
Head

(Early Version of the NOVUS 2000)

CALIBRATIONS & ADJUSTMENTS NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


3-10 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

NOVUS 2000

EXTERNAL
BULKHEAD

OPTICAL DELIVERY
SYSTEM
HEAD INTERNAL FIBER EXTERNAL FIBER

(New Version of the NOVUS 2000)

3.5.1.1 Fiber Alignment (Early Version Only)

1. Set up.

a. Remove the fiber and fiber focus lens assembly. Set the laser at a very low power and observe the
laser beam with a piece of paper as it exits the fiber port mount.

b. If the beam is not exiting through the center of the fiber mount, loosen the mounting screws and
adjust the fiber port assembly until the beam is exiting through the center.

c. Install the fiber focus lens and center the beam using the X and Y adjustments screws.

d. Set power to 0.5 watts at the fiber port using a calibrated power meter.

2. Align the fiber.

a. Install the fiber and fire the laser while adjusting the X and Y screws to achieve at least 0.45 watts,
(90%) of power out of the fiber.

b. If the power does not achieve 90% transmission, a small adjustment of the Z axis may be necessary.
Adjust the Z axis screw counterclockwise and then readjust the X and Y screws to see if the power
has increased. If the power decreased, continue to adjust the Z axis counterclockwise until maximum
power is achieved. If the power went down, turn the Z axis clockwise until maximum power is
achieved.

Note: To adjust the fiber for the proper cone angle, measure the diameter of the argon beam
at 4 inches from the end of the optical fiber. It should be 0.5 inches.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL CALIBRATIONS & ADJUSTMENTS


0614-134-01 08/98 3-11
®
®

c. Loosen the fiber port screws, (the same screws used in step 1.b). While firing the laser, slowly
move the entire fiber port and observe the beam changing size. Continue to move the port until the
beam is the smallest.

d.) Readjust the X and Y screws for maximum power and check the cone angle. Repeat step b until
the proper cone angle is achieved.

NOTE: If the system has a second fiber, repeat steps for the second fiber. The power out of
second fiber may be 5% less power than the first.

3.5.1.2 Fiber Alignment (New Version Only)

1. Align the internal fiber.

a. Set the power out of the fiber mount on the optical head for 200mW in current mode, then install
the internal fiber.

≥ 194
b. Adjust the X,Y, and Z axis for optimal transmission. If power out of the fiber is mW,
continue to step C. If not, loosen the two screws that holds the fiber mount assembly in place and
adjust for the smallest cone angle, then readjust the X,Y and Z axis.

c. Lock down all optical adjustment screws and check the power out of the internal fiber.

d. Connect the other end of the internal fiber to the external bulkhead fiber mount on the console.

2. Align the external fiber.

a. Connect the external fiber from the delivery system to the output port of the external bulkhead
fiber mount.

b. Adjust the X and Y axis, then check the laser beam.

NOTE: The laser beam out of the delivery system should be small and concentrated.

c. If the power out is≥166 mW continue to next step. If not, adjust the Z axis on the bulkhead fiber
mount. The Z axis adjustment is done by rotating the internal fiber connector (which is connected to
the external bulkhead fiber mount). Rotate the Z axis adjustment 90˚ at a time then adjust the X and
Y axis on the external bulkhead.

≥166 be
d. Repeat step c until the beam spot is small and concentrated. The output power must mW.

e. Lock the adjustment screws and confirm the power out.

3. Adjust the HeNe aiming beam for optimal transmission through the fibers.

NOTE: If this is a dual fiber system, select the second fiber and repeat steps a thru e.

CALIBRATIONS & ADJUSTMENTS NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


3-12 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

3.5.2 Green Filter Alignment

1. Turn the laser on.

2. Go to service and current mode.

3. Attach an LM-2 power meter head at the fiber output using the power meter nut.

4. Fire the laser in ALL LINES and adjust the power to read 20 mW.

5. Fire the laser in GREEN and read the power.

The power should be between 40 and 50 microwatts. If power is correct, continue with the
calibration procedure. If power is not correct go to step 6.

6. Align the green filter.

Loosen the green filter mounting screws and rotate the green filter until the green power out is
between 40 to 50 microwatts.

NOTE: The color of the laser beam may not appear green when the system is set to the green
mode at such a low power setting.

7. Tighten the mounting screws and verify the alignment of both the argon and green laser beam.

3.6 POWER CALIBRATION

The following calibration procedure remains the same for the early version and the new version NOVUS 2000
systems, with the exception that the laser power is measured out of the fiber for the early version NOVUS
2000, and out of the bulkhead for the new version NOVUS 2000.

Note that the early version NOVUS 2000 must be calibrated with no smart fiber resistor attached.

Inspect the Photo-sensor board. If the Photo-sensor board has two potentiometers, proceed on to perform
topic 3.6.1. If the Photo-sensor board has four potentiometers on it, proceed on to 3.6.2.

The following equipment/tools are required to calibrate the NOVUS:

• Field Masteror equivalent power meter


• Potentiometer adjustment tool
• DVM, Fluke 77 or equivalent.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL CALIBRATIONS & ADJUSTMENTS


0614-134-01 08/98 3-13
®
®

3.6.1 Power Calibration With Two Pot Dual Channel Photo-Sensor Board

Perform the following steps to calibrate a NOVUS which has the Dual Channel Photo-sensor board. This is
the older of the two potentiometer PCB's.

1. Turn the laser and circuit breaker off. Then open the doors of the enclosure.

2. Open the control panel, and remove the optics plate cover.

3. Turn the circuit breaker, and system on. Then go to service mode.

Move the control electronics PCB switch SW2-1 and 2 from the "OFF" to the "ON" position. Once the
system sees the transition from "OFF" to "ON", it will go into service mode.

4. Measure the power out of the fiber/bulkhead output using the power meter.

Set the power meter to the three watt scale. No smart fiber resistor should be used at the output end
of the fiber.

5. Select "ALL LINES" and "CONTINUOUS".

Adjust the front panel power display to 1000mW and


djusta R4 fully counterclockwise.

6. Adjust R1 on the Photo-sensor board for 1.00 watt at the power meter with the footswitch depressed.

7. Select "GREEN ONLY".

Press the footswitch and measure the output of the fiber. If the green only power is not 1.00 watt,
adjust R1 until the difference between the measured power and 1.00 watt is one half of the originally
measured difference (e.g., original measured power 1.2 watts, adjust R1 for output of 1.10 watts).

8. Select "ALL LINES".

Press the footswitch and measure output of the fiber.


The differences between "all lines output and
1.00 watt" and "green only output and 1.00 watt" should be the same (e.g., if all lines output is .900
watt, the green only output should be set to 1.10 watt; so that each is .1 watt away from 1 watt. )

Continue to adjust R1 (between "ALL LINES" and "GREEN ONLY") until all the parameters have
been satisfied in the above step.

9. Connect a DVM between TP2 and TP3, and adjust R4 for 0.0V on the DVM.

10. Switch SW2-2 on the control electronics back to OFF (non service mode).

11. Turn the system off and reconnect the fiber.

12. Turn the system on.

CALIBRATIONS & ADJUSTMENTS NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


3-14 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

The system should come up to standby without errors.

3.6.2 Power Calibration With Four Pot Wavelength Selectable Photo-sensor Board

Perform the following steps to calibrate a NOVUS which has the Wavelength selectable Photo-sensor
board. This is the newer, four potentiometer, PCB:

1. Turn the system and circuit breaker off. Then open the left side door of the enclosure.

2. Open the control panel cover, and remove the optics plate cover.

3. Turn on the circuit breaker, and the system on. Go to service mode.

4. Measure the power at the fiber output using the power meter.

Set the power meter to the 3 watt scale. No smart fiber resistor should be used at the output end of
the fiber.

5. Select ALL LINES and CONTINUOUS.

Adjust the front panel power display to 1000mW. Adjust R3 and R4 fully counterclockwise.

6. Look at the PCB.

There will be a jumper near the words "GRN ALL", or "ALL GRN". The jumper location determines
which potentiometers adjust which wavelengths.
The position of this
jumper will determine
a. If the jumper is located near the words
which potentiometers
"GRN ALL", the green power is adjusted with will adjust which wavelengths.
the left potentiometer (R2 for power
photocell, R4 for safety photocell), and the all
lines is adjusted with the right potentiometer GRN ALL

(R1 for power photocell and R3 for safety ALL GRN


J60

photocell). R4 R3 R2 R1

1) Select All Line mode and 1000 mw


on the power display.

FIG. 3.5
Press the footswitch, adjust
potentiometer R1 on the Photo-sensor
board for 1.00 watt at the power meter, then release the footswitch.

2) Connect DVM to TP2 and TP3 of the Photo-sensor board, depress the footswitch
± 10mV at the DVM.
and adjust potentiometer R3 for 0VDC

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL CALIBRATIONS & ADJUSTMENTS


0614-134-01 08/98 3-15
®
®

3) Release the footswitch, and select "GREEN ONLY".

4) Press the footswitch, then adjust the potentiometer R2 for 1.00 watt at the fiber/
bulkhead.

±10mV, at the DVM (still across TP2


5) Adjust the potentiometer R4 to obtain 0VDC
and TP3) with the footswitch still depressed.

b. If the jumper is located near the words "ALL GRN", the green power is adjusted by the
right potentiometer (R1 for power photocell and R3 for safety photocell), and the all lines is
adjusted with the left potentiometer (R2 for power photocell and R4 for safety photocell).

1) Select "GREEN ONLY", press the footswitch, adjust the potentiometer R1 for 1
watt at the fiber/bulkhead, then release the footswitch.

2) Connect DVM to TP2 and TP3 of the Photodetector PCB, depress the footswitch,
± 10mV at the DVM, then release the
adjust the potentiometer R3 for 0VDC
footswitch.

3) Select ALL LINES.

4) Depress the footswitch, then adjust the potentiometer R2 to obtain 1.00 watts at the
fiber/bulkhead.

±10mV, on the DVM (still across TP2


5) Adjust the potentiometer R4 to obtain 0VDC
and TP3) with the footswitch still depressed.

7. Release the footswitch, disconnect the DVM, and place SW2-2 on the Control Electronics PCB to OFF
(non-service mode).

8. Turn the system off, reconnect the fiber, then turn the system back on. The system should come up
without errors.

3.7 FINAL FIELD CHECKOUT

1. Check power out of the optical head in ALL LINE.

Go to service mode and current mode. Attach a power meter head to the fiber port. Fire the laser
and adjust the current pot to achieve 35 amps of current. Measure the output of the optical head and
confirm that the power is 3.2 watts or better.

2. Verify the safety photocell zero offset.

Fire the laser in each color, checking the zero offset while firing. The displayed zero offset voltage
must be less than 100 millivolts.

CALIBRATIONS & ADJUSTMENTS NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


3-16 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

3. Verify exposure timing.

To check the exposure time, connect oscilloscope to TP1 and TP2 of the Photocell PCB. Select 200
±5% of the selected exposure time,
milliwatts power. Confirm that actual exposure time is within
across the range of selectable exposure times.

4. Verify repeat mode function and timing.

With the oscilloscope still connected as in the previous step, test operate the repeat mode function by
selecting repeat mode and each of the repeat mode intervals.

5. Check the LDS-20 slit lamp delivery system (if installed).

a. Check the slit lamp illumination and visual focus (see LDS-20 service manual).

b. Check the aiming/treatment beam movement.

c. Check safety filter operation.

Remove the binoculars and check for proper movement of the Eye Safety (ESF).
Filter Then
confirm the NOVUS will not fire if the ESF is held out of the viewing path.

d. Confirm the calibration through the slit lamp at 100 micron spot size. Delivered power must be
within ±20% of indicated power across the power range. Typically, it is better.

e. Make burns.

Confirm spot sizes match those on the Coherent yellow test burn card, using the power
settings, exposure times and spot sizes printed on the card.

6. Check the LDS-10A and Zeiss delivery system (if installed and on earlier NOVUS only).

a. Check the slit lamp illumination and visual focus.

b. Check the aiming/treatment beam movement.

c. Check the safety filter operation.

Remove the binoculars and check for proper movement of the ESF. Then confirm the
NOVUS will not fire if the ESF is held out of the viewing path.

d. Confirm the calibration through the slit lamp at 100 micron spot size. Delivered power must be
within ±20% of indicated power across the power range. Typically, it is better.

e. Make burns.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL CALIBRATIONS & ADJUSTMENTS


0614-134-01 08/98 3-17
®
®

Confirm the spot sizes match those on the Coherent yellow test burn card, using the power
settings, exposure times and spot sizes printed on the card.

7. Check the LaserLink Haag Streit (H/S) (if it is installed).

a. Confirm the safety filter is visible through the occulars when the laser link in place.

b. Perform the pre-treatment procedure to establish correct working distance and focus.

CAUTION: It is very important that the LaserLink be adjusted for focus at 50 µm, and not at any other spot
size.

1.) Attach a target card at the chin rest, visible through the slit lamp.

2.) Set magnification to maximum, focus the slit lamp on the target using the joystick, then
lock down the slit lamp.

3.) Set the magnification on the lowest setting, then, one eye at a time, adjust the eyepiece
from positive towards negative to obtain the sharpest focus (always adjust from positive
towards the negative to find focus - if you go too far, go back to fully positive and try again,
adjusting towards the negative).

4.) Set the magnification to the highest setting, unlock the slit lamp base and move the lamp
with the joystick to focus the slit lamp on the target.

5.) Go back and forth between 3 and 4 above until no slit lamp movement or change in
eyepiece setting is required between the two magnifications.

6.) Turn on the Novus and get an aiming beam projected onto the target.

7.) Select a 50 micron spot size, adjust the laser spot position for centering in the illumination
and field of view, then adjust the laser beam focus control for smallest spot on the target.

c. Check the power calibration.

Confirm the calibration through the slit lamp at 100 micron spot size. Delivered power must
be within±20% of indicated power across the range. Typically, it is better.

d. Make test burns.

Confirm spot sizes match those on the Coherent yellow test burn card, using the power
settings, exposure times and spot sizes printed on the card.

8. Check the LaserLink Z (if installed and on newer NOVUS only).

a. Center the LaserLink Z micromanipulator.

CALIBRATIONS & ADJUSTMENTS NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


3-18 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

The aiming beam should be projected to the center of the field of view when the
micromanipulator is released. The user vertical and horizontal adjustment controls will
provide a range of movement sufficient.

If unable to center the aiming beam, be sure the micromanipulator is correctly seated on the
mag changer before attempting the vertical and/or horizontal centering adjustments that
follow.

V erti cal adjustm ents Screws

Mounting screws to
loosen f or horizonta l
adjustm ent.

FIG. 3.6

INTERIOR VIEW, MICROMANIPULATOR


& TELESCOPE ASSEMBLY, BOTTOM
COVER PLATE REMOVED

VERTICAL CENTERING - Adjust the hex head screw and the two set screws on the lower
laser mirror mount ( the mirror that directs the beam out towards the treatment site). The
screws must be tight when the adjustment is complete.

HORIZONTAL CENTERING - Remove the telescope assembly from the slit lamp, then
remove the cover plate on the telescope assembly base by removing the small hex screw and
the two securing pins ( the threaded pins are lightly glued and may be destroyed by removal,
p/n is 0624-040-01). Once the cover plate is removed, locate the two hex head screws that
secure the micromanipulator. Loosen the two screws to reposition the micromanipulator in
the horizontal, then retighten.

b. Adjust the LaserLink Z illumination.

1) Set up.

Hang a test target paper on the chin rest, then set up the slit lamp for correct focal
distance and comfortable viewing of the target surface. Select the 20 mm
illumination circle setting.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL CALIBRATIONS & ADJUSTMENTS


0614-134-01 08/98 3-19
®
®

2) Check-adjust the upper mirror for horizontal centering in the field of view.

Select a vertical slit. The slit should be centered from side to side in the field of view.
If not, loosen the three set screws in the assembly base, rotate the top portion of the
assembly to center the slit (from upper mirror), then retighten the three set screws.

Lower mirror side to side: Adjusted with the two


mounting screws that secure the mirror mount to the Upper mirror up-down: A single pair of push pulls,
body, one located just behind each post. To adjust, a set screw that threads through the bottom of
loosen, reposition the mount, then retighten the two the mirror mount to push against the mirror
screws. holder and a hex head screw that pulls the mirror
holder towards the mount.

Lower mirror up-down: Adjusted by two sets


of two adjustment screws, one set on each
side of the mirror. For each side, a set screw Upper mirror side to side: Loosen the
threads through the rear of the mirror holder, three set screws around the barrel,
pushing against the mirror mount, and a hex rotate the barrel on its base to reposition
head screw pulls the front of the mirror mount the upper mirror, then retighten the set
into the mirror holder. screws.

FIG. 3.7

3) Check-adjust the upper mirror for vertical


centering in the field of view.

Rotate the slit to a horizontal position, then check the slit projected from the upper
mirror for centering in the field of view from top to bottom. If not centered, adjust
the upper mirror adjustment screw and adjustment set screw to move the slit up or
down in the field of view. Both screws must be tight when adjustment is complete.

4) Check-adjust the horizontal position of the lower mirror for coincidence at the target with
the top mirror illumination slit.

Rotate the slit to vertical, then check that the lower mirror illumination slit is
centered on the upper mirror illumination slit. If not, loosen the two screws that
secure the lower mirror mount to the rest of the assembly, reposition the mount to
center the lower mirror illumination slit on the upper mirror illumination slit, then
retighten the mounting screws.

5) Check-adjust the vertical positioning of the lower mirror for coincidence at the target
surface with the top mirror illumination slit.

CALIBRATIONS & ADJUSTMENTS NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


3-20 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

Rotate the slit to horizontal, then check that the lower mirror illumination slit is
centered on the upper mirror illumination slit. If not, adjust the lower mirror to move
the horizontal slit up or down using the lower mirror adjustment screws and
adjustment set screws. There is an adjustment screw and adjustment set screw pair
on each side of the mirror. All screws must be tight when the adjustment is complete.

c. Check the slit lamp illumination and visual focus.

d. Check the aiming/treatment beam movement.

e. Perform the pre-treatment procedure to establish correct working distance and focus.

1.) Attach a target card at the chin rest, visible through the slit lamp.

2.) Set magnification to maximum, focus the slit lamp on the target using the joystick, then
lock down the slit lamp.

3.) Set the magnification on the lowest setting, then, one eye at a time, adjust the eyepiece
from positive towards negative to obtain the sharpest focus (always adjust from positive
towards the negative to find focus - if you go too far, go back to fully positive and try again,
adjusting towards the negative).

4.) Set the magnification to the highest setting, unlock the slit lamp base and move the lamp
with the joystick to focus the slit lamp on the target.

5.) Go back and forth between 3 and 4 above until no slit lamp movement or change in
eyepiece setting is required between the two magnifications.

6.) Turn on the Novus and get an aiming beam projected onto the target.

7.) Select a 50 micron spot size, adjust the laser spot position for centering in the illumination
and field of view, then adjust the laser beam focus control for smallest spot on the target.

f. Check the safety filter operation.

Remove the binoculars and check for proper movement of the ESF. Then confirm the
NOVUS will not fire if the ESF is held out of the viewing path.

g. Confirm the calibration through the slit lamp at 100 micron spot size. Delivered power must be
within ±20% of indicated power across the power range. Typically, it is better.

h. Make burns.

Confirm the spot sizes match those on the Coherent yellow test burn card, using the power
settings, exposure times and spot sizes printed on the card.

9. Check the Endo delivery system (if installed).

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL CALIBRATIONS & ADJUSTMENTS


0614-134-01 08/98 3-21
®
®

a. Check ESF operation.

Check for proper movement and confirm the Novus will not fire if the ESF is held out of the
viewing path (remove the binoculars, restrain the filter, try to fire).

b. Check the power calibration.

Confirm the calibration at minimum and maximum, using a calibrated power meter. Power
must be within±20% of indicated power. Typically, it is better.

10. Check the LIO (if installed).

a. Adjustment of the illumination intensity.

Earlier Novus - If the Novus has a separate LIO Fiber refer to the LIO manual for the
Illumination Intensity adjustment. Since this version of LIO may effect the Illumination
voltage.

New Version Novus- If it has the new LIO, set the illumination intensity knob to minimum
light intensity, then adjust illumination control PCB R6 until illumination from the LIO is just
barely visible.

b. Confirm the focal distance and spot size out of the LIO

Connect the LIO fiber to a fiber port. The LIO comes with either of two lens
assemblies installed. Each of the three available lens assemblies has a different focal
distance, allowing the system to be set up for a particular doctor's reach. Check to see
which lens assembly is installed, then confirm that the laser spot out of the LIO is
focused at the distance and size indicated.

PART NUMBER (LABEL) DISTANCE FROM CENTER OF MIRROR TO


FOCUS

0612-610-01 (320 mm) 10.47 inches (266 mm), spot size≤1100 microns

0612-611-01 (420 mm) 14.45 inches (367 mm), spot size≤ 900 microns

c. Confirm the power calibration.

Confirm the calibration at minimum and maximum, using a calibrated power meter. Power
must be within±20% of indicated power. Typically, it is better.

11. Verify system key switch operation, system passes self tests and system detects operator correctable
faults.

a. Attach a footswitch, interlock connector, delivery system, and fiber, then turn on the system.

CALIBRATIONS & ADJUSTMENTS NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


3-22 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

Verify key switch operates properly and that the key cannot be removed except in the “O”
position. Verify that the LASER EMISSION light turns on before the countdown is complete.

b. Once the system goes to STANDBY, select READY, then remove the interlock connector from the
rear panel.

Verify the system goes to STANDBY, that E2 is displayed, and that the system will not go to
READY.

c. Replace the interlock connector, select READY, then disconnect the delivery system fiber.

Verify the system goes to STANDBY, that E1 is displayed, and that the system will not go to
READY.

d. Replace the fiber, select READY, then disconnect the footswitch.

Verify the system goes to STANDBY, that E5 is displayed, and that the system will not go to
READY.

NOTE: There is approximately an 8 second delay before E5 appears.

e. Replace the footswitch.

12. Prepare system for acceptance by the customer.

Replace all covers, connect delivery systems and dress all cables.

13. Test operate the system.

Confirm the system turns on, passes through self tests and goes to standby. Confirm the system
operates across the range of power and exposure times with all available delivery systems.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL CALIBRATIONS & ADJUSTMENTS


0614-134-01 08/98 3-23
®
®

4.0 THEORY OF OPERATION

4.1 INTRODUCTION

4.1.1 Overview

This section describes the NOVUS 2000 in detail. The other members of the NOVUS family are essentially
similar, as described in Section 1.

The NOVUS 2000 is an argon photocoagulator laser system designed for ophthalmic and surgical applica-
tions. Equipment description and operating instructions are included in the NOVUS 2000 Operator Manual.

Laser light is created by a Coherent Innova ® ceramic/tungsten argon laser tube with a principal output at
488 to 514 nanometers. A “green only” mode, selectable from the front panel, places a filter in the light path
which removes most of the blue wavelengths. Delivered power is selectable, in increments, from .05 to 2.5
watts in “ALL LINES”, or .05 to 1.0 watts in “GREEN ONLY". The argon tube is turned on only for the
duration of each exposure. A HeNe laser is used to provide an aiming beam. The aiming beam is operator
adjustable from just visible to a maximum of 1 milliwatt. Because the aiming beam and treatment beam are of
different wavelengths, an attached delivery system can use a fixed eye safety filter, instead of a moving eye
safety filter, to protect the user from flashback during treatment.

Exposure times are selectable at the front panel, in increments, from .01 to 1.00 seconds. A continuous mode is
also selectable, but it actually consists of a series of 65 second exposures separated by brief intervals. A repeat
mode is selectable at the front panel, in increments, from .1 to 2.0 second intershot intervals.

For the purposes of this discussion, the NOVUS 2000 is divided into eight functional subsystems. A brief
description of each subsystem is provided in subtopic 4.1.2. A detailed discussion of each is provided in
topics 4.2 thru 4.9.

4.1.2 Functional Subsystems

The NOVUS 2000 is divided into the following functional subsystems:

POWER DISTRIBUTION - The NOVUS 2000 is configured at the factory to operate from single
phase 208-230VAC, or three phase 380-415VAC. The power distribution system, as described in this
chapter, includes the circuit breaker, main contactor, contactor/filament transformers, axillary power
connector, fuses, 2 DC power supplies, and the 24VAC loop which powers the main contactor
(keyswitch, emergency off switch, hold-on relay, contactor, contactor transformer).

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL THEORY OF OPERATION


0614-134-01 08/98 4-1
®
®

COOLING - Cooling is provided by a closed loop distilled water system. No external water connec-
tions are required. Distilled water is circulated by a pump through the passbank, laser tube, heat
exchanger, and reservoir. A fan forces air through the heat exchanger (forced air exits out bottom of
unit) to remove heat picked up in the passbank and tube. Fan speed is controlled by a fan controller
circuit which senses the air temperature at the heat exchanger air outlet and adjusts fan speed accord-
ingly.

Coolant flow and temperature are monitored by sensors. The sensors are read by the software at
regular intervals and the software will take action to protect the equipment from overtemperature or
waterflow problems.

The key to the ability of the system to run without external water flow for cooling is in the manner in
which the tube is operated. The tube runs (is ionized) only for the duration of each exposure. Be-
tween exposures, there is no tube current (or magnet current), and, therefore, much less heat is
generated than in a photocoagulator in which the tube runs constantly.

CONTROL ELECTRONICS - The control electronics subsystem provides overall system control for
the NOVUS 2000. It includes a 68000 microprocessor, ROM, RAM, A/D and D/A converters,
counter/timers, watchdog timer, RS232/RS485 ports, and digital I/O circuits. The microprocessor
executes a set of software instructions, permanently stored in EPROM, to monitor system perfor-
mance and safely operate the laser in response to operator inputs.

DISPLAY - The Display subsystem operates the various front panel indicators, monitors operator
inputs from the front panel, and carries on two way communication with the Control Electronics via
an RS-485 port. The display subsystem includes an 8032 microcontroller, EPROM, RS-485 port,
backlighting P/S, various electronic circuits to interface the microprocessor with the front panel
controls and indicators, and the front panel controls and indicators themselves.

SAFETY MONITOR - The Safety Monitor subsystem independently monitors various system
parameters for unsafe or out of tolerance conditions. In response to detected faults, the Safety Moni-
tor can release the safety shutter (blocking beam path), shutdown the laser power supply, and/or de-
energize the main contactor.

LASER POWER SUPPLY - The Laser Power Supply subsystem responds to Control Electronics
commands to start the laser tube and provide a timed pulse of argon light at the selected power level.
When the exposure is complete, the Laser Power Supply shuts off the tube. Running the tube only
during the exposure greatly reduces the amount of heat generated in the L.P.S., allowing the NOVUS
2000 to operate without external water cooling.

A crowbar circuit in the L. P. S. stops laser emission in a matter of microseconds in response to


“shutdown” commands from the Control Electronics or Safety Monitor. This method of responding
to fault conditions during an exposure is much faster than the action of a mechanical safety shutter.

There are two different Laser Power Supplies available for the NOVUS 2000: a single phase 208 - 230
VAC version, and a three phase 380 - 415VAC (50HZ) version. The single phase power supply is
significantly different from the three phase version, and the two types are dealt with separately in
this manual. The three phase supply uses a full wave bridge rectifier and in-line switching of IGBT's
to develop the B+ voltage, while the single phase supply uses phase angle firing control of a set of
SCRs to develop the B+ voltage. Both versions of the Laser Power Supply use light regulation in
normal operation, but are capable of current control in the service mode.

THEORY OF OPERATION NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


4-2 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

SOFTWARE - There are two microprocessors in the NOVUS 2000. A 68000 in the Control Electronics
subsystem, and an 8032 in the Display subsystem. Each runs a separate set of software instructions.
The software instructions are stored in EPROM, allowing software revisions to be accomplished by
simply replacing the EPROM chips.

The software instructions for the display panel microprocessor define the logical sequence of steps
that the 8032 microprocessor executes to communicate with the Control Electronics, maintain dis-
played information (power level, exposure time, status lights, etc.), and detect operator inputs
(standby/ready, power increase/decrease, exposure setting, repeat mode/rate, etc.).

The software instructions for the Control Electronics microprocessor define the logical sequence of
steps that the 68000 microprocessor executes to run the NOVUS 2000. This includes responding to
operator inputs at the display panel to provide treatment pulses of laser light from the laser tube,
extensive safety monitoring, and error detection/reporting to assist operators and technicians in
problem solving.

OPTICS - The Optical subsystem includes components which operate on the HeNe and/or argon
beams. The HeNe beam is focused by a lens, directed coaxial to the argon beam by two mirrors,
passed through a second lens and polarizing wheel, and then joined with the argon beam at a folding
mirror which turns the output of the argon tube down the beam path. The two beams then travel
coaxially down the optical bed, through the green only filter (if selected), through the beamsplitter,
past the safety shutter, and into the fiber mount, which delivers the beam into the optical fiber.

The wedge/beam splitter provides a small sample of the beam to two separate photocells. One for
the Safety Monitor, and one for the Control Electronics/Laser Power Supply. A smart fiber com-
pletes the optical path from the fiber mount to the delivery system. The delivery system type is
sensed by the NOVUS 2000 via two electrical wires which run inside the fiber.

4.2 POWER DISTRIBUTION (SINGLE PHASE)

4.2.1 Overview

(Refer to 8-16). The single phase laser power supply operates off of supply voltages of 50-60 HZ, 208 - 230
VAC. The power cord has 3 conductors (6AWG). The two active leads are connected to CB1, a 45 amp circuit
breaker. The ground input connects to the base of the unit, just below the circuit breaker. See the installation
instructions for directions on configuring for 50HZ primary power.

4.2.2 CB1 On, Contactor Off

When CB1 is turned on, and before the keyswitch is turned on, primary power is provided to the main
contactor, and the main contactor transformer primary winding (fused both lines, .25 amps).

The secondary of the contactor transformer (develops 24VAC) is connected to a loop which includes the
contactor winding, fuse (2 amp), contactor hold-on relay (on the Control Electronics PCB), keyswitch, and
emergency off button. The relay, keyswitch, fuse, and emergency off switch are all capable of opening the
24VAC loop, and, therefore, de-energizing (or preventing energizing of ) the main contactor.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL THEORY OF OPERATION


0614-134-01 08/98 4-3
®
®

Another secondary loop is supplied to Control Electronics J17, 6 and 5, where it is used to develop a 34VDC
supply for operating a delivery system eye safety filter.

4.2.3 Turn On

The keyswitch has an off (labeled 0), run (labeled I), and start (labeled II) position. The laser is turned on by
turning the keyswitch to the start position momentarily, and then releasing it to the run position.

Turning the keyswitch to the start position connects the keyswitch common pin to the keyswitch start pin.
This bypasses the hold-on relay, and (assuming the emergency off button is not depressed), completes the
24VAC loop to the contactor winding. The contactor closes. With the contactor closed, primary power is
available throughout the system, and the Control Electronics should quickly energize the hold on-relay.

When the keyswitch is released, it moves to the “RUN” position. In the run position, the 24VAC line is sent to
the contactor winding via the hold-on relay, and one of the contacts of the contactor. By the time the
keyswitch moves to the “RUN” position, the contactor must have closed (or no turn on will occur at all), and
the hold-on relay must have been energized by the Control Electronics (or the contactor will de-energize).

4.2.4 AC Distribution Past The Contactor

With the main contactor closed, AC power is distributed as follows:

• Directly to the Laser Power Supply. AC distribution within the LPS will be covered in the power
supply topic itself.

• Via two 1.6 amp fuses to the ferro-resonant filament transformer primary winding. Filament
current runs as long as the main contactor is on. The secondary develops approximately 3V at 23
amps.

• Via two .25 amp fuses to a low voltage power supply which develops regulated +5VDC, and
+15VDC. These voltages are referenced to chassis ground, and are distributed throughout the
system.

• Via two 1.2 amp fuses to a low voltage power supply which develops regulated 12VDC, referenced
to chassis ground. The 12VDC is routed to:

DISPLAY - Where it is used as a supply to PS1, which develops an AC supply for backlight-
ing of the front panel. This is nonswitched voltage for backlighting that is intended to be on
whenever the system is on.

CONTROL ELECTRONICS - Where it is used to supply:

*Hold on relay K1.

*The HeNe P/S, via J10.

THEORY OF OPERATION NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


4-4 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

*Green Only solenoid, switched by Q2, out on J10.

*Attenuator motor, out on J19.

SAFETY MONITOR - Where it is used as a turn on voltage to the gate of Q1, which switches
the 12VDC to the safety shutter.

• Via two 3.15 amp fuses to a two plug axillary power connector. Delivery systems plugged in here
must first be configured to operate off of 208-230 VAC.

• Via two 1.2 amp fuses to the cooling system pump.

• Via two .6 amp fuses to the cooling system fan.

• Via two .25 amp fuses to the Slit Lamp Illumination PCB.

4.2.5 Shutdown Of The Main Contactor

The 24VAC to the contactor can be opened by:

•The operator, by turning the keyswitch to the 0 position, or pressing the emergency off button.

•The Control Electronics, Laser Power Supply, or Safety Monitor systems, by de-energizing the hold
on relay located on the Control Electronics PCB.

The Safety Monitor will de-energize the relay if it measures laser power greater than 3.95
watts, or it detects treatment power, with the safety shutter open and the footswitch not
depressed.

The Control Electronics will de-energize the relay when it detects both of the following to be
true: laser delivering treatment power when none is being requested, and the safety shutter
out, when it should be in.

The single phase Laser Power Supply will de-energize the hold-on relay when it detects a B+
voltage of 210 VDC or more.

The Control Electronics will "beep" three times, then trip the main contactor, if during the
power up initialization and self test sequence it detects the flow sensor is malfunctioning or
that flow failed to reach its .5gpm.

• The fuse.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL THEORY OF OPERATION


0614-134-01 08/98 4-5
®
®

4.3 POWER DISTRIBUTION (3 PHASE)

4.3.1 Overview

(Refer to 8-21). The three phase Laser Power Supply operates off of supply voltages of 50/60 HZ, 380 -415
VAC. The power cord has 4 conductors. The three active leads are connected to CB1, a 20 amp circuit
breaker. The ground input connects to the base of the unit, just below the circuit breaker. The system does
not require a neutral lead.

4.3.2 CB1 On, Contactor Off

When CB1 is turned on, and before the keyswitch is turned on, primary power is provided to the main
contactor, and the main contactor transformer primary winding (fused both lines, .25 amps).

The secondary of the contactor transformer (develops 20VAC) is connected to a loop directly to the
overcurrent trip PCB in the laser P/S, and to another loop which includes the contactor winding, fuse (2
amp), contactor hold-on relay (on the Control Electronics PCB), keyswitch, and emergency off button. The
relay, keyswitch, fuse, emergency off switch, and the contactor trip PCB (not shown on the AC distribution
schematic) are all capable of opening the 20VAC loop, and, therefore, de-energizing (or preventing energizing
of) the main contactor.

See the three phase Laser Power Supply subtopics for details on the overcurrent contactor trip PCB.

Another secondary loop is supplied to Control Electronics J17, 6 and 5, where it is used to develop a 34VDC
supply for operating a delivery system eye safety filter.

4.3.3 Turn On

The keyswitch has an off (labeled 0), run (labeled I), and start (labeled II) position. The laser is turned on by
turning the keyswitch to the start position momentarily, and then releasing it to the run position.

Turning the keyswitch to the start position connects the keyswitch common pin to the keyswitch start pin.
This bypasses the hold-on relay, and (assuming the emergency off button is not depressed), completes the 20
VAC loop to the contactor winding. The contactor closes. With the contactor closed, primary power is
available throughout the system, and the Control Electronics should quickly energize the hold on-relay.

When the keyswitch is released, it moves to the “RUN” position. In the run position, the 20VAC line is sent
to the contactor winding via the hold-on relay, and one of the contacts of the contactor. By the time the
keyswitch moves to the “RUN” position, the contactor must have closed (or no turn on will occur at all), and
the hold-on relay must have been energized by the Control Electronics (or the contactor will de-energize).

THEORY OF OPERATION NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


4-6 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

4.3.4 AC Distribution Past The Contactor

With the main contactor closed, AC power is distributed as follows:

• Directly to the Laser Power Supply. AC distribution within the LPS will be covered in the power
supply topic itself.

• To a step down isolation transformer. The primary can be tapped to the closer of 380 or 415VAC
line voltage. The 220 VAC secondary output is sent to the following:

* Via two 1.6 amp fuses to the ferro-resonant filament transformer primary winding. Fila-
ment current runs as long as the main contactor is on. The secondary develops approxi-
mately 3V at 23 amps.

* Via two .25 amp fuses to a low voltage power supply which develops regulated +5VDC,
and +15VDC. These voltages are referenced to chassis ground, and are distributed through-
out the system.

* Via two 1.2 amp fuses to a low voltage power supply which develops regulated 12VDC,
referenced to chassis ground. The 12VDC is routed to:

DISPLAY - Where it is used as a supply to PS1, which develops an AC supply for


backlighting of the front panel. This is nonswitched voltage for backlighting that is
intended to be on whenever the system is on.

CONTROL ELECTRONICS - (Refer to 8-3) Where it is used to supply:

*Hold on relay K1.

*The HeNe P/S, via J10.

*Green Only solenoid, switched by Q2, out on J10.

*Attenuator motor, out on J19.

SAFETY MONITOR - Where it is used as a turn on voltage to the gate of Q1, which
switches the 12VDC to the safety shutter.

* Via two 3.15 amp fuses to a two plug axillary power connector. Delivery systems plugged
in here must first be configured to operate off of 208-230 VAC.

* Via two 1.2 amp fuses to the cooling system pump.

* Via two .6 amp fuses to the cooling system fan.

* Via two .25 amp fuses to the Slit lamp illumination PCB.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL THEORY OF OPERATION


0614-134-01 08/98 4-7
®
®

The step down transformer also has a center tapped 36 VAC secondary which supplies the IGBT Driver PCB
in the Laser Power Supply.

4.3.5 Shutdown Of The Main Contactor

The 24VAC to the contactor can be opened by:

• The operator, by turning the keyswitch to the 0 position, or pressing the emergency off button.

• The Control Electronics, Laser Power Supply, or Safety Monitor systems, by de-energizing the hold
on relay located on the Control Electronics board.

The Safety Monitor will de-energize the relay if it measures laser power greater than 3.95
watts, or it detects treatment power, with the safety shutter open and the footswitch not
depressed.

The Control Electronics will de-energize the relay when it detects both of the following to be
true: laser delivering treatment power when none is being requested, and the safety shutter
out, when it should be in.

The single phase Laser Power Supply will de-energize the hold-on relay when it detects a B+
voltage of 210 VDC or more.

The Control Electronics will "beep" three times, then trip the main contactor, if during the
power up initialization and self test sequence, it detects the flow sensor is malfunctioning, or
that flow failed to reach its .5gpm.

• The fuse.

• For the three phase system only, an over current trip is included in the secondary loop, between the
transformer and emergency off button (not shown on early releases of the AC INTERCONNECT).

4.4 COOLING SYSTEM

4.4.1 Overview

The cooling subsystem uses a centrifugal pump to circulate distilled water through a closed loop which
includes the passbank, tube, heat exchanger and reservoir. Heat is transferred to the water in the passbank
and tube. Heat is removed from the water at the heat exchanger.

A variable speed fan forces air through the heat exchanger. Fan speed is controlled by the FAN SPEED
CONTROL PCB. A thermistor mounted at the air outlet of the heat exchanger provides a voltage to the fan
speed control PCB that is proportional to the temperature of the outlet air. The PCB circuitry controls fan
speed to maintain an outlet air temperature of 37 to 40˚ C.

THEORY OF OPERATION NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


4-8 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

4.4.2 AC Supply

The pump motor runs on the 208 - 230VAC service. When the NOVUS 2000 is powered up, the main
contactor closes, and power is available to the pump motor, via two 1.2 amp fuses.

Fan operating voltage is supplied via the fan speed control PCB. The PCB receives 208 - 230 VAC from the
main contactor, via two .6 amp fuses.

4.4.3 Fan Speed Control PCB

The fan speed control PCB monitors the output of thermistor, and supplies a variable operating voltage to the
fan to maintain a constant outlet air temperature. This is a vendor supplied non-field repairable PCB. A
jumper on the PCB must be moved to configure the PCB for 50 HZ primary power. See the installation
instructions for directions on changing the jumper.

4.4.4 Flow Monitoring

A flow switch is located in the water loop between the heat exchanger and reservoir. When flow is .5 GPM or
greater, the switch is closed, and a ground is sent to the Control Electronics board J18-2, and on to TIMER-I/
O chip U31 pin 11, via U66F. This is the logic signal /COOLANT FLOW/. A low indicates flow is .5 gpm or
more. The TIMER-I/O chip is read by the microprocessor at regular intervals, whenever the system is on. As
long as the signal is low, the microprocessor considers water flow sufficient.

Shortly after power up, the software reads the /COOLANT FLOW/ signal, expecting it to be high (the pump
has not been on long enough to develop sufficient waterflow). Then, shortly thereafter, it reads the signal /
COOLANT FLOW/ again, expecting the signal to be low, indicating the pump has brought coolant flow up
to the .5gpm level. If, in either check, the wrong (not expected) signal level of /COOLANT FLOW/ is de-
tected, the system will "beep" three times, then shut down (Main contactor is tripped).

Once the system completes these initial checks, if water flow drops below .5 gpm, the flow switch opens, and
the ground to control electronics J18-2 is lost. U66F output opens, and /COOLANT FLOW/ goes to a logic
high (+5VDC via RP5-7). The next time the microprocessor reads the /COOLANT FLOW/ signal from U31,
it will note the error condition, and respond by displaying an error code on the front panel and disabling
further laser operation.

4.4.5 Coolant Temperature Sensing

A thermistor monitors coolant temperature at the passbank. The thermistor is electrically located across pins
3/4 of J18, forming a voltage divider with R84. Nominal impedance of the thermistor is 10K ohms; as tem-
perature increases, the thermistor impedance decreases, effectively lowering the voltage developed between
it and R84. This voltage is sent to multiplexer U44 pin 24, as TEMPERATURE. At regular intervals, the
microprocessor commands the multiplexer to select the TEMPERATURE signal as input to the analog to
digital converter U41. U41 outputs a 12 bit digital value proportional to the TEMPERATURE signal. The
microprocessor reads this value via buffers U42 and U43. As long as the value read indicates a coolant flow
temperature of more than -1˚ C, and less than 60˚ C, the microprocessor, considers coolant temperature to be
in its normal range.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL THEORY OF OPERATION


0614-134-01 08/98 4-9
®
®

If the microprocessor reads a coolant flow temperature of less than -1˚ C, or more than 101˚ C, an E142 error is
displayed on the front panel and laser operation is disabled. This error indicates a problem with the tempera-
ture sensor itself.

If the microprocessor reads a coolant temperature of 60 to 65˚ C, the front panel temperature icon is turned
on, but laser operation is not disabled. This indication is intended to warn the operator that coolant tempera-
ture is near the fault level (65˚ C). The operator may want to decrease power and/or increase the interval
between exposures, to avoid further temperature increase.

If the microprocessor reads a coolant temperature of more than 65˚ C, but less than 101˚ C, the front panel
temperature icon is continuously flashed on and off, an E4 error is displayed on the front panel, and laser
operation is disabled. The fault will clear when temperature drops below 65˚ C.

4.4.6 Passbank Overtemperature Thermostat In The Laser Power Supply

A thermostat mounted on the passbank passes a ground to the laser power supply SHUTDOWN circuit if it
senses a temperature of 71˚ C , or more. The SHUTDOWN circuit will terminate any exposure in progress,
and prevent any further exposures until the temperature drops back below 71˚ C. See the laser power supply
topic for a detailed description of the SHUTDOWN circuit.

4.5 CONTROL ELECTRONICS

4.5.1 Overview

The Control Electronics subsystem executes software instructions to provide overall control of the NOVUS
2000. It includes:

• A 68000 microprocessor (and associated circuits) to execute the software instructions.

• EPROM and RAM memory, to store software instructions and data.

• D/A conversion circuits to convert digital values from the microprocessor to analog commands to
the laser power supply and safety monitor.

• An A/D conversion circuit to measure selected analog signals from throughout the system, and
provide the microprocessor with a digital representation of the analog value.

• Counter/timers used by the microprocessor to control the duration of various events, such as
exposure times, watchdog servicing, etc..

• A dual UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) to provide two way communication
via an RS-485 bus with the control panel. The DUART is also capable of interfacing with a remote
control panel (not presently available) and a service terminal (RS232 interface to attached terminal for
running diagnostic programs).

THEORY OF OPERATION NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


4-10 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

• Digital I/O circuits, which the microprocessor uses to:

* Read in the value of a selected INPUT signal sent to the digital I/O from various areas
throughout the system. In this manner, the microprocessor can determine the status of such
things as footswitch position, coolant flow on/off, safety shutter position, etc..

* Set the value (high or low) of a selected digital I/O OUTPUT signal. These signals are sent
from the digital I/O to locations throughout the system to cause some action, such as insert-
ing the green only filter, service the watchdog, starting the tube, etc..

• Interrupt decode circuits, which provide the microprocessor with signals to indicate that one or
more of the counter/timers, digital I/O, or DUART have requested interrupt service. An interrupt is
a way of informing the microprocessor that some condition has occurred which requires the
microprocessor’s immediate attention. Each type of interrupt has a priority level associated with it.
The microprocessor services interrupts in priority order, and can “mask” interrupts, i.e., ignore
interrupts that are less important than the task in progress.

4.5.2 Microprocessor

(Refer to 8-4) U1 is an MC68000 microprocessor using a 24 bit address bus (only 19 bits are utilized) and 16 bit
data bus to communicate with its memory and I/O devices. The microprocessor can READ or WRITE to its
memory space as follows:

• To READ data from memory or an I/O address, the microprocessor places the address of the
location it wants to read on the address bus, sets RD/WR/ to 1, and /AS/ (address strobe) to 0. The
/UDS/ and /LDS/ signals are used to allow selection of the upper, lower, or both upper and lower
bytes of data. The addressed memory or I/O device will respond by placing the stored data on the
data bus, and then setting DTACK (data acknowledge) low. When the microprocessor sees the
DTACK signal low, it reads in the data on the data bus, and then sets /AS/ high. This completes the
read cycle.

• To WRITE data to memory or an I/O address, the microprocessor places the address the data is to
be written to on the address bus, and the data to be written on the data bus (Note that many address
locations are not writable, such as the entire ROM memory). The /UDS/ and /LDS/ signals are set
to allow the upper, lower, or both upper and lower bytes of data to be written. The microprocessor
sets the/AS/ line low, and the addressed device reads in the data from the data bus and stores it. As
soon as the addressed device has read in the data, it sets DTACK low, which indicates to the micro-
processor that the cycle is complete. This completes the write cycle.

Y1 is an 8MHZ crystal oscillator, which provides the CLK input to the microprocessor. The 8MHZ is also
sent to U14, a clock divider, which provides a 4MHz output to the 3 COUNTER/TIMER I/O chips, U29, U30,
U31 (refer to 8-6), and 2 shift registers, U32, U54.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL THEORY OF OPERATION


0614-134-01 08/98 4-11
®
®

At power up, C75 prevents the voltage into U19A from rising as fast as the 5 volt supply. U19A’s output is
high for a short period (approx. 600ms), before moving to its normal, low condition. The momentary high
out of U19A causes U18 A, B, and C to output lows for the same brief period. The combination of /RESET/
and /HALT/ going from low to high is the start command for the MC68000. The /POR/ (power on reset )
signal is used to place various chips throughout the Control Electronics to a known condition at power up.
SW1 contacts 1 and 4 are used to provide a manual reset without cycling power off and on. Toggle the switch
closed, then back open to reset the microprocessor. This switch should be left in the open condition for
normal operation.

U76 pin 6 output goes low whenever the 5 Volt logic supply drops below 4.75 volts (grnd ref). This holds the
reset line into the microprocessor low, preventing operation of the system.

4.5.3 ROM/RAM Memory, Address Decoding, External Interrupt Processing

(Refer to 8-4) U5 and U9 are the EPROM (erasable, programmable, read only memory) chips. Each chip
contains 64K of 8 bit memory. U9 holds the lower byte (8 bits) of each EPROM address, and U5 holds the
upper byte of each EPROM address. These two chips contain the software that runs the system. New
software versions for the system can be implemented by simply changing the EPROM chips.

U12 and U13 are the NVRAM (Nonvolatile random access memory) chips. These chips provide 2K of 16 bit
writable, nonvolatile, memory for the microprocessor. Nonvolatile memory is memory which retains data
even while no external power is provided. These two chips have internal lithium batteries to retain data
when power is turned off.

U16A, U21A/B, U66A, and U17A provide decoding and timing signals for the EPROM and RAM.

U15 provides decoding of address lines to enable the various MEMORY and MEMORY MAPPED I/O
devices on the address bus.

U25 encodes interrupt requests from the four address bus devices which are capable of requesting interrupts.
These are the DUART (U22), and three TIMER-I/O chips (U29, 30, and 31). The encoded interrupt request is
sent to the microprocessor on the IPL0/1/2 lines. The microprocessor acknowledges interrupts from the four
devices with its FC1/2/3 lines (all going high), which are decoded by U23 and U24A, and sent to the device
whose interrupt request is being acknowledged (IACK2/3/4/5). On the next bus cycle the interrupting
device places its vector on the data bus, and the CPU then reads it. The vector points to the software routine
used to handle the interrupt.

4.5.4 D/A Conversion

(Refer to 8-5) There are two digital to analog converters (DACS) in the Control Electronics:

• U49 provides the signal TUBE POWER REQUEST to the laser power supply. The voltage of this
signal represents the level of power the laser power supply is being requested to produce for an
exposure, approximately 2.5 Volts (grnd ref) per watt out of the fiber. The voltage is sent to the laser
power supply light control circuit, where it is compared to the output of the power photocell circuit.
The power photocell circuit is calibrated to provide approximately 2.5 volts (grnd ref) out per watt of
delivered power, as detected by the power photocell. The light control circuitry in the Laser Power
Supply sets tube current so that the signal out of the power photocell circuit is equal to the voltage of
this TUBE POWER REQUEST signal.
THEORY OF OPERATION NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL
4-12 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

• U50 provides the signal SM TREATMENT LEVEL to the Safety Monitor PCB. The voltage of this
signal represents the level of power that is being requested for the current exposure, approximately
2.5 volts (grnd ref) per watt of requested power. The Safety Monitor PCB compares this signal to the
output of the safety photocell power circuit, which provides a signal that is approx. 2.5 volts (grnd
ref) per watt of delivered power as detected by the safety photocell. Over and under power condi-
tions are detected by the Safety Monitor by comparing the SM TREAT LEVEL signal to the output of
the safety photocell circuit.

U47 and U48 provide isolation between the main data bus and the data lines into the DACs. U55 provides
address decoding for the DACs. U54 provides properly timed DTACK (data acknowledge) signals to the
microprocessor after either DAC has received data from the data bus. U46 and U58 provide a -10VDC refer-
ence voltage for U49 and U50, respectively.

Just previous to the beginning of an exposure, the microprocessor writes the appropriate digital value to the
two DACs. During normal operation, this value is derived from the power level selected by the operator on
the front panel, i.e., if the front panel is set for 1 watt, the two DACs will be loaded with the digital value that
provides a 2.5V (Plus a bit more to account for fiber and delivery system losses) analog output. It then reads
back the value out of each of the DACs, via the ADC circuit, to insure the outputs are as correct. During the
exposure, the Laser Power Supply uses the voltage to set the power level out of the tube, as described above.
At the end of the exposure, the microprocessor zeros the DACs, so that the DAC outputs between exposures
are zero volts.

During normal operational use, the two DACs are always loaded with the same value. When the system is
powered up, a series of self checks are done. Several of the self checks involve loading nonequal values into
the two DAC's and then monitoring for the appropriate fault response from the Safety Monitor.

4.5.5 Analog to Digital Conversion

(Refer to 8-6) Analog to digital conversion circuits in the Control Electronics allow any one of 10 different
analog voltages to be “measured”, by converting the analog voltage to a digital value readable by the micro-
processor.

The following table lists the ten signals that are measured by the A/D circuit, and provides a brief definition
of each. The 10 analog signals are always available as inputs to multiplexer U44. U44 control inputs A0 thru
A3 determine which of the 10 analog signals will be selected for output to the A/D converter U41. To mea-
sure one of the ten analog inputs, the microprocessor:

• (Refer to 8-5, 6) Writes data to Timer-I/O chip U31, port C, to set the AC0 thru AC3 outputs to the
appropriate digital value. The binary value of A0 thru A3 selects one of the 16 “S” inputs to the
multiplexer U44 (only ten are actually used).

• Writes data to the Timer-I/O chip U31 port B, to set the MUX ENABLE bit to a high. The MUX
ENABLE goes to pin 18 of U44, enabling U44’s output. The input analog voltage selected by control
inputs A0 thru A3 is passed on to op amp U45A (isolation) and then on to the Vin pin of U41. U41
outputs a twelve bit digital value (representing the analog voltage in) to latches U42 and U43.

• Reads the data out of latches U42 and U43.

U33E and F, U34B,C,and D, U60C, and U62A provide timing signals for the ADC and latches.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL THEORY OF OPERATION


0614-134-01 08/98 4-13
®
®

SMART FIBER VALUES

SMART FIBER RES DEL SYS TYPE NOTES

5K LIO Fixed eye safety filter, laser transmission is


set to 1.26 of dialed power, beam blocks are
ignored.

10K SLIT LAMP Movable eye safety filter, transmission is


set to 1.17 of dialed power.

30K SLIT LAMP Fixed eye safety filter, laser transmission is set to
1.17 of dialed power.

40.2K MICROSURGICAL Movable eye safety filter, laser transmission is set


PROBE to 1.21 of dialed power, beam blocks are ignored.

80.6K EPCP Movable eye safety filter, laser transmission is set


to 1.08 of dialed power, beam blocks are ignored.

162K DERM No eye safety filter, laser transmission is set to 1.01


of dialed power, beam blocks are ignored.

221K SLIT LAMP Selectable eye safety filter, laser transmission is set
to 1.17 of dialed power.

NOTE: Refer to Field Service Bulletin #30 for smart fiber values for additional delivery systems.

4.5.6 Counter/Timers

(Refer to 8-5) Each of the Z8536 chips, U29, U30, and U31, include three “programmable” counter/timer
circuits (note that these same chips provide parallel I/O ports, a separate function, which will be covered in
topic 4.5.8). The counter timers are fairly complicated, in that the microprocessor can address and load
various registers internal to the Z8536 to control the count, timebase, and mode of operation of each counter.
These hardware timers are used by the software to time various events, such as proper watchdog operation
during self tests, timebase interrupts, etc. In addition, the hardware timers are used to provide the EXPO-
SURE TIME and SAFETY MONITOR EXPOSURE TIMER signals which are used to provide the Laser Power
Supply and Safety Monitor with a timing signal against which the exposure is generated.

• U29 is used to generate the signal EXPOSURE TIME, which is sent to the laser power supply. Just
before the microprocessor is ready to begin an exposure, it initializes two “count down” timers in
U29. The first timer is initialized to count at 2 MHz to provide 1 msec output pulses. The second
timer is initialized to count the 1 msec pulses out of the first counter, outputting a high pulse for the
duration of the exposure on the EXPOSURE TIME line (PB0). The microprocessor starts the timers,
and 1 msec later (delay caused by count up to 1 msec by first counter), the EXPOSURE TIME signal
goes high. In the laser power supply, the signal is used with the footswitch signals to control the
length of time the tube is turned on.

THEORY OF OPERATION NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


4-14 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

ADC SIGNALS

SIGNAL NAME U44 COMMENTS


INPUTS

/AIMING ON/ S14 From the safety photocell circuit. This


signal indicates the HeNe output. It is
at least -.11 VDC (gnd ref) when the
HeNe is on, and goes more negative as
HeNe output increases (max aprx. -.6V)

ECHO SM TREAT S13 This is the output of the safety monitor


DAC, via the safety monitor board. It is
approximately 2.5VDC (gnd ref)/watt
of requested power, during an exposure.

DELIV SYS TYPE S12 The voltage developed by the resistor at


the end of the smart fiber, as read by
U68A. See the table on next page for
details. This signal is checked at regular
intervals during normal operation,
for the presence of a delivery system.

-15/2 S11 The -15VDC (gnd ref) divided by 2, read


from the photo-sensor PCB. This voltage
is divided by 2 to bring it in range of
ADC circuit measuring capability. The
voltage is checked at regular intervals during
normal operation, and in service mode,
unless current control is selected. Voltage
must be within 1.5% of -15/2.

+15/2 S10 The +15VDC (gnd ref) divided by 2, read


from the photo-sensor PCB. This voltage
is divided by 2 to bring it in range of
ADC circuit’s measuring capability. The
voltage is checked at regular intervals during
normal operation, and in service mode,
unless current control is selected.
Voltage must be within 1.5% of 15/2.

EXT PWR METER S9 Allows an external power meter to


input analog voltage proportional to
measured power. Intended for
automated testing calibration usage.

TEMPERATURE S6 A positive voltage proportional to


coolant temperature, as measured by
the coolant temp thermistor at the
outlet of the tube. Nominal is 5VDC, goes
down as temperature goes up.

ECHO TUBE POWER S3 The TUBE POWER REQUEST signal from


DAC U49, via the Laser Power Supply. It
is approximately 2.5VDC (grnd ref)/watt
of requested power during an exposure.

TUBE POWER REQ S2 The direct output of DAC U49, the TUBE
POWER REQUEST signal. It is approximately
2.5VDC (grnd ref)/watt of requested power
during an exposure.

POWER PHOTOCELL S1 The output of the power photocell


circuit on the photo-sensor PCB. The
circuit is calibrated to output 2.5VDC
(grnd ref)/watt of delivered power.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL THEORY OF OPERATION


0614-134-01 08/98 4-15
®
®

• U30 is used to generate the signal SAFETY MONITOR EXPOSURE TIMER, which is sent to the
Safety Monitor board. In normal operations, the signal is identical to the EXPOSURE TIME signal
described above. The Safety Monitor uses the signal to detect overtime and undertime faults, and as
an enable to other safety circuits.

4.5.7 Dual UART and Communication Ports

(Refer to 8-4) U22 is a two channel universal asynchronous receiver transmitter. It interfaces the microproces-
sor with an RS 485 bus (via U26) and an RS232 bus (via U27, U28). The RS485 bus is used to communicate
with the front panel display. Future “smart” delivery systems may be designed to use this same bus to
communicate with the NOVUS 2000. The RS232 interface allows an external device to be used to run diag-
nostics, and run automated testing on the system. During normal operations, the RS232 bus is not used. The
remainder of this subtopic will deal with the communications between the Control Electronics and front
panel, via the RS485 port.

The Control Electronics and Display subsystems communicate over the RS485 bus. The display sends knob
and switch change information to the Control Electronics, and the Control Electronics sends reset, indicator
on/off, and power/count/exposure time/rep rate values to the display. The Control Electronics controls the
bus, and is called the “master”. The display is a "slave”. The master initiates each communication exchange
with a message consisting of a slave address, byte count, function code, and optional data. The display
responds with a “reply”, consisting of slave address, byte count, status, and optional data. Data is transmit-
ted over the bus in 8 bit (plus 1 parity bit) packages, or bytes, at 4800 baud.

From the microprocessor’s perspective, communication over the bus is extremely slow. The UART isolates
the microprocessor from the slow speed of the bus. When the microprocessor is ready to send a byte to the
display, it sends the data to the UART over the data bus, and then moves on to other business. The UART
converts the byte to a serial signal, adds a parity bit, and sends it to U26 over its channel A output, pin 30.
U26, the RS-485 bus driver, converts the logic stream in at pin 4 to the RS-485 differential signals out at A and
B. Once the transmission is complete, the UART notifies the microprocessor that the byte has been sent (via
an interrupt, IRQ2). Note that the transmission of a single byte @ 4800 baud takes a little less than 2 millisec-
onds, which, with respect to the microprocessor instruction cycle time, is very long.

In much the same way, but reversed, when a byte is received from the display over the RS-485 bus, U26
converts the differential inputs at A and B to logic out at R. The serial logic stream is sent to the UART’s
channel A receive input. The UART checks the parity bit, notifies the microprocessor (via interrupt) that it
needs attention, then waits for the microprocessor to respond to the interrupt. When the microprocessor
services the interrupt, it reads in the byte from the UART, over the parallel data bus.

The RS485 bus consists of two wires, the TXRX+ line, and the TXRX- line. When no data is transmitted, the
lines both set at approximately 2.5VDC. When a logic 1 is transmitted, the TXRX+ line goes to 5VDC, and the
TXRX- line drops to 0VDC. When a logic 0 is transmitted, the TXRX+ line goes to 0VDC, and the TXRX- line
goes to 5VDC. The presence of the serial transmissions can be seen with an oscilloscope, but the contents of
the transmissions cannot be effectively evaluated.

THEORY OF OPERATION NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


4-16 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

4.5.8 Digital I/O Circuits

(Refer to 8-5) The digital I/O circuitry provides the microprocessor with 60 programmable input/output
ports. U29, 30, and 31 are COUNTER/TIMER PARALLEL I/O chips. The counter/timer function in these
chips is covered in topic 4.5.6. This topic will cover PARALLEL I/O functions.

Each Z8536 chip has 20 ports: 8 in channel A, 8 in channel B, and 4 in channel C. The ports are “configured”
by commands sent to the Z8536 from the microprocessor. When the system is powered up, the microproces-
sor executes a set of INITIALIZATION AND SELF CHECK instructions. The microprocessor configures the 3
Z8536 chips during this period, sending commands over the data bus to registers internal to the Z8536. Each
port can be configured to operate as an input, output, or bi-directional port, and in any of several modes:

• INPUT PORTS can be configured in “normal”, or “1’s catcher” mode. The microprocessor uses
input ports to read in logic levels from throughout the system. The microprocessor can read in any of
the three channels over the data bus. Input ports operating in the normal mode provide the micro-
processor with whatever logic level is on its input at read time. “1’s catcher” input ports are used to
“catch” a 1 input, even if that 1 goes away before the microprocessor reads the channel. Once the
input goes high, the port will read high, and continue to do so until the microprocessor resets it.

• OUTPUT PORTS can be configured to operate with output as open drain, or to actually source
current, and some ports can be configured to be driven by the counter timers inside the Z8536. The
microprocessor writes 1’s or 0’s to output ports to send commands throughout the system.

The U29 ports are:

PA7, INPUT, SERVICE SWITCH POSITION SENSE - This port monitors the position of the service
switch located on the CPU board. When toggled so as to cause a 1 to 0 transition, the system goes
into its service mode. If the system is in service mode, and the switch is opened, the system will exit
service mode. See section 5 for details of service mode operation.

PA6, INPUT, DIAGNOSTIC SWITCH POSITION SENSE - This port monitors the position of the
diagnostic switch, located on the CPU board. The switch is closed during power up initialization and
self testing to indicate to the microprocessor that it should service the RS-232 diagnostic port. This
port is used to run diagnostics from an RS-232 terminal attached to the external RS-232 port. See
section 5 for details on diagnostic capabilities.

PA4, OUTPUT, CONTACTOR TRIP - The microprocessor sets this port low to cause the main
contactor to trip. The low is sent to Q1 gate, via amplifiers U60A and U60F. Q1 turns off, de-energiz-
ing hold on relay K1. This breaks the supply loop to the main contactor, which will de-energize.
Note that the laser power supply (J15-12) and safety monitor (J13-12 /CKT BRKR TRIP/) also have
inputs to the U60F (as does the keyswitch). If either of these inputs goes low, the contactor will de-
energize. The Control Electronics uses this port to turn off the system when it determines that it
cannot shut the safety shutter, and it sees treatment power when none is being requested, or when a
water flow detection problem is found during the start up sequence.

PA3, INPUT, CROWBAR OK SENSE - This port monitors the /CROWBAR OK/ signal from the
Laser Power Supply which pulses low when the crowbar circuit shunts the tube. The microprocessor
monitors this signal after sending a crowbar command to the Laser Power Supply during initializa-
tion and self test. If the crowbar is operating properly, the input signal will go low.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL THEORY OF OPERATION


0614-134-01 08/98 4-17
®
®

PA2, OUTPUT, /SUP RAMP UP/ - The microprocessor uses this port to command the Laser Power
Supply to “ramp up” its B+ voltage in preparation for the beginning of an exposure. /SUP RAMP
UP/ goes low three zero crossings before the tube is actually started, and is turned off just prior to
actually starting the tube for the exposure.

When ramp up goes low, the single phase power supply begins to ramp up tube voltage towards 170
VDC, in preparation for tube start. The three phase power supply does not make use of this signal.
The signal is sent to the laser power supply via U77 and U17E. The three phase supply does not use
the signal.

PA1, OUTPUT, /START/ - The microprocessor uses this port to send a start command to the starter
circuit in the Laser Power Supply, via U77 and U17D.

PA0, OUTPUT, /SHUTDOWN/ - The microprocessor uses this port to activate the crowbar circuit in
the Laser Power Supply. The crowbar is used to shutdown the tube very quickly, by placing a low
resistance path in parallel with the tube anode to cathode, and turning off passbank drive. The /
SHUTDOWN/ signal is used only when the Control Electronics detects certain error conditions
during an exposure. It is not used to turn off the tube at the normal end of an exposure.

PB6, INPUT, /SM SAFETY SHUTTER DROP/ - This port monitors the control signal the Safety
Monitor uses to enable/disable the 12VDC supply to the safety shutter. When high, the Safety
Monitor is allowing the safety shutter to be energized (out of beam path). When low, the Safety
Monitor is preventing the safety shutter from energizing (shutter is in beam path). The microproces-
sor reads this port during some of the laser on self tests of the Safety Monitor, to check proper re-
sponse of the Safety Monitor to fault conditions.

PB5, OUTPUT, /SM TEST/ - The microprocessor uses this signal during laser firing self tests to
provide signal enables to the Safety Monitor and Laser Power Supply that are normally provided by
the closing of the footswitch. The signal goes low to simulate the depression of the footswitch, and is
sent via U17, out J11-13, to a microswitch in the optics assembly which is closed when the safety
shutter is in. If the shutter is in, blocking the beam, the low is passed on to J11-14, as /SM EXP TEST/.
This signal goes to the Safety Monitor (J13-14) and Laser Power Supply (J15-16). If the safety shutter
is not closed, the laser firings in self test are not possible.

PB2, OUTPUT, /XFER TREAT/ - The microprocessor uses this output to send an enable signal to the
two D/A converters U49 and U50. The D/A converters send analog voltages to the Laser Power
Supply and Safety Monitor which indicate the level of power to be delivered for the exposure. The
microprocessor sets the signal to its active (low) state at the start of the exposure, and then returns it
to a high at the end of the exposure. The DAC outputs are also enabled during the self testing of the
DACs.

PB1, OUTPUT, /MAGNET ON/ - The microprocessor sets this output low to send a command to the
Laser Power Supply, via U77 and U60D, to turn on the magnet. The magnet is turned on 3 zero
crossings before an exposure begins. At the end of the exposure, the signal goes low. In the single
phase power supply, internal circuits keep the magnet on, following an exposure, until tube voltage
falls to 155V. The three phase power supply turns the magnet off at the end of the exposure.

PB0, OUTPUT, EXPOSURE TIME - The microprocessor uses the counter/timer functions within the
Z8536 to control this output port. It provides a precisely timed positive pulse to the Laser Power
Supply, indicating the beginning, duration, and end of an exposure.

THEORY OF OPERATION NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


4-18 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

PC3, INPUT, 5.8 MSEC WATCHDOG SENSE - This port monitors the /Q/ output of highdog timer
U37B. When the watchdog is enabled, the highdog timer must always be retriggered by the WD
STAY ALIVE signal before it times out, or a watchdog fault will occur. See topic 4.5.10 for a complete
description of the watchdog circuit.

PC2, INPUT, 4.4 MSEC WATCHDOG SENSE - This port monitors the /Q/ output of lowdog timer
U37A. When the watchdog timer is enabled, the lowdog timer must time out between each WD
STAY ALIVE pulse, or a watchdog fault will occur. See topic 4.5.10 for a description of the watchdog
circuit.

PC1, OUTPUT, WATCHDOG START - The microprocessor uses this line to start the two watchdog
timers. See topic 4.5.10 for a description of the watchdog circuit.

The U30 ports are:

PA5, INPUT, /ZERO CROSSING/ - This port monitors the /ZERO CROSSING/ signal from the
Laser Power Supply. The zero crossing circuit in the single phase laser power supply generates this
signal as a low pulse each time the supply AC sine wave crosses zero volts. For a 60HZ supply, zero
crossings should occur approximately every 8.3 milliseconds. The microprocessor synchronizes the
exposure control signals it sends to the Laser Power Supply to the zero crossing signal. The three
phase supply uses a timer to simulate the zero crossing signal, but does not actually detect zero
crossings of the AC line.

PA4, INPUT, A TO D BUSY - This port monitors the STS output of A/D converter U41. Before the
microprocessor reads in a digital value from the ADC, this signal must be low, indicating the A/D
conversion is complete.

PA4, INPUT, SLIT LAMP BEAM BLOCK - For LDS10A delivery systems, a high when the argon
beam is blocked at the delivery system. The lock icon is displayed at the front panel and laser firing
is disabled, when the beam block signal is high and the NOVUS 2000 is connected to an LDS-10A.

PA2, INPUT, ESF OPEN - This port monitors ESF OPEN, a signal which goes low to indicate that the
argon safety filter is in place. (Refer to 8-6) When the eye safety filter at the delivery system is in
place, the delivery system returns a ground at J3-8, via the delivery system cable, which is felt on pin
5 of U40B. The pin 4 input to U40B is held at 2.5VDC by voltage divider R38/RP13. The op amp
output, ESF OPEN, goes low. When the eye safety filter is removed, the input goes to high, as does
the ESF signal.

PA0, OUTPUT, /SOL DRV A/ - The microprocessor uses this port to insert the eye safety filter. For
"selectable" eye safety filter delivery systems (smart fiber resistance of 221K) the filter is moved into
place and left there for as long as the system remains in READY. Note that the NOVUS 2000 deter-
mines how to operate the eye safety filter based on the smart fiber resistance. (Refer to 8-5,6) The
microprocessor sets the output low to move the eye safety filter in. A low out goes to pin 1 of inverter
U63A, which places 5VDC on the gate of Q4. Q4 turns on, providing a ground to J3-2, which is sent,
via the delivery system cable, to the eye safety filter solenoid in the delivery system. The other side of
the solenoid is connected to J3-1, which provides 34VDC to the solenoid via R35. Q8 turns on for
approximately 10 msecs each time the safety filter is operated, bypassing the 34VDC around R35 to
provide extra kick to move the safety filter into place. The 34VDC is developed on the Control
Electronics PCB from the contactor secondary in on TB 17-5/6.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL THEORY OF OPERATION


0614-134-01 08/98 4-19
®
®

PB7, INPUT, GO - For all delivery systems presently in use, this port monitors the position of the eye
safety filter. The delivery system provides a high or low in at J3-8 to indicate the position of the eye
safety filter (high if not inserted, low if inserted). This signal is used to develop the GO and /GO/
signals, using U63E, F and U67C, D. J5 inputs to the inverters are for future use. The GO signal is
high when the eye safety filter is in place, and low when it is not.

PB6, INPUT, /GO/ -For all delivery systems presently in use, this port monitors the position of the
eye safety filter. The delivery system provides a high or low in at J3-8 to indicate the position of the
eye safety filter (high if not inserted, low if inserted) This signal is used to develop the GO and /GO/
signals, using U63E, F and U67C, D. J5 inputs to the inverters are for future use. The /GO/ signal is
low when the eye safety filter is in place, and high when it is not.

PB5, OUTPUT, HENE STEP - The microprocessor uses this output to rotate the HeNe polarizing
filter. The filter rotates through 90 degrees from its minimum to maximum aiming beam intensity
positions. The aiming beam knob on the front panel determines the setting of the aiming beam. Each
knob click causes 4.5 degrees of rotation at the filter. The microprocessor outputs short positive
pulses at 200 pulses/second to (refer to 8-6) U74 pin 11. U74 provides supply voltages (to move the
HeNe attenuator stepper motor) out at pins 8, 1, 6, 3, in response to the pulses at pin 11. The micro-
processor sends direction of rotation information to U74 over a separate port, PB4 below.

PB4, OUTPUT, HENE DIR - The microprocessor uses this output to tell the stepper motor driver chip,
U74, in which direction to turn the HeNe polarizing filter.

PB3, OUTPUT, /HENE ENABLE/ - The microprocessor uses this port to turn the HeNe supply off
and on. A low turns on the HeNe. During normal operation, the HeNe is kept on. (Refer to 8-5) The
/HENE ENABLE/ signal is sent to buffer U66E, and out J10 -11 to the HeNe supply. The HeNe
supply uses 12VDC supplied from the Control Electronics PCB.

PB0, OUTPUT, SAFETY MONITOR EXPOSURE TIMER - The microprocessor uses the timer/clock
functions within U30 to generate a precisely timed high on this line for the duration of an exposure.
The Safety Monitor PCB uses the signal to check for overtime and undertime faults. The signal goes
high as the microprocessor requests the Laser Power Supply to begin an exposure, and remains high
for the duration of the exposure.

PC2, INPUT, /REMOTE INTRLK/ - This port monitors the remote interlock line. The remote inter-
lock line must be grounded to enable the laser. (Refer to 8-6, 8-7) The ground at J3-20 is sent to J77-C
on the rear of the laser console. The ground must loop back into J77-B to ground the J3-19 input to
amplifier U66C. The loop can be completed by the BRH plug provided, or wired to a switch on the
door of the room the laser is used in. When the door opens, the switch should open, disabling the
laser.

PC0, OUTPUT, WD STAY ALIVE - The microprocessor uses this output to retrigger the highdog and
lowdog timers every 5 milliseconds. The signal which retriggers the B inputs of watchdog timers
U73A and U73B is a short low pulse. The pulse triggers on its transition back to a high. See topic
4.5.10 for a description of the watchdog circuit.

THEORY OF OPERATION NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


4-20 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

The U31 ports are:

PA7 - OUTPUT, /SSDRIVE/ - The microprocessor uses this output to enable/disable the supply
voltage (12VDC and ground return) to the safety shutter solenoid. The supply voltage goes to the
Safety Monitor, and then on to the safety shutter solenoid. The safety shutter solenoid ground
control line goes thru (refer to 8-8) Q1 on the Safety Monitor PCB, which can open the ground return
line to close the safety shutter independent of the Control Electronics. (Refer to 8-5, 6) The signal /
SSDRIVE/ goes low to turn on Q3. Q3 provides a ground return path to one side of the safety shutter
solenoid (via the safety monitor board Q1). The other side of the solenoid is connected to 12VDC.
The solenoid energizes, and the safety shutter is pulled out of the beam path.

PA6 - INPUT, /ESF OUT/ - This input is the SMERR4 signal from the safety monitor. The port acts
as a " zero’s catcher", detecting and holding any low input, even if the low goes back to high. The
safety monitor board sets /SMERR 4 ESF OUT/ low when the eye safety filter pulls out at any time
during treatment power delivery.

PA5 - INPUT, /UNDERPOWER/ - This input is the SMERR1 signal from the safety monitor. The
port acts as a “zero’s catcher”, detecting and holding any low input, even if the low goes back to high.
The safety monitor board sets /SMERR 3 UNDERPOWER/ low when it detects treatment power 25%
or more below requested power.

PA4 - INPUT, /UNDERTIME/ - This input is the SMERR 2 signal from the safety monitor. The port
acts as a “zero’s catcher”, detecting and holding any low input, even if the low goes back to high.
The safety monitor board sets the /SMERR 2 UNDERTIME/ signal low when it detects the loss of
treatment power more than one msec before the end of an exposure request. That is, if the exposure
ends before the footswitch or exposure timer asks it to.

PA3 - INPUT, SS OPEN - This port monitors the condition of a slotted optical switch which returns
+5VDC when the safety shutter is pulled back, and ground when the safety shutter is blocking the
beam path. (Refer to 8-3) The safety shutter sensor receives +5VDC (grnd ref) from the safety moni-
tor. The 5VDC is applied to the SAFETY SHUTTER IN line when the safety shutter is out of the beam
path. The line is low when the safety shutter is blocking the beam. The SAFETY SHUTTER OPEN
signal goes to the Safety Monitor PCB, J54-3. (Refer to 8-8) On the Safety Monitor PCB, the signal is
sent on to the Control Electronics, out on J52-10. The signal enters the Control Electronics at J13-10,
(Refer to 8-5) J13-10, and pin 5 of amplifier U64C. The output of U64C is connected to the port.

PA2 - INPUT, SS CLOSED - This port monitors the condition of a slotted optical switch which returns
ground when the safety shutter is pulled back, and +5VDC (grnd ref) when the safety shutter is
blocking the beam. (Refer to 8-3) The safety shutter sensor receives +5VDC (gnd ref) from the Safety
Monitor. The 5VDC is applied to the SAFETY SHUTTER OUT line when the safety shutter is in the
beam path. The line is low when the safety shutter is not blocking the beam. The SAFETY SHUTTER
OUT signal goes to the Safety Monitor PCB, J54-4 (Refer to 8-8). On the Safety Monitor PCB, the
signal is sent on to the Control Electronics, out on J52-11. The signal enters the Control Electronics at
J13-11, (Refer to 8-6) to pin 9 of amplifier U64D. The output of U64D is connected to the port.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL THEORY OF OPERATION


0614-134-01 08/98 4-21
®
®

PA1 - INPUT, /FOOT SW N. O./ - This port monitors the condition of the normally open line from
the footswitch. The N. O. line is open when the footswitch is not depressed, and goes to ground
when the footswitch is depressed. (Refer to 8-6) The FSW N.O. DDS (dumb delivery system) signal
enters the Control Electronics PCB at J3-10. This signal comes from the footswitch cable connected to
J76 at the rear of the system. The signal is sent to amplifier U64A, whose output line is labeled FOOT
SW N.O. WIRE OR. The N. O. WIRE OR line also has inputs from J4 and J5. These inputs provide for
future “smart” delivery systems to send the footswitch signal over an interconnect cable hooked up
to J72 at the rear of the system. The WIRE OR signal is input to inverter U67A. The output of in-
verter U67A is sent to the port as /FOOT SW N. O./.

PA0 - INPUT, / FOOT SW N. C./ - This port monitors the condition of the normally closed line from
the footswitch. The N. C. line is grounded when the footswitch is not depressed, and opens when the
footswitch is depressed. (Refer to 8-6) The FSW N.C. DDS (dumb delivery system) signal enters the
Control Electronics at J3-11. This signal comes from the footswitch cable connected to J76 at the rear
of the system. The signal is input to amplifier U64B, whose output line is labeled FOOT SW N.C.
WIRE OR. The N.C. WIRE OR line also has inputs from J4 and J5. These inputs provide for future
“smart” delivery systems to send the footswitch signal over an interconnect cable hooked up to J72 at
the rear of the system. The WIRE OR signal is input to inverter U67B. The output of inverter U67B is
sent to the port as /FOOT SW N. C./.

PB7 - OUTPUT, MUX ENABLE - The microprocessor uses this output to enable multiplexer U44
(Refer to 8-5, 6). When high, the multiplexer reads the address inputs at pins 14, 15, 16,17, and passes
the indicated analog voltage to the analog to digital converter, U41 (via isolation amp U45A).

PB6 - INPUT, /OVERPOWER/ - This input is the SMERR 6 signal from the Safety Monitor. The port
acts as a “zero’s catcher”, detecting and holding any low input, even if the low goes back to high.
The Safety Monitor PCB sets the /SMERR 6 OVERPOWER/ signal low when it detects treatment
power 25% or more above requested power.

PB5- INPUT, /OVERTIME/ - This input is the SMERR 5 signal from the safety monitor. The port acts
as a “zero’s catcher”, detecting and holding any low input, even if the low goes back to high. The
Safety Monitor PCB sets the /SMERR 5 OVERTIME/ signal low when it detects treatment power 2
msecs after the exposure should have ended.

PB4 - OUTPUT, BEEP - The microprocessor uses this output to send 5 volt pulses to audio amplifier
U37. U37 drives the speaker SP1.

PB3 - INPUT, /COOLANT FLOW/ - This port monitors a flow switch located between the heat
exchanger and reservoir. The switch is closed (providing ground) when flow is .5 GPM or greater.
(Refer to 8-6) The flow switch input enters the Control Electronics at J18-2, and goes to amplifier
U66F. The output of U66F is sent to the port as /COOLANT FLOW/. At power up, the software
checks this signal before the pump has had time to generate .5gpm. If the signal is already low, the
software assumes the flow switch is stuck closed, and shuts down the system (three beeps, then
shutdown by main contactor). It then checks the signal a second time, after the pump has been given
time to generate a flow of .5 gpm. If, on this second check, the signal is high (indicating less than
.5gpm), the system beeps three times, then shuts down. Once the system successfully passes these
two steps, the software continues to check the flow switch at regular intervals, as long as the system
is on. If it detects the signal has gone high (flow less than .5 gpm), an error appears on the front panel.

THEORY OF OPERATION NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


4-22 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

PB2 - OUTPUT, /GRN DRV / - The microprocessor uses this output to operate the blue filter sole-
noid. When energized, the solenoid places a blue filter into the beam path, so that only the green
wavelengths are passed. The operator uses a front panel switch to select between “all lines” and
“green only” operation. (Refer to 8-6) The /GRN DRV/ signal is input to inverter U63C, whose
output controls the conduction of Q2. When /GRN DRV/ is low, the output of U63C goes high,
turning on Q2. Q2 provides a ground to J10-7, which is connected to one side of the green only
solenoid. The other side of the solenoid is connected to 12VDC. The solenoid energizes, pulling the
blue filter into the beam path.

PB1 - INPUT, /GREEN OUT/ - This port monitors the output of a slotted optical switch operated by
the movement of the blue filter. When the filter is out of the beam path (all lines), the line returns
5VDC. When the filter is in the beam path (green only), the line returns ground. The signal from the
optical switch enters the control electronics at J10-3, and is input to amplifier U64F. The output of
amplifier U64F goes to the port as GREEN OUT.

PB0 - INPUT, /GREEN IN/ - This port monitors the output of a slotted optical switch operated by
the movement of the blue filter. When the filter is out of the beam path (all lines), the line returns
ground. When the filter is in the beam path (green only), the line returns 5VDC (grnd ref). (Refer to
8-6) The signal from the optical switch enters the control electronics at J10-4, and is input to buffer
U64E. The output of buffer U64E goes to the port as GREEN IN.

PC3 thru PC0 - OUTPUTS, AC3 thru AC0 - The microprocessor uses these lines together, to select any
1 of the 10 analog inputs to the multiplexer U44. The multiplexer passes the analog signal so selected
to the analog to digital conversion circuitry when its EN line goes high.

4.5.9 Slit Lamp Drive Circuit

The Bulb Driver PCB converts line AC to a phase controlled 16VAC signal to drive the illumination bulb in
the LDS-10A and 30SL slit lamps. "Phased controlled" refers to the ability of the circuit to provide more or
less of the AC signal cycle to the bulb, as the slit lamp illumination control pot is turned up and down.

(Refer to 8-14) Line AC is supplied to the PCB at J162. The transformer converts the line voltage to 16VAC.
The 16VAC is applied to:

• CR7 and associated circuitry, which develops -15VDC for use on the PCB.

• CR1 and associated circuitry, which develops +15VDC for use on the PCB.

• Via filter R4/C2/R6 to the "phase control circuitry.

• Fullwave bridge rectifier, U2, and associated circuitry.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL THEORY OF OPERATION


0614-134-01 08/98 4-23
®
®

Triac Q1 is turned on earlier or later in the AC cycle, to pass more or less of the 16VAC cycle to the bulb. The
fullwave rectifier and U2-2 form a zero crossing detection circuit. At each zero crossing, the U2-2 output goes
low, discharging C7. After zero crossing, the capacitor begins to charge back up, presenting a sawtooth
waveform (peaking at about 4V) to the negative inputs of the three U2 comparators. The positive comparator
inputs are a DC voltage whose level is set by the illumination brightness control pot on the slit lamp (varies
from approx. 1 to 5V). On each AC half cycle, as the sawtooth voltage increases, it will eventually exceed the
voltage set by the illumination brightness control pot, at which point, the U2 comparators outputs go low,
firing the triac Q1 via opto isolator U1. Once the triac fires, the remaining half cycle 16VAC signal is applied
to the bulb. This is repeated on each AC half cycle. The earlier in the half cycle the triac is fired, the brighter
the bulb illumination.

4.5.10 Watchdog Circuit

The watchdog circuit provides a means of detecting improper running of the software, which could be caused
by a hardware malfunction or software bug. Once the watchdog circuit is started, it must be retriggered by
software action at 5 msec intervals. If the trigger occurs too early, or too late, the watchdog circuit will
disable the system.

(Refer to 8-5) The watchdog circuit is started by the WD START signal from TIMER-I/O U29, pin 20. The
signal pulses the /A/ input to both timers low, which triggers them; the /Q/ outputs go low, the Q outputs
go high. Once started, the timers must be retriggered by the WD STAY ALIVE signal (B inputs of both chips)
every 5 msecs.

At re-trigger time, the lowdog U73A must have already timed out, and the highdog U73B must still be on. If
U73A has not timed out, NOR gate U72B will have two lows in at re-trigger time, clearing U73B (U73B clear
is the fault condition). If U73B times out before the re-trigger, it goes to its clear state (U73B clear is the fault
condition) Once U73B clears, the WD STAY ALIVE signal can not reset it.

When U73B clears (Q is low, /Q/ is high), CR19 lites, and the 5.8 line is grounded. The 5.8 line is used as the
enable to latch U77. When the 5.8 line goes high, the enable is lost, and all outputs from the latch open. Note
that the signals through the latch are the control signals the Control Electronics sends to the Laser Power
Supply. With all latch outputs open, the combination of pull up/pull down resistors on the U77 output lines
result in a shutdown of any exposure in progress, and a loss of B+.

4.6 DISPLAY SUBSYSTEM

4.6.1 Overview

The Display subsystem interfaces the front panel knobs, switches, and indicators with the Control Electronics.
Although physically located on the front panel, the keyswitch and emergency off buttons are not a part of the
display subsystem, and are described in the topic on power distribution.

The display is controlled by an 8032 microcontroller which runs a set of software instructions stored in ROM.
The display provides the following functions:

THEORY OF OPERATION NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


4-24 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

• Communicates with the Control Electronics via the RS-485 bus. The 8032 includes an internal
UART which is used to interface the slow speed bus with the high speed microcontroller. The
control electronics serves as bus master, initiating all bus communications. The display serves as a
bus slave, responding to messages addressed to it from the control electronics.

• Monitors changes to front panel buttons and knobs. The Control Electronics periodically transmits
a “knob/switch poll” command to the display over the RS-485 bus. The display responds with data
as follows:

* For knobs: a positive or negative value indicating the number of knob clicks which have
occurred in a clockwise (positive number) or counterclockwise (negative number) direction,
since the last knob/switch poll transaction.

* For status, color, and repeat switches: an indication of whether the switch has made an even
or odd number of off to on transitions since the last knob/switch poll transaction.

For the reset switch: an indication of whether or not the switch has been pressed since the last
knob/switch poll transaction.

*Drive the front panel display digits for power, count, and time. Note that the
information for these displays is not determined directly from the display switches,
or even from the switches via the 8031 microcontroller. The values are transmitted
over the RS-485 bus from the control electronics.

*Drive the front panel indicators for GREEN, ALL, READY, STANDBY, REPEAT,
and the four “icons”: lock, power, temperature, wrench. The control electronics
periodically transmits an “INDICATOR DISPLAY” command to the display, over the
RS-485 bus. The command includes an on/off signal for each of the indicators.

* In repeat mode, the repeat indicator is flashed on and off at a rate which reflects the
exposure period (lite on), and period between exposures (lite off). The Control
Electronics transmits a “REPEAT ON TIME” and a “REPEAT OFF TIME” command
to the display to set the rate at which the repeat indicator blinks.

*Develop AC (PS1) for the nonswitched front panel back lighting.

4.6.2 Microcontroller Circuits

(Refer to 8-10) U8, an 8032 microcontroller, reads and/or writes to its memory and I/O devices utilizing an 8
bit data bus and 16 bit address bus. The data bus is multiplexed on the lower 8 bits of the address bus.
Crystal oscillator Y1 provides a 3.686MHz timing signal to the microcontroller. The 8032 includes internal
RAM, and UART.

At power up, C13 begins charging through R3. After approximately .25 seconds, the voltage felt at pin 1 of U7
is sufficient to drive U7 output (pin 2) low. This high to low transition on the RST/VPO input to U8 resets
the microprocessor, which begins executing the program instructions stored in ROM U18. SW5 can be closed,
then opened, to manually restart (reset) the microcontroller with power applied.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL THEORY OF OPERATION


0614-134-01 08/98 4-25
®
®

To execute a read or write instruction, U8 first places the 16 bit address to be operated upon on the address
bus (AD0-7, A8-15), and then asserts ALE (address latch enable), which causes the address latch U9 to read in
and hold the AD0 through AD7 values, so that the A0 thru A7 outputs of U9 contain the lower 8 bits of the
address. This frees up the AD0 through AD7 lines for use as the data bus. U22 and U23 decode the A8, 9, 10,
13, 14, and 15 bits of the address to enable the appropriate memory or I/O device, by dropping one of 10 “Y”
outputs low.

The microcontroller writes to the U15 (status lights latch), U20 (error icon latch), U10 (power display driver),
U6 (exposure time display driver) and U1 (count display driver).

For a write operation, U8 places the data to be written on the AD0 thru AD7 lines, and then drops /WR/ low.
The addressed device is enabled by the combination of /WR/ and its “Y” input being low, and reads in the
data from AD0 through AD7.

The microcontroller reads from U18 (EPROM), U13 (switch decoder for reset, repeat, color, and status), U16
(treatment switch buffer for aiming beam intensity and repeat rate), and U17 (treatment switch buffer for
power and exposure time). For a read operation, U8 drops /RD/ low (or for memory reads, the PSEN signal
low). The memory or I/O device addressed places the 8 bits of data requested on AD0 through AD7, and U8
reads it in.

4.6.3 RS-485 Bus

The microcontroller communicates with the Control Electronics over an RS-485 bus. A UART internal to the
8032 receives serial data bytes from, and sends serial data bytes to, U3, the bus driver, over the TXD and RXD
lines. The UART adds a parity bit (even parity) to each byte of transmitted data, and checks parity on each
received byte.

Received signals come in on the TXRX+ and TXRX- lines as 9 bit packages (8 data bits plus a parity bit) at
4800 baud. A high is represented by a combination of +5VDC (grnd ref) on the TXRX+ line and 0VDC (grnd
ref) on the TXRX- line. A low is represented as 0VDC (grnd ref) on the TXRX+ line and 5VDC (grnd ref) on
the TXRX- line.

The XMIT ENABLE signal from pin 4 of the microcontroller is anded with the highdog Q output to enable
the transmit function of the driver. When the DE input is high, the driver U3 converts serial logic in from the
microcontroller (TXD) to serial differential levels out on the TXRX+ and TXRX- lines. A high is represented
by a combination of +5VDC (grnd ref) on the TXRX+ line and 0VDC (grnd ref) on the TXRX- line. A low is
represented as 0VDC (grnd ref) on the TXRX+ line and 5VDC (grnd ref) on the TXRX- line.

4.6.4 Status Indicators

Periodically, the Control Electronics sends commands to the Display (over the RS-485 bus) to update the on/
off condition of the GREEN, ALL, READY, STANDBY, BLINK REPEAT, and LASER EMISSION indicators.
The microcontroller writes to status latch U15 to control the indicators. U15 outputs turn off or on current
sink inverters within U14. A low out of one of these inverters turns on the corresponding LED.

THEORY OF OPERATION NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


4-26 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

The BLINK REPEAT indicator operates in repeat mode, giving a visual indication of the duration of exposure
(indicator on) and delay between exposures (indicator off). The Control Electronics transmits “on time” and
“off time” information for the blink repeat indicator to the microcontroller, and the microcontroller handles
the actual blinking of the indicator by writing to the D5 input of U10 to turn the indicator off and on at the
proper rate.

4.6.5 Error Displays

The microcontroller writes to status latch U21 to control the INTERLOCK, POWER, TEMPERATURE, and
WRENCH icons. U21 outputs turn off or on current sink inverters within U22. A high into an inverter results
in a low out, turning on the corresponding LED.

4.6.6 Reset, Status, Color, Repeat Switch Circuit

The four front panel push buttons are monitored by switch decoder U12. Each time a switch is pushed, U12
sends an interrupt request to the microcontroller (high out on the DATA line). The microprocessor responds
to the interrupt by reading the A, B, C, and D outputs of U12, which contain the information on which switch
or switches have been pushed.

4.6.7 Seven Segment Display Circuits (Power, Count, Time)

Periodically, the Control Electronics sends power, count, and exposure time information to the
microcontroller over the RS485 bus. The microcontroller writes this information to the segment drivers U2,
U3, and U15. Each driver can serve up to 4 seven segment LEDs. Four addressable (A0 and A1 inputs)
internal registers in each segment driver store the values written for each of the segments it drives (U3 has
only three segments to drive.). The LEDs are strobed at a 1KHZ rate, through current sinks U4 and U5.

When the system is placed in repeat mode, the exposure time display briefly displays the rep rate, as shots
per second, then returns to displaying the exposure time. Once in rep mode, each time the rep rate knob is
turned, the exposure time briefly displays the new rep rate, as shots per second.

4.6.8 Power, Exposure Time, Aiming Beam Intensity, and Repeat Rate Knob Circuits

Periodically, the Control Electronics sends a command to the Display (over the RS-485 bus) requesting that
the Display transmit back any changes to the power, exposure time, aiming beam intensity, or repeat rate
knobs since the last such request. The microcontroller reads the knob positions via switch buffers U8 and U9.
The switches are all 4 bit output rotary encoded, passing a unique combination of open/grounds for each of
the 16 positions.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL THEORY OF OPERATION


0614-134-01 08/98 4-27
®
®

4.7 SAFETY MONITOR SUBSYSTEM

4.7.1 Overview

The Safety Monitor subsystem detects and reacts to unsafe operating conditions in the laser system. It
provides error detection independent of the control electronics, and uses its own photocell (safety photocell)
to monitor exposure power. Most errors are reported to the control electronics, which sends an error message
to the front panel. The table on page 4-26 summarizes the errors detected, and the action the safety monitor
takes in response to the error.

4.7.2 Over, Under, > Max, >Min Power Circuits

(Refer to 8-8) To determine over and underpower conditions, the safety monitor compares the SM TREAT
LEVEL signal with the SAFETY PHOTOCELL POWER signal.

The SM TREAT LEVEL signal (in on J51-2) comes from the Control Electronics PCB safety monitor DAC.
Through the duration of the exposure, this signal is an analog voltage proportional to requested power
(approximately 2.5VDC (grnd ref)/watt).

The SAFETY PHOTOCELL POWER signal (in on J51-6) comes from the safety photocell circuit on the photo-
sensor board. The safety photocell circuit is calibrated to provide an analog voltage matching that of the SM
TREAT LEVEL signal for the min to max treatment power range (approximately 2.5VDC (gnd ref)/watt).
The PHOTOCELL INJECTION input is not used in normal operation. U15A and SW1 form a test circuit used
to simulate an overpower or underpower condition. Both switch contacts should be open for normal opera-
tion of the machine.

U17A provides isolation for the SM TREAT LEVEL signal input. Its output is sent to three places:

• Voltage divider RP4 and R11, which supplies a voltage equal to approximately 20% of the
SM TREAT LEVEL signal to over and under power comparators U18A and U18B.

• Positive input to the REQUEST-PHOTOCELL difference amp U17D.

• Negative input to PHOTOCELL-REQUEST difference amp U17B.

U15B provides isolation for the SAFETY PHOTOCELL POWER signal input. Its output is sent, via
summing amp U15C, to four places:

• Negative input to the REQUEST-PHOTOCELL difference amp U17D.

• Positive input to the PHOTOCELL-REQUEST difference amp U17B.

THEORY OF OPERATION NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


4-28 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

ERROR DETECTED RESPONSE

Safety shutter open, Trip main contactor.


power greater than
min, and footswitch
not depressed.

Greater than max Trip main contactor.


signal power from
power photocell. (3.95W)

Measured power is Crowbar signal to laser power supply


more than 20% of to end exposure, drop safety shutter,
requested power. SMERR6 error to control electronics.
(OVERPOWER) Control panel displays E221. Error
will clear with any operator input
at front panel.

Exposure has Crowbar signal to laser power supply


continued 2ms longer to end exposure, drop safety shutter,
than requested exposure SMERR5 error to control electronics.
time (OVERTIME) Control panel displays E222. Error
will clear with any operator input
at front panel.

Eye safety filter out, and Crowbar signal to laser power supply
laser power greater than to end exposure, drop safety shutter,
minimum (40 mw). SMERR4 error to control electronics.
Control panel displays E225. Error
will clear with any operator input
at front panel.

Exposure terminated SMERR2 error to control electronics.


more than 2ms before end Control panel displays E224. Error
of requested exposure time, will clear with any operator input
and footswitch was active. at front panel.
(UNDERTIME)

Power as measured by safety SMERR3 to control electronics.


photocell is over 20% less System is returned to STANDBY.
than requested power. Clear with any operator input at front
(UNDERPOWER) panel. Power display will indicate
the highest power available.

SAFETY MONITOR FUNCTIONS

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL THEORY OF OPERATION


0614-134-01 08/98 4-29
®
®

• Greater than minimum signal power detection circuit, U18C. U18C compares the SAFETY
PHOTOCELL POWER signal to a .1VDC (gnd ref) reference. The reference is developed
(voltage divider RP4/R30) from the regulated 10VDC (gnd ref) out of U16. The .1VDC is
representative of the SAFETY PHOTOCELL POWER signal at 40 mwatts. If the SAFETY
PHOTOCELL POWER signal is greater than .1VDC (gnd ref), U18C output opens, allowing
pull up of the GREATER THAN MINIMUM SIGNAL POWER signal to a logic high (5VDC
(gnd ref) through RP5 10K resistor). When the SAFETY PHOTOCELL POWER signal is less
than .1VDC (gnd ref), U18C output goes to -15VDC, and the GREATER THAN MINIMUM
SIGNAL POWER signal goes to approximately ground (voltage divider R20/RP5). The
GREATER THAN MINIMUM SIGNAL POWER signal is used as an enable to the UNDER-
TIME, ESF OUT, UNDERPOWER, OVERTIME, and SS OPEN&>MIN&FSW fault circuits.

• Greater than max signal power (3.95 watts) detection circuit, U18D. U18D compares the
SAFETY PHOTOCELL POWER signal to a 9.88VDC (gnd ref) reference. The reference is
developed (voltage divider R29/RP4) from the regulated 10VDC (gnd ref) output of U16.
The 9.88 VDC is representative of the SAFETY PHOTOCELL POWER signal at 3.95 watts. If
the SAFETY PHOTOCELL POWER signal is greater than 9.88VDC, U18D output opens,
allowing pull up of the GREATER THAN MAX SIGNAL POWER signal to a logic high
(5VDC through RP5 10K resistor). The high is sent to nor gate U13A, whose /CONTACTOR
TRIP/ signal goes low. U10F outputs a low, to J52-12. The low goes to the control electronics
board ( J13-12) where it turns off the contactor drive FET Q1, shutting down the laser system.

The 20% underpower circuit REQUEST-PHOTOCELL difference amp, U17D, outputs the difference voltage
between the SAFETY PHOTOCELL POWER and SM TREAT LEVEL signals, with the polarity indicating
which signal is greater:

• -V at TP5 indicates that the SAFETY PHOTOCELL POWER signal is greater than the SM TREAT
LEVEL signal by “V” volts. In other words, the detected power is greater than the requested power.
No matter what the voltage, this is NOT an underpower condition. U18A’s negative input has a
positive voltage representing 20% of requested power. The output of U18A at TP8 will be approxi-
mately ground (voltage divider RP5/R14), and gate U14D output is held low, the no fault condition.

• +V at TP5 indicates that the SAFETY PHOTOCELL POWER signal is less than the SM TREAT
LEVEL signal by “V” volts. In other words, the detected power is less than the requested power. If
the positive voltage out of U17D is greater than the positive voltage representing 20% of requested
power (pin 4 input to U18A), then actual power is 20% (or more) less than requested power, and
U18A’s output goes to an open condition. The output line is pulled up to a 5VDC high into U14D
(pin 12). The other input to U14D (pin 13) is an enable from AND gate U2B. U2B outputs a high
when the FSW ACTIVE signal is high, and the EXPOSURE TIMER signal is high, i.e., when the
footswitch is depressed, and the Control Electronics is requesting power. If both inputs to AND gate
U14D are high, its output goes high, and is sent on to AND gate U14A pin 1 input. The other input to
U14A is the GREATER THAN MINIMUM POWER described earlier in this subtopic. If the power as
measured by the safety photocell is greater than 40mw, this signal will be high. If both inputs to
AND gate U14A are high, its output goes high. The high is inverted by U16E and output as /SMERR
3 UNDER POWER/. This signal is sent to the Control Electronics, and results in an error display on
the front panel.

The 20% overpower circuit difference amplifier U17B works in the same manner as the underpower differ-
ence amplifier U17D, except that the two inputs are reversed; the positive input (pin 5) sees the SAFETY
PHOTOCELL POWER signal, and the negative input (pin 6) sees the SM TREAT LEVEL signal. U17B’s
output is:

THEORY OF OPERATION NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


4-30 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

• -V if SAFETY PHOTOCELL POWER signal is less than the SM TREAT LEVEL signal. In other
words, detected power is less than the requested power. In this case, an overpower condition could
not exist. The output of U17B is sent to the positive input of U18B. The negative input of U18B is the
positive voltage out of the 20% divider circuit described earlier in this subtopic. A negative voltage
on the positive input and positive voltage on its negative input causes U18B’s output to go to near.

• -15VDC. This results in approximately ground at the input to AND gate U14C, pin 9 (voltage
divider R23/RP5). U14C’s output, the 20% OVER line, is held low, its non-fault condition.

• +V if SAFETY PHOTOCELL POWER signal is greater than the SM TREAT LEVEL. In other words,
the detected power is greater than requested power. The voltage level indicates the magnitude of the
difference between the two signals. The output of U17B is sent to the positive input of U18B. U18B’s
other (negative) input is the output of the 20% voltage divider described earlier (20% of the requested
power voltage). If the PHOTOCELL-REQUEST voltage into U18B is less than the 20% of requested
power voltage on the other input to U18B, U18B output remains in the low, nonfault condition. If the
PHOTOCELL-REQUEST voltage is greater than the 20% of requested voltage, U18B’s output opens,
and the pin 9 input to AND gate U14C goes high. U14C will pass the high only if its pin 10 input is
high (FSW ACTIVE * EXPOSURE TIMER=1, U2B). The high out of U14C goes to two places:

* Inverted by U6B to set /SMERR 6 OVERPOWER / to its active (low) state. This signal is
sent to the Control Electronics to indicate that a 20% overpower condition has been detected.
The Control Electronics will send an E221 error to the front panel for display.

* NOR gate U13B pin 3 input, forcing its output low. The low forces AND gate U8D's output
low, which triggers 50 millisecond timer U3A. U3A’s /Q/ output goes low for 50 millisec-
onds. This is the /SHUTDOWN/ signal. /SHUTDOWN/ low is sent to the Laser Power
Supply (via U10C, out J52-2) to crowbar the tube, ending the exposure. /SHUTDOWN/ low
also forces the output of AND gate U12A low, which is the /SM SHUTTER DROP/signal. /
SM SHUTTER DROP/ low turns off FET Q1, opening the SAFETY SHUTTER DRIVE line to
the safety shutter solenoid. The safety shutter solenoid de-energizes, and the shutter moves
in to block the beam path. Note that SW2 can be opened to disable the /SM SHUTTER
DROP/ from going low. SW2 is opened by the service technician while in current control.

Note that the Control Electronics also monitors for over and under power conditions. It will fault when the
power is 25% more or less than requested. The safety monitor over and under power circuits provide a
secondary detection capability, and monitors for the faults continuously, while the microprocessor monitors
for the faults at regular intervals.

4.7.3 Undertime Fault Detection Circuit

The undertime detection circuit monitors the GREATER THAN MINIMUM POWER (output of U18C, high
when SAFETY PHOTOCELL POWER is greater than 40mw) and the FSW ACTIVE EXPOSURE TIMER
(output of U2B, high when footswitch is pressed and Control Electronics is requesting power) signals to
detect an end to treatment power before either the footswitch is released or the exposure times out. A de-
tected undertime fault results in an /SMERR 2 UNDERTIME/ low to the Control Electronics, which then
commands the front panel to display an E224 error message.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL THEORY OF OPERATION


0614-134-01 08/98 4-31
®
®

(Refer to 8-8) An undertime fault is detected whenever the output of AND gate U2A goes high. At least one
of the three inputs to the and gate must always be low, or an undertime fault will result. The three inputs are
developed as follows:

• Pin 1 input is low whenever the GREATER THAN MINIMUM SIGNAL POWER signal is high
(safety photocell sees treatment power) and for 1 millisecond after the signal goes back to high. When
GREATER THAN MINIMUM SIGNAL POWER goes high, the output of U1A is forced high. Inverter
U11F inverts the high to a low into pin 1 of the AND gate U2A. When the GREATER THAN MINI-
MUM SIGNAL POWER goes back to a low, the monostable multivibrator U4A is triggered (high to
low transition on /A/ input), and outputs a 1 millisecond high to U1A. After 1 millisecond, both
inputs to the OR gate U1A are low, and the pin 1 input to U2A goes to high.

• Pin 2 is low when either the footswitch is not depressed, or the Control Electronics is not requesting
power (EXPOSURE TIMER low). AND gate U2B supplies the input to pin 2 of U2A. U2B’s inputs
are the FSW ACTIVE signal from OR gate U7B, and the EXPOSURE TIMER signal from the Control
Electronics. Both signals must be high to get a high out of the AND gate U2B:

* The FSW ACTIVE signal is normally controlled by the /FOOTSWITCH N.O and N.C./
signals. When the footswitch is depressed, the /N.O./ line is open, and the /N.C./ line is
grounded, causing a high out of AND gate U12D. The /SM EXP TEST/ line is used by the
control electronics during self testing to simulate depressing the footswitch. When this signal
goes low, the FSW ACTIVE line goes high, as if the footswitch had been depressed.

* The EXPOSURE TIMER signal is a timing signal generated by the control electronics and
sent to the Laser Power Supply, to control the length of an exposure. When high, the Con-
trol Electronics is requesting exposure power. When the exposure times out, the signal is
dropped low to end the exposure.

• Pin 13 input goes low for 4 milliseconds each time the output of U2B goes high. The low to high
transition triggers (B input) monostable multivibrator U4B, which outputs a 4 millisecond low on it /
Q/ output. This 4 millisecond low gives the system time to respond to the request for power before
enabling the undertime circuit.

4.7.4 Overtime Fault Detection Circuit

The overtime fault detection circuit monitors the GREATER THAN MINIMUM SIGNAL POWER, EXPO-
SURE TIMER, and FSW ACTIVE signals to detect the presence of treatment level power after the footswitch
has been released, or the exposure has timed out. If an overtime fault is detected, the /SHUTDOWN/ signal
is driven low to the Laser Power Supply, to end the exposure (crowbar), the safety shutter is dropped, and an
SMERR 5 OVERTIME error is sent to the Control Electronics. The Control Electronics commands the front
panel to display an E222 error code.

(Refer to 8-8) An overtime fault occurs when either of the two inputs to OR gate U7D go high. The output of
U7D will go high, and be sent to inverter U6F, and NOR gate U13B. The output of U6F is the /SMERR 5
OVERTIME/ signal sent to the Control Electronics to report the error. The input to NOR gate U13B forces its
output low, triggering monostable multivibrator U3A to output a 50 millisecond low on its /Q/ line. The 50
millisecond low is the /SHUTDOWN/ signal that goes to the Laser Power Supply to cause a crowbar. The /
Q/ output low also forces AND gate U12A’s output low, turning off FET Q1 to open the SAFETY SHUTTER
DRIVE ground return to the safety shutter solenoid. The solenoid de-energizes, and the safety shutter moves
into the beam path.

THEORY OF OPERATION NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


4-32 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

The two inputs to the OR gate U7D are the outputs from two separate overtime detection circuits. The pin 12
input goes high when treatment power is still present 2 milliseconds after the footswitch has been released.
The pin 13 input goes high if treatment power is still present 2 milliseconds after the exposure has timed out.

When the footswitch is depressed, the FSW ACTIVE signal is high, and the output of U7C is held high. The
high out of U7C is input to inverter U9B, which outputs a low to the AND gate U8B. As long as the
footswitch is depressed, the pin 5 input to U8B is held low, and U8B’s output is low (no fault). When the
footswitch is released, the FSW ACTIVE signal goes low, triggering the monostable multivibrator U5A. U5A
outputs a 2 millisecond high on its Q output, keeping the U7C output high for 2 milliseconds after the
footswitch is released. After the 2 millisecond delay, the output of U7C goes low. The pin 5 input to U8B
goes high.

If the pin 4 input (> MIN SIGNAL ) is high, indicating that treatment power is still being detected, the output
of U8B goes high, and an overtime fault results, as described above.

While the EXPOSURE TIMER signal is active (high), the output of OR gate U7A will be high. U7A’s output is
inverted by U9A, holding the output of AND gate U8A low, the no fault condition. When the exposure times
out, the EXPOSURE TIMER signal goes low. The high to low transition is felt on the /A/ input of
monostable multivibrator U5B, causing its Q output to go high for 2 milliseconds. The high out of U5B holds
the output of U7A high for 2 milliseconds after the EXPOSURE TIMER signal goes low. After the 2 millisec-
ond delay, the output of U7A goes low, is inverted to a high by U9A, and input to U8A pin 1 as a high. If the
pin 2 input (> MIN SIGNAL) is high, indicating treatment power is still being detected, the output of U8A
goes high, and an overtime fault results, as described above.

4.7.5 ESF Out Fault Detection Circuit

The ESF out circuit monitors the GREATER THAN MINIMUM SIGNAL POWER signal and the GO-/GO/
signals to detect the presence of treatment power when the eye safety filter is not inserted. If treatment power
is detected at the safety photocell when the eye safety filter is out, an ESF out fault occurs.

(Refer to 8-8) when an ESF out fault occurs, the output of AND gate U8C will go high. The output is inverted
by U6A as the /SMERR 4 ESF OUT/ signal, which is sent to the Control Electronics to report the error. The
Control Electronics sends a command to the front panel to display an E225 error code. The output of U8C is
also an input to the NOR gate U13B. A high into the NOR gate forces its output to a low, which forces the
output of AND gate U8D to a low. The high to low transition out of U8D triggers monostable multivibrator
U3A to output a 50 millisecond low pulse on the /SHUTDOWN/ line. This low is sent to the Laser Power
Supply to activate the crowbar circuit there, and turns off FET Q1, to open the SAFETY SHUTTER DRIVE line
to the safety shutter solenoid. The solenoid de-energizes, moving in to block the beam path.

The GO and /GO/ signals indicate the position of the eye safety filter. Go is high, and /GO/ is low, when
the eye safety filter is in place. When the eye safety filter is in place the output of AND gate U12C will be
high. The high is inverted to a low by U11D, and applied to the pin 9 input to U8C. The output of U8C is
held low, the no fault condition. If the eye safety filter is not in place, the pin 9 input to and gate U8C is high.
If the GREATER THAN MINIMUM SIGNAL POWER signal goes high (indicating the safety photocell sees
treatment power) while the eye safety filter is out, both inputs to and gate U8C are high, resulting in a ESF
OUT fault as described above.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL THEORY OF OPERATION


0614-134-01 08/98 4-33
®
®

4.7.6 SS OPEN, > MIN & FSW INACTIVE Fault Detection Circuit

The SS OPEN, > MIN & FSW INACTIVE fault detection circuit monitors the SAFETY SHUTTER IN and OUT,
/FSW+2ms/, and > MIN SIGNAL, to detect treatment power at the safety photocell when the footswitch is
not depressed and the safety shutter is open. This condition results in a main contactor trip, shutting down
the laser system.

(Refer to 8-8) The output of AND gate U2C goes high when the fault condition is detected. The high out of
U2C goes to NOR gate U13A, forcing its output low. The low is the /CONTACTOR TRIP/ circuit, which
goes to the control electronics to trip the main contactor. Safety shutter position is indicated by the SAFETY
SHUTTER IN/OUT signals in on J54-3/4 (J52-10/11 send the signals on to the control electronics). U12B’s
output is high when the safety shutter is pulled in, out of the beam path. The pin 10 input to U2C is a low for
the duration of the FSW ACTIVE signal high, plus 2 msecs, as used in the overtime circuit. The pin 9 input to
U2C is high as long as treatment power is detected at the safety photocell. If the safety shutter is out of the
beam path, and treatment power is being delivered, the pin 10 input to U2C must remain low, or the fault
will occur.

4.8 LASER POWER SUPPLY

4.8.1 Overview

The NOVUS 2000 is available in single phase and three phase versions. The single phase version was devel-
oped first, and then a three phase system was developed by modifying the single phase version to work off
of three phase 380-415VAC (which is commonly available in Europe). The major differences between the two
versions lie in their respective laser power supplies. The single phase supply is covered in section 4.8.2, and
the three phase supply is covered in 4.8.3.

4.8.2 The Single Phase Power Supply

The single phase laser power supply subsystem develops the B+/B- voltage to supply the tube, and responds
to control electronics commands to start the tube and run it at a specified light power level, for a specified
exposure period. A current control mode is also available, for servicing the laser. The laser tube is started at
the beginning of each exposure, and is turned off between exposures. This method of operating the tube
greatly reduces the heat generated by the laser power supply, allowing the NOVUS 2000 to operate without
external water cooling.

B+/- voltage is developed by phase angle controlled firing of two SCR’s in series with the two active AC
input lines, into a set of 3 parallel 14,000 microfarad capacitors. Between exposures, B+ is maintained at
155VDC (ref B-); just prior to tube start time, voltage is ramped up to 170VDC (ref B-) (actually, the exact
voltage level reached during ramp up is dependent upon the AC supply voltage, and can be more than
170VDC for AC supplies with high AC voltage); and during the exposure, the B+ voltage is kept at 12VDC
(ref B-) above the actual tube voltage.

THEORY OF OPERATION NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


4-34 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL THEORY OF OPERATION


0614-134-01 08/98 4-35
®
®

In normal operation, the light control mode is used to maintain the tube current at whatever level is required
to provide the light power requested at the front panel. Current is controlled by the conduction of four
parallel MOSFETS located in series with the tube, between the tube and B-supply. The Control Electronics
provides an analog voltage to the light control circuitry which represents the level of power requested:
approximately 2.5VDC (grnd ref)/watt of requested power. A power photocell located in the optics assembly
provides the light control circuitry with a feedback voltage proportional to actual light power. The output of
the power photocell circuit is calibrated to provide the same range of voltage as the analog power request
voltage from the control electronics. The light control circuitry increases/decreases the conduction of the four
MOSFET’s to make the feedback voltage from the power photocell circuit match the power request voltage
from the control electronics. A current control mode is provided for service use, allowing MOSFET conduc-
tion to be set to provide a constant tube current.

The magnet, which runs off the B+ supply, is turned on three zero crossings before each exposure, and
remains on throughout the exposure. At the end of the exposure, the magnet is turned off, unless B+ exceeds
155VDC. In this case, the magnet is kept on to drain the caps back down to the 155VDC level, at which point
the magnet is turned off.

The filament transformer runs from system power up to system shutdown. A ferro-resonant transformer
automatically adjusts to a wide range of AC supply voltages, eliminating the need for “retapping” the
transformer at installation. Cathode current is typically 23 amps.

A zero crossing circuit in the laser power supply provides the Control Electronics with a signal which indi-
cates the start of each zero crossing of the AC supply. The Control Electronics uses this input to synchronize
its requests for "B+ ramp up" and "tube start" to begin at a zero crossing.

All logic and analog voltages SENT TO, or which LEAVE FROM, the laser power supply are referenced to
analog ground. Circuits in the laser power supply which are referenced to analog ground use DC operating
voltages from the same +/- 15 and +5VDC power supply which supplies the control electronics. These DC
voltages reach the laser power supply via the Control Electronics board. Other circuits in the laser power
supply operate on +/- 12VDC REFERENCED TO B-, from the power supply located in the laser power
supply. Opto-isolators are used to exchange signals between the circuits referenced to analog ground, and
those referenced to B-.

CAUTION:

• SEVERE DAMAGE can occur, to the technician, test equipment, and NOVUS 2000, if strict
attention is not paid to the proper use of test equipment in servicing the laser power supply.

• Never use an oscilloscope which is connected to AC supply power with a three prong
plug. Use an isolation adaptor plug to allow only the two active leads of the scope power
cord to be connected to the AC supply, or use a special scope isolation module, or a battery
powered scope.

• Never connect an oscilloscope probe ground plug to analog/digital/earth ground at the


same time as any other oscilloscope probe ground plug on the same oscilloscope is connected
to B- ground reference.

• In all cases, never allow a complete path for current between analog/digital/earth ground
and the B- ground. The B- ground is actually as much as 90VDC lower than analog/digital/
earth ground.

THEORY OF OPERATION NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


4-36 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

Safety circuits are used throughout the laser power supply to provide for system, technician, operator, and
patient safety. A crowbar circuit responds to commands from the safety monitor, control electronics, and
laser power supply, to rapidly terminate an exposure by turning off passbank drive and enabling a very low
resistance shunt path around the tube. A 200 VDC protection circuit disables the SCR firing if B+ reaches
200VDC, and another circuit will trip the main contactor if B+ reaches 225VDC. A power limiting circuit sums
a sample of tube current and B+, limiting MOSFET drive if the sum of the two samples indicates excessive
drain voltage. An LED indictor flashes to indicate to servicing technicians that the B+ capacitors are charged,
and extinguishes when the caps are safely discharged (to less than 10VDC (B- ref)).

4.8.2.1 Primary Power Input and B+ Supply

The primary power input and B+ supply circuit connects AC line power in to the B+ supply and +/- 12VDC
power supply, provides noise isolation between the NOVUS 2000 and input AC power lines, and develops
the B+ supply voltage.

(Refer to 8-17) AC supply 208VAC passes through CB1 and the main contactor to the laser power supply. The
208 VAC is input to the +/- 12VDC power supply referenced to B-, and to mode choke L1. The input line
capacitors and L1 provide noise isolation. The 208VAC is applied to SCR packs 1 and 2, whose gates are fired
by the G1 and G2 inputs from the SCR firing control circuit.

When the input to SCR1 is positive with respect to the input of SCR2, the diode in SCR pack 2 conducts,
passing negative line voltage to the B- line, and SCR2 remains off for the entire half cycle. The firing control
circuit can fire SCR1 at any point in the half cycle, as necessary, to supply the B+ capacitors. The firing signal
occurs earlier in the half cycle to provide more current to the caps, or later in the half to supply less current.
During the other half cycle, the SCR packs roles are reversed, with SCR1 off and firing enabled to SCR2.

L2 and L3 filter the positive AC half cycles passed by the SCR’s to the capacitors. D2 acts as a swing back
diode, allowing the inductors L2 and L3 to dump stored energy into the capacitors when both SCR’s are off.
R1 is a bleeder resistor for main storage capacitors C1, C2 and C3. The voltage across the storage capacitors is
the B+ supply voltage.

4.8.2.2 Firing Control Circuit

The firing control circuit fires the B+ supply SCR’s to maintain the B+ voltage at:

• 0VDC when the watchdog circuit in the Control Electronics is disabled.

• 155VDC between exposures.

• Ramp up from 155VDC to 170VDC, starting three zero crossings before an exposure, and up to just
before tube start. Actually, the voltage reached during ramp up varies with the voltage level of the
AC supply voltage, and can be more than 170VDC (B- ref).

• 12 volts above the tube voltage, while the tube is on.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL THEORY OF OPERATION


0614-134-01 08/98 4-37
®
®

4.8.2.2.1 SCR Triggering

(Refer to 8-17) The SCR’s are fired by voltage induced into the secondaries of T1 and T2. U30-5 and U30-9
output positive triggering pulses to the transformer primaries when their respective RST inputs go high. The
RST inputs to U30-5 and U30-9 are controlled by two separate but functionally identical op amp circuits. The
U30-9 input circuit which controls the firing of SCR2 is described in the following paragraphs. The U30-5
input circuit operates in the same manner to fire SCR1.

Three comparators, U15-13, U15-14, and U23-2, have outputs to the RST line of U30-9:

• U15-13 output holds the /SCR2 RST/ line low throughout the half cycle when SCR2 is reverse
biased, and immediately following the firing of SCR2 on the positive half cycle. The output opens
only during the period during the positive half cycle prior to the firing of SCR2. During this period,
the U15-14 comparator can drive the /SCR2 RST/ signal high, to fire SCR2. U15-13 effectively
disables the trigger input for the entire SCR2 negative half cycle, and as soon as SCR2 begins conduct-
ing on the SCR2 positive half cycle.

The U15-13 positive input is a half wave rectified sample of the AC supply into SCR2 during
the positive half cycle (it is approximately 3% of the AC signal). During the negative half
cycle, it is a constant DC voltage just above B-.

The U15-13 negative input is a constant DC voltage just above B- throughout the negative
half cycle, and during the positive half cycle before the SCR fires. As soon as SCR2 fires, the
voltage on the SCR cathodes is the positive AC input voltage, D4 becomes forward biased,
and the SCR cathode voltages become a sample of the AC signal on the cathodes. This
sample voltage on U15-13’s negative input is slightly more positive than the sample in at
U15-13’s positive input (R63 drops a larger voltage than R64), so U15-13B’s output moves to
negative saturation, turning off the trigger pulses out of U30-9.

• U15-14 provides the output which actually causes the /SCR2 RST/ line to go high, enabling U30-9
to output the triggering pulses to the SCR, via T2. To output a high to trigger U30-9, its positive
input must have a voltage greater than the voltage on its negative input.

U15-14’s positive input is the ZERO RAMP signal from the zero crossing circuit. The signal
ramps from zero to approximately 8 volts (ref B-) for each AC half cycle. U15-14A’s negative
input is the /CHARGE/ signal. This signal is the control voltage which actually determines
at what point in the half cycle each SCR will be fired. The voltage can be from 0 to approxi-
mately 12VDC (ref B-). The higher the /CHARGE/ voltage, the later in the half cycle that the
SCR will be fired. At the beginning of the SCR2 positive half cycle, the ZERO RAMP voltage
is 0 volts (ref B-). As the half cycle continues, it rises towards approximately 8 volts (ref B-).
As soon as the ZERO RAMP signal on the positive input to U15-14 exceeds the /CHARGE/
voltage on the negative input, U15-14’s output goes high, and the SCR is triggered via U30-9
and T2. As described above, as soon as the SCR fires, U15-13 will force the RST line low, to
turn off the SCR triggering.

Note that if the /CHARGE/ signal is at 0 volts (ref B-), the SCR’s turn on at the beginning of
the half cycle, and if the /CHARGE/ signal is above the highest voltage of the ZERO RAMP
signal (approx. 8 volts (B- ref)), the SCR will not fire at all. The higher the /CHARGE/
signal, the later in the half cycle firing will occur.

THEORY OF OPERATION NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


4-38 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

• U23-2 monitors the B+ supply, forcing the /SCR2 RST/ line low if the B+ supply exceeds 200VDC
(ref B-). It is a safety circuit which should not effect the firing control during normal operation. The
positive input to U23-2 is a 10VDC (ref B-) reference voltage. The negative input is a 5% sample of
B+. If B+ exceeds 200 volts (ref B-), the negative input will exceed the 10 volt (ref B-) reference in on
the positive input, causing U23-2 to output a low onto the /SCR2 RST/ line. No further triggering of
the SCR can occur until the B+ voltage drops back below 200 volts.

Comparators U15-2, U15-1, and U23-1 perform the same functions for SCR1 triggering as described for U15-
14, U15-13, and U23-2 in the SCR2 triggering.

4.8.2.2.2 Developing the /CHARGE/ Signal

As described in the previous subtopic, the /CHARGE/ signal determines at what point in the half cycle
SCR’s 1 and 2 will be fired. The actual generation of the /CHARGE/ voltage level is complicated, and a
detailed analysis of the circuits involved is beyond the scope of this manual. This subtopic is intended to
identify which of the circuits are involved in developing the /CHARGE/ signal during the following opera-
tional states:

• When the control electronics watchdog timer is disabled, the /CHARGE/ signal is held at
+12VDC (ref B-) to prevent the SCR’s from firing at all. The /SUPPLY OFF/ signal from the control
electronics is held low, and passed through opto-isolator U27, setting up a voltage divider ( R170,
R168) which makes the /OFF/ signal slightly negative (approx -4v) with respect to B-. The /OFF/
signal is applied to the pin 3 input of U17-1, which forces U17-1’s output to negative saturation. The
U17-1 output is connected to the negative input of U25-7, the inverting summing amplifier which
develops the /CHARGE/ signal. The summing amplifiers input from U17-1 is of a much higher gain
than the other summing inputs to U25-7, minimizing any other summing inputs effect on the sum-
ming amplifiers output. The U25-7 output (/CHARGE/) goes to positive saturation, disabling any
SCR firing. U41-8 (/SOFTSTART/) holds the pin 12 positive input to integrator U25-14 slightly
negative, disabling ramp down circuit inputs to U25-14. There is no B+ voltage developed.

• When the Control Electronics watchdog timer is enabled, and no power supply ramp up or
exposure is being requested, the /CHARGE/ signal varies as necessary to maintain B+ at 155VDC
(ref B-). (Refer to 8-19) Electronic switch U32 contacts 3/2 and 6/7 open and close in response to the
pin 14 output of U38:

•• Contact 3/2 closed, 6/7 open, when B+ is below 155VDC (ref B-). Connects
integrator U25-14 through R118 into summing amplifier U25-7. The integrator
output goes less negative, causing the summing amplifier output to go less positive,
causing the SCR’s to fire earlier, B+ moves up.

•• Contact 3/2 open, 6/7 closed, when B+ is above 155VDC (ref B-). Connects -
12VDC (ref B-) through R157 into summing amplifier U25-7. Summing amplifier
U25-7 output moves more positive, causing the SCR’s to fire later, B+ moves down.

This switching continues for as long as the watchdog remains enabled, and no ramp up or
exposure is requested from the control electronics. The switch action is controlled by U38-2,
which monitors a 5% sample of B+, outputting a negative when B+ is less than 155VDC (ref
B-), which results in U38-14 outputting a high (closes 3/2, opens 6/7 contacts of U32). U38-9’s
positive input is at B- whenever there is no exposure or ramp up.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL THEORY OF OPERATION


0614-134-01 08/98 4-39
®
®

• Supply ramp up begins three zero crossings prior to starting the tube for an exposure, and contin-
ues until just before tube start. During this time, the B+ voltage is driven up to a maximum of 170
VDC (ref B-)( actually, the voltage can be higher than 170VDC, depending on the AC supply voltage
for the system), in preparation for starting the tube. The ramp up moves B+ up to minimize any
drain on the B+ supply as the tube begins to draw current from the supply. (Refer to 8-17) Three zero
crossings prior to requesting start up, the control electronics sets the /SUPPLY RAMP UP/ signal to
its active low state. Opto-isolator U33 passes the low to the pin 6 negative input of U41, whose
output is driven to positive saturation. The +12VDC (ref B-) out of U41-7 drives the pin 6 negative
input of U25-7 to a high positive. The pin 7 output (/CHARGE/) of summing amplifier U25-7 moves
to near B-. The SCR’s fire at the start of their respective positive half cycles, raising the B+ supply to
approximately 170 volts (or more) above B-. Note also that the output of U41-7, which goes to
positive saturation during supply ramp up, closes electronic switch U32 contacts 15 to 14, passing the
output of U40 to the pin 13 negative input of U25-14. This holds the U25-14 integrator in a condition
that allows it to recover at the end of ramp up, at which time its output begins to control the /
CHARGE/ voltage, as described in the next paragraph.

• Just prior to tube start, the RAMP DOWN circuit takes control of the /CHARGE/ signal out at
U25-7. (Refer to 8-17), maintaining a B+ voltage at approximately 12 VDC (ref B-) above the voltage
across the tube, until the exposure ends.

Just prior to tube start, the /SUPPLY RAMP UP/ signal returns to its high, inactive state. The
pin 7 output of U41 goes towards negative saturation, and control of the pin 6 negative input
to summing amplifier U25-7 passes to the output of integrator U25-14. The integrator is
driven by the /RAMP DOWN/ signal out of integrator U41-14. The pin 12 positive input to
U41 is held at B-. The pin 13 negative input is a current sample of the voltage drop across the
MOSFET passbank; it is positive when passbank voltage is above +12VDC (ref B-), and
negative if the passbank voltage is below +12VDC (ref B-).

The U41-14 integrator output drives the pin 12 input of integrator U25-14 less positive if the
passbank voltage is above +12VDC (ref B-), and the output of U25-14 is driven more nega-
tive, into pin 6 of inverting summing amplifier U25-7. Inverting summing amplifier U25-7’s
output goes more positive, and the SCR’s are triggered later in their respective half cycles,
dropping the B+ supply voltage. The drop continues until the passbank voltage is brought to
the +12VDC (ref B-) level. If the passbank voltage begins to drop below +12VDC (ref B-), the
integrator action is reversed, driving the /CHARGE/ signal down, to fire the SCR’s earlier in
their respective half cycles.

Comparator U41-1 compares the passbank control voltage to a B-+1.1VDC reference. It acts
as an enable for the ramp down integrator; if passbank control is > 1.1 volts, the pin 1 output
goes to positive saturation, and the ramp down integrator is enabled. If the passbank control
is < 1.1 volts, the output goes to negative saturation, disabling the ramp down integrator.
The 1.1VDC (ref B-) represents the minimum passbank control level sufficient to maintain
tube current (approx. 5 amps).

4.8.2.3 Zero Crossing Circuit

The zero crossing circuit samples the 208VAC line input to generate the ZERO RAMP and /ZERO CROSS-
ING/ signals. The ZERO RAMP is used in the SCR triggering circuit, within the laser power supply. The /
ZERO CROSSING/ signal is used by the control electronics to synchronize ramp up and tube start signals
with the beginning of an AC half cycle.

THEORY OF OPERATION NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


4-40 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

(Refer to 8-17) Input pins 5 and 6 of U17-7 are driven by a bridge rectified sample of the 208 VAC input lines.
The negative gain inverting amplifier outputs a 120Hz signal which peaks at approximately -8VDC (ref B-).
The signal feeds a ramp generator composed of U17-14 and U17-8. U17-14 is the integrator which outputs the
ramp. U17-8 resets the integrator by firing Q1 at the end of each half cycle. The output of the integrator is the
ZERO RAMP signal, which is sent to the firing control circuits, and on to U31 to generate the /ZERO CROSS-
ING/ signal. It is a ramp voltage which runs from 0 to approximately 8VDC (B- ref) through each half cycle.

U31 includes 3 Schmidt trigger inverters. When the ZERO RAMP signal drops low at the end of a half cycle,
the pin 12/4 output of U31 drops low, turning on opto-isolator U10. U10’s output is sent to the control
electronics as /ZERO CROSSING/.

4.8.2.4 Light Command Circuit

The light command circuit outputs a LIGHT COMMAND voltage to control the conduction of the passbank
MOSFETS, so that power delivered matches power requested. The TUBE POWER REQUEST signal voltage
from the control electronics is an analog voltage representing the level of power requested: 2.5VDC (grnd
ref)/watt of requested power. The power photocell circuit is calibrated to output 2.5VDC (gnd ref)/watt of
delivered power. The light command circuit drives the LIGHT COMMAND voltage up or down to make the
POWER PHOTOCELL (actual power) signal equal to the TUBE POWER REQUEST (requested power)
voltage. The light command voltage goes more positive for more current, and less positive for less current.

Note that the TUBE POWER REQUEST signal is actually:


(2.5VDC/watt displayed at front panel) delivery system factor = TUBE VOLTAGE REQUEST SIGNAL

The "delivery system factor" is determined by the smart fiber resistance measured by the old NOVUS
2000 at the end of the fiber. The software reads the smart fiber resistance, and uses the voltage to
determine the type of delivery system attached. Each valid delivery system type has a "delivery
system factor", kept in a software table. The "delivery system factor" indicates the typical % of
transmission for that delivery system. The NOVUS 2000 uses this factor to determine how much
power to actually request, so that power out of the delivery system will be that power selected at the
front panel. For example, for a slit lamp, the delivery system loss is considered to be 15%, so, if 1 watt
is selected at the front panel, and the smart fiber resistance indicates that a slit lamp is connected, the
NOVUS 2000 TUBE POWER REQUEST signal will be 2.5V (1)(1/.85)= 2.925V, which is a request for
approximately 1.17 watts measured at the photocell.

(Refer to 8-19) Before an exposure begins, the integrator U1-8 output is held at approximately 3VDC (grnd
ref) by the output of voltage follower U1-14. U1-14’s output is connected to integrator U1-8’s pin 9 input via
electronic switch U6 pins 14 to 15. The switch is energized (closed) by the /TRT-1MS/ signal, which is a high
until 1 millisecond into an exposure.

The exposure sequence begins with the pressing of the footswitch, or, when the control electronics uses the /
SAFETY MONITOR EXPOSURE TEST/ signal to simulate pressing the footswitch during its power up
checks. In either case, the result is that an electronic switch inside U21 closes. If the footswitch is not de-
pressed, and the SAFETY MONITOR EXPOSURE TEST signal is high, the light command circuit is not
connected to the CURRENT COMMAND line.

After the footswitch is depressed, the control electronics will wait until the delivery system eye safety filter is
pulled into place, and then, at the next zero crossing, set the EXPOSURE TIMER signal high, and the TUBE
POWER REQUEST signal to the analog voltage corresponding to the power dialed in on the front panel.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL THEORY OF OPERATION


0614-134-01 08/98 4-41
®
®

The EXPOSURE TIMER high goes to U6 pin 9 to close an electronic switch which connects the light command
voltage to the MOSFET drive circuitry. The EXPOSURE TIMER high also goes to U28-13 negative input,
forcing the output of U28-13 low. The low turns on indicator DS5, which will remain on as long as EXPO-
SURE TIMER remains low. The low out of U28-13 is also sent to U13’s /T/ input, and to the pin 2 input of
OR gate U11. U13 will drive its pin 6 output high for 1 millisecond, after the high to low transition on its /T/
input. Once both OR gate U11 inputs are low, the electronic switch U6 pins 14 to 15 open, disconnecting the
voltage follower U1-14 output from the integrator U1-8 negative input. Note that for the first millisecond of
any exposure, the light command signal will be 3 volts, which translates to about 5 amps of tube current. This
first millisecond is used to allow the tube and feedback circuits to stabilize after tube start up, before attempt-
ing to ramp up to the requested power level.

As indicated above, 1 millisecond after EXPOSURE TIMER goes high, the U1-14 output is disconnected from
the light control integrator U1-8. The relative voltage between the signals POWER PHOTOCELL and TUBE
POWER REQUEST determine the voltage at the common point between R29 and R50, which is also the
positive input to light control integrator U1-8. When the POWER PHOTOCELL signal is less than the TUBE
POWER REQUEST signal, the voltage will be negative, and the integrator will respond by increasing its
output voltage, increasing current through the passbank. If the POWER PHOTOCELL signal is greater than
the TUBE POWER REQUEST, the voltage will be positive, and the integrator will respond by decreasing its
output voltage, decreasing current through the passbank.

Note that from 1 msec into the exposure, until the power photocell output reaches 80% of TUBE POWER
REQUEST, the output of the integrator U1-8 is influenced by the -15VDC (gnd ref) via R54 and U6 contacts 6/
7. The switch U6 contacts 6/7 are closed by the EXPOSURE TIMER signal low to high transitions as the
exposure begins, which clocks U11. U11’s Q output goes high to turn on the switch. The negative voltage to
light control integrator U1 causes its output to move more positive, requesting more current through the
passbank. This circuitry helps the integrator output change more rapidly , so that it reaches the 80% point
sooner. This is most critical at lower power settings, and in green only operation, when tube power response
is slowest. As light out of the tube increases, the POWER PHOTOCELL signal will increase. When the
POWER PHOTOCELL voltage reaches 80% of the TUBE POWER REQUEST voltage, the junction of R51 and
R28 will go positive, driving the output of U20-1 low. The low out of U20-1 resets the U11 flip flop, de-
energizing electronic switch U6 pins 6 to 7. The time period required to take the tube from the 5 amps to 80%
requested power should be less than 3 milliseconds.

U1-1 is an emitter follower used to send the TUBE POWER REQUEST signal back to the control electronics,
where it is used to check that the TUBE POWER REQUEST signal made it to the laser power supply light
control circuit.

SW1 is used to place the system in current control. R25 is adjusted by the service technician to set the voltage
of the current command to the passbank. Contacts C2 to NO. 2 of the switch turn off U6 contacts 2/3, which
opens the ECHO TUBE POWER output of U1-1. The control electronics senses that the laser power supply is
in current control when it sees no return voltage on the ECHO TUBE POWER line.

4.8.2.5 Passbank Drive Circuit, and Passbank

The passbank drive circuit converts the ground referenced CURRENT COMMAND to B- reference, and sends
the signal to the four integrators which control the gate voltage to the passbank MOSFETS. The MOSFET
conduction determines the current through the tube.

THEORY OF OPERATION NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


4-42 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

(Refer to 8-18) The light command signal (1 to 7 VDC for 5 to 35 amps) is applied to the pin 23 input of
Amplifier opto-isolator U5. U5 converts the ground reference LIGHT COMMAND signal to a B- referenced
signal of the same voltage (gain of 1). This voltage is applied through R24 to four equal, parallel voltage
dividers. The voltage at T2, which is the top of each of the resistance paths, varies from .625V (ref B-) for 5
amps of tube current, to 4.375 volts (ref B-) for 35 amps of tube current. Each voltage divider places 1/20th the
voltage at TP15 to the positive input of the associated integrator. The integrator output drives its MOSFET
gate (between 4 and 5 volts at integrator output test points is normal range) to bring its negative input to the
same voltage as the voltage divider input to its positive pin.

The four MOSFETS are connected in parallel, each passing one fourth of the total tube current. Each of the
MOSFETS has a 20A fuse (F1, F2, F3, F4 mounted on the front of the passbank, these fuses have been elimi-
nated on new systems), and .025 ohm current sensing resistor in series with it. The current sensing resistor
provides the feedback voltage to the negative input of the MOSFET gate drive integrator. The gate drive
integrator outputs are protected by .05 amp fuses (F1, F2, F3, F4, ,mounted on the regulator board). CR1 limits
the gate drive of all four MOSFETS to no more than 12 volts via D46, D35, D13, D21. The crowbar circuit,
when fired, will shut down the gate drive signals through D47, D36, D14, D22.

4.8.2.6 Tube Start Circuit

The tube start circuit provides a high voltage pulse to the tube anode sufficient to ionize the tube. The circuit
is controlled by the /START/ signal from the control electronics.

(Refer to 8-20) The /START/ signal from the control electronics is applied to the positive input of comparator
U28-14. The control electronics pulses the /START/ signal low for approx. 150 microseconds to request a
tube start, driving the output of U28-14 low. The low out of U28-14 is applied to voltage divider R110/R109,
which will place approximately 1VDC (gnd ref) on the positive input of U20-14. The negative input to U20-14
is the CURRENT COMMAND (gnd referenced) signal, which establishes the amount of current through the
tube. It should be approximately 1.8 VDC (gnd ref) at the time the tube start request occurs. If the CUR-
RENT COMMAND voltage is less than the 1 VDC (gnd ref) on the positive input to U20-14, the output of U20
will remain open, and no start pulse will be generated. (A current command voltage below the 1 volt level is
less than necessary to maintain the 5 amp minimum current through the tube, so tube start is inhibited).

Normally, the CURRENT COMMAND voltage will be greater than 1 volt, and when the /START/ signal
goes low, the output of U20-14 will output a low, turning on opto-isolator U18. U18 passes the low across the
ground reference/B- reference boundary, triggering timer U22. U22 responds by outputting a 220 microsec-
ond high, which turns on indicator DS3, and FET Q2. Q2 is turned on to discharge C39 thru the primary of
the start transformer. As C39 discharges, a large DC voltage is induced in the secondary of the start trans-
former, which is felt on the tube anode. The tube will start, assuming the magnet is on, passbank drive is still
present, and the ramp up circuitry has brought B+ up to its 170VDC level.

4.8.2.7 Magnet Control Circuit

The magnet control circuit turns on the magnet when the /MAGNET/ signal from the control electronics
goes to its active (low) state. The /MAGNET/ signal is set low by the control electronics at the same time as it
sets the /SUPPLY RAMP UP/ signal low, three zero crossings prior to starting the tube. Once the magnet is
turned on, the magnet remains on for the duration of the exposure (during which the /MAGNET/ signal
from the control electronics remains low). At the end of the exposure, the control electronics /MAGNET/
signal returns to its high state. At this point, the magnet control circuit will:

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL THEORY OF OPERATION


0614-134-01 08/98 4-43
®
®

*Shut off the magnet if B+ is at or below 155V.

*Keep the magnet on, to help drain down B+, if B+ is above 155VDC. Once B+ reaches 155VDC, the
magnet is turned off.

(Refer to 8-20) The /MAGNET/ signal from the Control Electronics is driven low when the control electronics
wants the magnet turned on. U28-1 output turns off opto-isolator U26, driving the input of inverter U29-10
low into AND gate U36-6. U36-6 output is forced low. The low is sent to the 5 parallel inverters in U29,
which output a high into the gate of Q3. Q3 turns on, and the B+ path is completed to the magnet. DS2
indicator is turned on as well. As long as the /MAGNET/ signal is low, the magnet is kept on.

When the exposure ends, the control electronics sets /MAGNET/ to a high, turning on the opto-isolator U26.
The high on the gate of Q3 is lost, turning off the magnet, unless FET Q4 is on. Q4 is turned on by a high on
the MAG ON line.

(Refer to 8-19) The MAG ON signal is the Q output of flip flop U37. U37’s clock (C) input goes low three zero
crossings before an exposure, and stays low until the end of the exposure. The low to high transition (at end
of exposure) on the clock input of U37 has one of two results:

*If the reset (R) input to the flip flop is high, the “D” input” (+12VDC, ref B-) will be clocked through
to the Q output, the MAG ON signal. This high will keep the magnet on beyond the end of the
exposure.

*If the reset (R) input to the flip flop is low, the Q output is held low, and the clock pulse has no
effect. The magnet turns off as soon as the /MAGNET/ signal goes high.

The RESET input to U37 is supplied through U38-1 from U38-2. U38-2 compares the “E” supply signal (a 1/
20th sample of B+ voltage) with a reference voltage (in on pin 4) of approximately 7.75 VDC (ref B-). When
B+ is above 155 volts (ref B-), the E supply signal will be greater than the reference voltage, and U38-2’s
output will be open, resulting in a high into pin 7 of U38-1. U38-1 output is open, and the U37 reset line is a
high. This condition will allow the clock input to U37 to drive the MAG ON signal high at the end of the
exposure. When the B+ voltage drops to 155VDC (ref B-), the output of U38-2 goes low, U38-1 output goes
low, resetting the flip flop. The MAG ON signal goes back to low, and the magnet is turned off.

4.8.2.8 Crowbar Circuit

The crowbar circuit provides a very fast shut down of the tube, by shutting off passbank drive, and enabling
a low impedance path for current in parallel with the tube. The crowbar is fired by the /SHUTDOWN/
signal from the control electronics or safety monitor boards, when certain fault conditions occur, or by the
passbank thermostat.

(Refer to 8-18) When the /SHUTDOWN/ line is grounded by the safety monitor or control electronics, or the
passbank thermostat closes, Q6 turns on, turning on opto-isolator U34 (U35 is a monostable multivibrator
which outputs a 10 msec low on any of these faults) Q5 turns on, causing:

• The red SHUTDOWN indictor, DS1, to turn on.

• SCR3 to be triggered, via T3 trigger transformer. SCR3 on shunts the B+/B- current around the
tube.

THEORY OF OPERATION NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


4-44 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

• -12VDC (ref B-) onto the current control line, causing the MOSFET gate drive integrators to turn
off gate drive.

• -12VDC ( ref B-) directly to MOSFET gate drive line, to turn off the MOSFETS.

During the power up self tests, the NOVUS 2000 software checks the crowbar circuitry as follows:

After the cathode warm-up is complete, the watchdog is enabled, which allows the Laser Power
Supply to bring up B+ to the 155VDC level. After a three second delay, to allow the B+ voltage to
come up, the software sets the /SHUTDOWN/ low. If the crowbar circuit responds correctly, the
crowbar SCR will trigger, and the voltage at the tube anode will be shunted around the tube. The
result is a increase in the passbank drain voltage. (Refer to 8-19) The positive voltage spike at the
passbank drain is passed by 1000pf, 3KV capacitor to turn on Q7 briefly. This triggers U35 to drive
its /Q/ output low for a few msecs. This is the /CROWBAR OK/ signal, which goes to the Control
Electronics digital I/O. The software reads the /CROWBAR OK/ signal to confirm that the crowbar
circuit responded to the /SHUTDOWN/ command. If the test fails, an E200 error is displayed.

4.8.2.9 Capacitor Charge Indicator Circuit

(Refer to 8-20) The capacitor charge indicator circuit flashes indicator DS4 to provide a visual indication to
the service technician that a charge is present on the B+ supply capacitors. As B+ voltage drops, the rate of
flashing decreases; no flashing indicates the capacitors are at less than 10VDC.

4.8.2.10 225V B+ Contactor Trip Circuit

(Refer to 8-20) U8 monitors the B+ voltage, and outputs a low on its pin 4 output if the B+ voltage exceeds
225V (ref B-). The low out turns on the opto-isolator U9, grounding the /CONTACTOR TRIP/ line. The /
CONTACTOR TRIP/ line causes the hold on relay on the Control Electronics to de-energize, which breaks
the 24VAC supply to the contactor, shutting off the system.

4.8.3 Three Phase Laser Power Supply

The three phase laser power supply subsystem develops the B+/B- voltage to supply the tube, and responds
to Control Electronics commands to start the tube and run it at a specified light power level, for a specified
exposure period. A current control mode is also available, for servicing the laser. The laser tube is started at
the beginning of each exposure, and is turned off between exposures. This method of operating the tube
greatly reduces the heat generated by the laser power supply, allowing the NOVUS 2000 to operate without
external water cooling.

B+/- voltage is developed using a three phase bridge rectifier to develop a high voltage DC source. This high
voltage DC source is switched through a set of three IGBT's to feed two parallel 2000µƒ capacitors. The
voltage potential across these capacitors is the B+/B- supply. Between exposures, B+ is maintained at
175VDC (ref B-); For the first five milliseconds of every exposure, the B+ supply is allowed to rise to as much
as 190VDC; and for the remainder of the exposure, the B+ voltage is moved down towards 6VDC (ref B-)
above the actual tube voltage. Note that the three phase supply does not "ramp up" the B+ voltage prior to
starting the tube, as the single phase supply does.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL THEORY OF OPERATION


0614-134-01 08/98 4-45
®
®

In normal operation, the light control mode is used to maintain the tube current at whatever level is required
to provide the light power requested at the front panel. Current is controlled by the conduction of four
parallel MOSFETS located in series with the tube, between the tube and B-supply. The control electronics
provides an analog voltage to the light control circuitry which represents the level of power requested:
approximately 2.5VDC (grnd ref)/watt of requested power. A power photocell located in the optics assembly
provides the light control circuitry with a feedback voltage proportional to actual light power. The output of
the power photocell circuit is calibrated to provide the same range of voltage as the analog power request
voltage from the Control Electronics. The light control circuitry increases/decreases the conduction of the
four MOSFET’s to make the feedback voltage from the power photocell circuit match the power request
voltage from the control electronics. A current control mode is provided for service use, allowing MOSFET
conduction to be set to provide a constant tube current.

The magnet, which runs off the B+ supply, is turned on three zero crossings before each exposure, and
remains on throughout the exposure. At the end of the exposure, the magnet is turned off.

The filament transformer runs from system power up to system shutdown. A ferro-resonant transformer
automatically adjusts to a wide range of AC supply voltages, eliminating the need for “retapping” the
transformer at installation. Cathode current is typically 24-25 amps.

A "mock" zero crossing circuit in the Laser Power Supply mimics a signal to the Control Electronics which
indicates the start of each zero crossing of the AC supply. Actually, the AC zero crossings are not detected.
Instead, a timer sends a pulse to the Control Electronics every 8.3 msecs. The Control Electronics uses this
input to synchronize its requests for "B+ ramp up" and "tube start" to begin at a zero crossing. In the single
phase system, synchronizing tube start to zero crossings is important, in the three phase supply, it is not.

All logic and analog control voltages SENT TO, or which LEAVE FROM, the laser power supply are refer-
enced to analog or digital ground. Circuits in the laser power supply which are referenced to analog or
digital ground use DC operating voltages from the same +/- 15 and +5VDC power supply which supplies
the control electronics. These DC voltages reach the laser power supply via the control electronics board.
Other circuits in the laser power supply operate on +/- 15VDC REFERENCED TO B-, from the DC power
supply located in the laser power supply. Opto-isolators are used to exchange signals between the circuits
referenced to analog ground, and those referenced to B-. In addition, there is a +/-15VDC supply referenced
to P-, and a floating 12VDC supply used in the IGBT overcurrent trip control.

CAUTION:

• SEVERE DAMAGE can occur, to the technician, test equipment, and NOVUS 2000, if strict
attention is not paid to the proper use of test equipment in servicing the three phase laser
power supply.

• Never use an oscilloscope which is connected to AC supply power with a three prong
plug. Use an isolation adaptor plug to allow only the two active leads of the scope power
cord to be connected to the AC supply, or use a special scope isolation module, or a battery
powered scope.

• Never connect an oscilloscope probe ground plug to analog/digital/earth ground at the


same time as any other oscilloscope probe ground plug on the same oscilloscope is connected
to B- ground reference.

THEORY OF OPERATION NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


4-46 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

• In all cases, never allow a complete path for current between analog/digital/earth ground, B- ,or P-
grounds. The B- ground is actually as much as 90VDC lower than analog/digital/earth ground, and
the P- ground is even lower.

• Even when B+/B- potential is 0V, i.e., when B+ is turned off, the B+ line is at a VERY HIGH
voltage with respect to ground. The B+ line is directly connected to the output of the three phase
bridge rectifier.

• Never contact the P+ charge capacitors until they are safely discharged. After turn off, the P+
charge capacitors (C4 and C5) take approximately 2 minutes to discharge down to a safe level.

• Use extreme caution around the Cold Plate. Note that the P Plate, which is mounted to the Cold
plate, is at P-, while the cold plate itself is at ground potential. Note also that the blue colored IGBT
assembly, which is mounted to the P Plate, is at a potential different from P- or ground.

Safety circuits are used throughout the laser power supply to provide for system, technician, operator, and
patient safety. A crowbar circuit responds to commands from the safety monitor, control electronics and laser
power supply passbank thermostat, to rapidly terminate an exposure by turning off passbank drive and
enabling a very low resistance shunt path around the tube. A 225 VDC protection circuit will trip the main
contactor if B+ reaches 225VDC. A power limiting circuit sums a sample of tube current and B+, limiting
MOSFET drive if the sum of the two samples indicates excessive drain voltage. A light fiber interlock circuit
monitors the + 15VDC (ref P-) supply circuit , and disables IGBT firing if the supply outputs fall. A Gate
Drive Power Down Protection circuit disables further IGBT switching when the 12VDC (ref B-) begins to
drop off. An overcurrent trip circuit monitors the current through the IGBT's, and trips the main contactor if
the current becomes excessive.

4.8.3.1 Primary Power Input and B+ Supply

The primary power input and B+ supply circuit connects the AC line power to the B+ supply and + 12VDC
power supply, provides noise isolation between the switcher and AC line, and develops/controls the B+
supply voltage.

(Refer to 8-22) AC supply 380 - 415 VAC passes through the circuit breaker and main contactor to the laser
power supply bridge rectifier BR1, isolation transformer, and the +12VDC supply (ref B-). L1 is a 3 phase
common mode choke to keep laser power supply noise off the AC line.

The isolation transformer has two secondaries. The 230 VAC secondary is covered in the topic on AC power
distribution. The center tapped 36VAC secondary is used to supply the + 15VDC (ref P-) power supply on
the IGBT driver PCB.

Bridge rectifier BR1 converts the 3 phase input voltage to a rectified output, which is sent to the P-Filter, via
line filter L2 ( limits surge current into capacitors C4/C5). C4 and C5 develop the P+/P- charge, which is
typically 480 to 650Volts, depending on the voltage of the AC input. R2 and R3 are equalizing resistors which
keep the total charge across C4 and C5 balanced equally between the two capacitors. The P+/P- charge
capacitors take approximately 2 minutes to discharge after primary power is removed. C6, C7, R4, and R5
form a high frequency current filter. Note that the Charge across C4 and C5 is the P+/P- potential.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL THEORY OF OPERATION


0614-134-01 08/98 4-47
®
®

C8 and C9 are parallel 2000µƒ capacitors used to develop the B+/B- potential. The capacitors are charged by
turning on the IGBT set (Q1, Q2, Q3), which creates a current path from P+ through C8/C9, L4, L3, D1A, and
the IGBT's to P-. The capacitors are discharged primarily through the tube and magnet, during an exposure,
and at all times through bleeder resistor R6.

Note that the "on time" of the IGBT's effectively controls the level of charge across the B+/B- capacitors. To
maintain B+ at a given voltage, the IGBT's must be turned off and on at a rate which provides enough charg-
ing current through C8/C9 to replace the discharge current. As current demand on the B+ line increases
(tube on, magnet on) the IGBT's will turn on more often and/or for a longer duration, to balance out the
increased demand on B+.

Snubber and switching loss components R1, C2, D4, D3A/B, C1, L5, D1A/B, D2A/B, and L3 are used to
protect the IGBT's from rapid changes in current at IGBT turn on, and rapid changes in voltage at IGBT turn
off.

The LEM module provides a current output to the B+ Switching control circuit which is 1/1000th of the
current through the capacitors.

4.8.3.2 IGBT Drive Power Amplifier

The IGBT Power Amplifier circuit responds to off/on commands from the B+ Switching Control circuit to
supply turn on bias (P- +15VDC) or turn off bias (P- - 15VDC) to the bases of the three IGBT's. It develops its
own + 15VDC (ref P-). The + 15VDC (ref P-) is monitored by an interlock circuit which sends a "go/no go"
signal back to the B+ Switching control circuit. Q7/CR7 insure that the -15VDC (P-) is up before supplying
+15VDC (P-) to IGBT drive circuit. This prevents IGBT failure if the isolation transformer fails.

(Refer to 8-22) The B+ Switching control circuit sends its turn on/off commands to the IGBT Drive Power
Amplifier over a plastic 1mm light fiber to diode RECV #1 (J307). It transmits nonvisible light over the fiber
to the IGBT Drive Power Amplifier for a long as it wants the IGBT's on. When no light is transmitted, the
IGBT's are held off.

When diode RECV #1 (J307) is turned on, the + input to U1A is slightly negative with respect to P- (CR6
prevents + input from moving further negative with respect to P-). The output of U1A moves to negative
saturation (near P- - 15VDC), which drives the output of inverter U1B to positive saturation (near P-+15VDC).
Q3 is turned on, Q4 is turned off. Q3 on places P- +15VDC through R5, R3, and R2 to the base resistors (R1,
R2, R3) of the IGBT's. This positive voltage on the base of the IGBT's turns them on, connecting the B+/B-
capacitors across P+/P-.

When diode RECV #1 (J307) is off, U1A and U1B outputs are reversed (from that described above), Q3 is
turned off, Q4 is turned on. This places P- -15VDC through R6, R4, and R2 to the base resistors of the IGBT's.
This negative voltage on the base of the IGBT's turns them off, disconnecting the B+/B- capacitors from P+/
P-, thru L4.

Indicator D1 (GREEN) is on when Q3 is on (IGBT's on), and D2 (YELLOW) is on when Q4 is on (IGBT's


turned off). The individual on and off periods are too short to be seen, but the relative intensities of the two
indicate the relative duration of on/off time of the IGBT's.

THEORY OF OPERATION NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


4-48 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

The P - +15VDC is generated on the IGBT driver. The center tapped 36VAC secondary of the isolation
transformer is sent to BR1, whose rectified output feeds regulators Q1 (+15 ref P-) and Q2 (-15 ref P-). These
voltages are used in the IGBT Drive Power Amplifier. The regulator outputs are monitored by Q6 and Q5.
Q6 is held on by the P - +15VDC regulator output, and Q5 is kept on by the P- -15VDC regulator output. As
long as both Q5 and Q6 are kept on, current flows through the XTRM #2 LED, and light is transmitted down
the light fiber to the B+ Switching Control circuit. This light signal acts as an interlock, indicating that the P-
+ 15VDC outputs are OK. If either regulator output voltage decreases, to less than approximately 12V from P-
, the associated monitoring transistor will shut off, turning off the LED XTRM #2. The B+ Switching control is
disabled, and the IGBT CONTROL input will go to the off (no light) condition. This protects the IGBT's from
being operated with base bias voltages that are less than full on or full off.

4.8.3.3 B+ Switching Control Circuit

The B+ switching control circuit monitors the input signals listed in the table below, and outputs on/off
commands to the IGBT Drive Power Amplifier circuit to maintain a B+ potential of:

• 0V - When /SUPPLY OFF/ is low (when the Control Electronics watchdog is not running), or when
the Interlock circuit output is low.

• 175V - When the watchdog is running, but no exposure is in progress.

• AS HIGH AS 190VDC - For the first 5 msecs of an exposure, depending on the line voltage and
power request level.

RAMPDOWN towards 6V above tube voltage - From 5msecs after an exposure begins, through the end of the
exposure. Note that shorter exposures may not allow sufficient time for the B+ Switching Control to bring B+
to within 6V of tube voltage.

4.8.3.3.1 B+ Switching Control Circuit Output and Timing

(Refer to 8-22) The B+ Switching Control circuit sends IGBT ON/OFF signals to the IGBT Drive Power
Amplifier over a 1mm plastic optical fiber. LED XTRM #1 (IGBT Control) is turned on to transmit light over
the fiber (this is the "IGBT's ON" command), or turned off for no light transmission ( this is the "IGBT's OFF"
command).

The LED is turned off and on by the Q output of FF U1:

When U1's preset input goes low, the FF is SET; its Q output goes high. This turns on Q3, the IGBT
CONTROL LED, and IGBT On Indicator DS5 (YELLOW). This is the turn on command condition to
the IGBT Drive Power Amplifier circuit. Note also that each time the Q output goes high, timer U4-10
is triggered. The purpose of the timer is to insure that once the U1 FF is set, it remains in the set
condition for a minimum of 14µS, i.e., minimum IGBT on time is 14µS. When triggered, the timer Q
output goes high, and its /Q/ output goes low. The timer remains in this condition for 14µS, and
then returns to its clear state. A 1 out of the Q output of U4-10 forces OR gate U2-8 high, and a 0 out
of the /Q/ output of U4-10 forces the output of NAND gate U5-8 high. This combination effectively
blocks any lows into the clearing input of U1 FF.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL THEORY OF OPERATION


0614-134-01 08/98 4-49
®
®

When U1's clear input goes low, the FF is cleared; its Q output goes low. This turns off Q3, the IGBT
CONTROL LED, and IGBT On indicator DS5 (YELLOW). This is the turn off command condition to
the IGBT Drive Power Amplifier circuit. Note also that each time the Q output goes low, timer U4-6 is
triggered. The purpose of the timer is to insure that once the U1 FF is cleared, it remains in the clear
condition for a minimum of 50µS, i.e., minimum IGBT off time is 50µS. When triggered, the timer /
Q/ output goes low, and remains low, for 50µS. The /Q/. Output low forces the output of NAND
gate U5-6 high, effectively blocking any lows into the preset input of U1 FF.

MONITORED INPUTS TO B+ SWITCHING CONTROL

SIGNAL DESCRIPTION WHEN USED

/SUPPLY OFF/ Low when watchdog is off, Early in power up sequence, or if


or when watchdog times out. the watchdog fails.

CFIRE Neg saturation when crowbar Mus be> B-, or the IGBT "on"
is in progress. command is disabled.

INTERLOCK Light signal from IGBT P- + 15V Must always be "GO", or the
Light present is "GO" indication. IGBT "on" commnd is disabled.

/INTK/ Grounded as long as LEM module Must always be ground, or the


is plugged in. IGBT "on" command is disabled.

PBD Pass Bank Drain, the voltage During the exposure.


across the power MOSFETS. As input to U33-7, it enables
the fast ramp down circuit (U33-8)
As input to U38-7, is used as
MOSFET drain voltage.

LEM "M" signal 1/1000th current sample of During exposure.


B+ current.

CCOM The MOSFET drive signal, During exposure.


1V/5 amps of tube current.

TUBI The sumbuss. During exposure.

MAG +/- Voltage proportional to magnet When magnet is on.


current.

To Preset FF U1, causing an IGBT "on" command, the three inputs to U5-6 must all be high, driving U5-6's
output low.

The pin 5 input, as discussed in the previous topic, is low for the first 50µS of any off command.
After the 50µS, the /Q/ output of U4-6 goes back to high.

THEORY OF OPERATION NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


4-50 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

The pin 3 input is driven by the output of NAND gate U5-12 (essentially acts as an inverter). U5-12 is
driven by the output of OR gate U2-11 (via U27 and U2-8), which monitors the "INTERLOCK" signal
from IGBT Drive Power Amplifier P- + 15VDC circuit, and B- interlocked through the LEM module.
If the LEM is plugged in, and the P-+ 15VDC circuit in the IGBT Drive Power Amplifier circuit is OK,
the output of U2-11 will be low, INTERLOCK indicator DS3 will be on, and the output of U5-12 will
be high. U27 forces any shut down to be of at least 1 second in duration . Note that the U5-12 output
also goes to the reset input of timer U16. U16 generates the zero crossing signal which is sent back to
the Control Electronics. The three phase power supply does not actually detect zero crossings, but
because the Control Electronics was designed to expect the zero crossing signal, this circuit is neces-
sary . When the U5-12 output goes low, the timer reset input is held low, which disables the timer. To
the Control Electronics, this looks like a "NO ZERO CROSSINGS" error, and that is what is reported
at the front panel, actually, for the three phase systems, the no zero crossings error indicates that the
LEM module is not connected, or the IGBT Drive Power Amplifier P-+15VDC circuit has opened the
INTERLOCK line.

The pin 4 input is controlled by four separate circuits, any one of which can drive the input low, to
disable IGBT on commands. Only when all four circuit outputs are high can the pin 4 input be high:

U10 is the GATE DRIVE DOWN POWER DOWN PROTECTION circuit. It drives the pin 4
input low if B- +12VDC supply begins to drop. This protects the IGBT's during power down
conditions.

U35 drives the pin 4 input low when the Control Electronics asserts /SUPPLY OFF/. This
occurs when the watchdog is off or timed out.

U25-14 is the 175/190V B+ LIMITER circuit. It drives the pin 4 input low when B+ exceeds
approximately 190 volts during an exposure, or 175 volts at any other time. U33-1 provides a
1/20th inverted sample of B+ to the + input of U25-14. U25-14 compares the B+ sample with
a negative reference voltage in on its - input. The reference voltage on the negative input to
U25-14 is set at one level when the tube is off, and at another level when the tube is on. The
reference voltage is controlled by U19-2:

The CCOM signal on the positive input to U19-2 is the "current command" signal
sent to the MOSFETs to control tube current/light power. The voltage is - 1.5V (B-
ref) for a 5 amp (minimum) current, and moves more negative to increase current.
The negative input to U19-2 is held at approximately -1VDC (B-ref). The current
command signal will always be AT LEAST -1.5VDC (B- ref) throughout an exposure,
thus, the output of U19-2 is at negative saturation as long as a current command
signal is present (i.e., throughout any exposure), and open (pulled up by B-+ 12VDC
through R97/R98) at all other times. The U19-2 output goes to the positive input of
U19-13. U19-2's output drives U19-13's output to negative saturation when CCOM
is active (negative with respect to U19 pin 4), and open at all other times. The result
of U19-2's output is that the reference voltage at the negative input of U25-14 moves
MORE NEGATIVE when CCOM is active.

Whenever the positive input to U25-14 moves more negative than the negative input (refer-
ence), the output of U25-14 goes to negative saturation, driving the pin 4 input to U5-6 low,
and preventing any further turns ons of the IGBT's. It also goes to U2-8 forcing its output
low as soon as the 14µS min on time FF Q output goes low, clearing the U1 F to turn off the
IGBT's. The U25-14 op amp circuit has hysteresis built into it, so that its output does not go
back to the open condition until the B+ voltage falls somewhat below the original trip point
.The reference voltage at U25-14's pin 8 (negative) input determines the trip point; during an
exposure, it is approximately 190V (B- ref), and at all other times it is approximately 175V (ref
B-).
NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL THEORY OF OPERATION
0614-134-01 08/98 4-51
®
®

U19-1 disables any further IGBT turn ons during a crowbar . When a crowbar occurs, the
CFIRE signal moves from positive (B- ref) to negative (B- ref), which drives the output of
U19-1 to negative saturation, and the pin 4 input to U5-6 low, disabling turn on of the IGBT's
for as long as the crowbar signal remains active. It also goes to U2-8 forcing its output low
as soon as the 14µS min on time FF Q output goes low, clearing the U1 F to turn off the
IGBT's.

To clear FF U1, causing an IGBT off command, U1 pin 13 must be driven low. The pin 13 input can be driven
low by OR gate U2-8 (if its pin 9 and 10 inputs are both low), or by NAND gate U5-8 (if all its inputs are
high).

U2-8 provides a path for the GATE DRIVE POWER DOWN PROTECTION circuit and the RESET
circuit (/SUPPLY OFF/ and crowbar CFIRE) to clear the FF U1 when the B-+ 12VDC supply voltage
begins to drop. U10 output drops low when it senses the fault condition, /SUPPLY OFF/ goes low,
or a crowbar occurs. The pin 10 input to the OR gate is high for the first 14µS. of each turn on period,
and then drops back low. The pin 10 input insures that the turn off signal from U10 does not turn off
the IGBT's for the first 14µS. of any "IGBT on" period. Note that for normal operations, the U2-8
output remains high, and has no effect on the /CLR/ input to FF U1.

U5-8 is the path for normal operational control of the /CLR/ input of FF U1. Note that its pin 11
input is the /Q/ output of U4-10, which is low for the first 14µS. of any preset to FF U1. This pin 11
input to U5-8 forces the output of U5-8 high for the first 14µS. of an IGBT on command. Once FF U1 is
set, 14µS later, U5-8 input pins 9 and 10 (which are tied together) gain control of the /CLR/ input of
U1. Pins 9 and 10 are controlled by the output of comparator U34-1. When U34-1 output is high, the
/CLR/ output will drive low, clearing the FF to turn off the IGBT's. Once the IGBT's are turned on,
they will remain on for 14µS, and then turn off as soon after that as the output of comparator U34-1
goes high. The inputs to U34-1 are:

POSITIVE INPUT - A voltage which is proportional to the charging current through the B+/
B- Capacitors. It is 1 volt per 5 amps of sensed current. The voltage is developed by the
current the LEM module drives through R159. The LEM outputs a current on its "M" output
1/1000th of the charging capacitor's current. When the IGBT's are on, the charging current
through the capacitors increases, and the voltage at the U34 positive input increases. When
the IGBT's are off, the charging current through the capacitors decreases, and the voltage at
U34 positive input decreases. The voltage signal is essentially a nonsymetric sawtooth. The
voltage ramps up steeply when the IGBT's turn on, and falls when the IGBT's are off,

NEGATIVE INPUT - This voltage is the output of CURRENT COMMAND SUM-


MING AMP U33-14. The inverting summing amplifier output is the sum of the
following five inputs:

IDLE CURRENT SETTING, B- -12VDC through R190. This input develops the base
line input to the summing amplifier. When the tube and magnet are off, it controls
the output of the summing amplifier. The result is a positive voltage out of the
summing amp (the summing amp also inverts) of about .3 volts.

TUBI through R186. TUBI is a sample of the tube current. It is 0 volts when the tube
is off, and -.2V/A of tube current when the tube is on. Note that the resistance value
of R186 is approximately the same as the R192 resistor in the summing amplifier
circuit, thus, the gain for this input to the summing amplifier is approximately 1.
When the tube is running at 5 amps, the TUBI voltage is -1 volt (B- ref), and it con-
tributes 1 volt to the output of the summing amp. Note that the summing amp also
inverts, so the output of the summing amp is positive.

THEORY OF OPERATION NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


4-52 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

MAGNET CURRENT FEEDBACK through R181. It develops -.2V/A of magnet


current. The magnet draws approximately 4 amps of current when it is on. This
results is an increase of the summing amplifiers output by approximately .8 volts
(note that R181 is the same value as R192, resulting in a gain of 1 for this input).

B+ DIFFERENTIATOR through R180 provides a small amount of negative feedback


to the circuit. As B+ moves up, a positive voltage is developed, and as B+ moves
down, a negative voltage is developed.

RAMP BACK GENERATION through R191. This circuit operates to ramp down the
B+ voltage towards 6 volts above tube voltage from 5 msecs into the exposure,
through the end of the exposure:

• Before an exposure, U19-2's CCOM positive input is at B- (there is no


current command). U19-2's negative input is at -1V (ref B-), so the pin 2
output opens. The B- + 12VDC is applied through R97 to the negative input
of U25-1. U25-1 goes to negative saturation, which forces the two speed
integrator output positive. Note that D24 limits the positive voltage out to a
max of .2 to .3 volts. U38-1 inverts the positive output of U25-1, placing
approximately -.2 volts (B- ref) on T35. The negative voltage is summed with
the Idle Current Setting circuit output to establish the idle voltage out of the
summing amp. For this condition, the circuit is not ramping back the B+
voltage.

• At the beginning of an exposure, The CCOM (current command) input to


U19-2 moves to a negative voltage slightly more negative than U19-2's
negative input. The output of U19-2 goes to negative saturation, triggering
timer U27. U27 outputs a 5msec B- +12 volt pulse on its Q output. This holds
the U25-1 output at negative saturation, just as it was before the CCOM
signal went negative. Thus, for the first 5 msecs of every exposure, the
RAMP BACK circuit is kept in its off, or idle, condition, just as described
above.

• 5 msecs into an exposure, the timer U27 times out, and its Q output goes
low. U25-1's output opens, enabling the two speed integrator PBD input
through R8. Because the PBD voltage is typically well above 6 volts at this
point, D21 is forward biased, and current is drawn out of the integrator
positive input, and the integrator output goes negative. U38-1 inverts the
negative output of U38-7, resulting in a positive voltage into R191. The gain
of this input leg to the summing amplifier is approximately .40, so a +1volt
out of U38-7 results in about a .40 volt decrease in the output of the inverting
summing amplifier. The circuit, in this condition, acts to shorten the "on
time" period of the IGBT's, moving the B+ voltage down. When the PBD
voltage lowers to 6 volts above B-, the R8/ D21/R110 network on the
positive input of U38-7 reaches a balance, and the integrator output stabi-
lizes.

• U33-7, U25-13, and U33-8 are used to drive the two speed integrator harder
when the PBD voltage is above 15 volts. U33-7 outputs a 1/20th inverted
sample of PBD to U25-13 negative input. When PBD is above 15 volts, U33-
7's output is sufficiently negative to open U25-13's output. This places B- +12
volts on the positive input of U33-8, driving its output to positive saturation.
The positive voltage adds to the PBD voltage at the left of R8, causing the
two speed integrator to "ramp down" the B+ voltage faster.
NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL THEORY OF OPERATION
0614-134-01 08/98 4-53
®
®

The net result of all these signals at the negative and positive inputs of U34-1 is that U34 acts as a comparator,
its positive input ramps up when the IGBT's are on, eventually increasing to a more positive voltage than that
on U34-1's negative input. As soon as this happens, the comparators output goes positive, which will cause a
clear at the U1 FF (turning off the IGBT's). Thus, the higher the positive voltage out of the inverting summing
amplifier U33-14, the longer the IGBT's are left on.

4.8.3.4 Light Command Circuit

The Light Command circuit outputs a LIGHT COMMAND voltage to control the conduction of the passbank
MOSFETS, so that power delivered matches power requested. The TUBE POWER REQUEST signal voltage
from the Control Electronics is an analog voltage representing the level of power requested: 2.5VDC (grnd
ref)/watt of requested power. The power photocell circuit is calibrated to output 2.5VDC (grnd ref)/watt of
delivered power. The light command circuit drives the LIGHT COMMAND voltage up or down to make the
POWER PHOTOCELL (actual power) signal equal to the TUBE POWER REQUEST (requested power)
voltage. The light command voltage goes more positive for more current, and less positive for less current.

Note that the TUBE POWER REQUEST signal is actually:

(2.5VDC/watt displayed at front panel) delivery system factor = TUBE VOLTAGE REQUEST SIG-
NAL

The "delivery system factor" is determined by the smart fiber resistance measured by the NOVUS
2000 at the end of the fiber. The software reads the smart fiber resistance, and uses the voltage to
determine the type of delivery system attached. Each valid delivery system type has a "delivery
system factor", kept in a software table. The "delivery system factor" indicates the typical % of
transmission for that delivery system. The NOVUS 2000 uses this factor to determine how much
power to actually request, so that power out of the delivery system will be that power selected at the
front panel. For example, for a slit lamp, the delivery system loss is considered to be 15%, so, if 1 watt
is selected at the front panel, and the smart fiber resistance indicates that a slit lamp is connected, the
NOVUS 2000 TUBE POWER REQUEST signal will be 2.5V (1)(1/.85)= 2.925V, which is a request for
approximately 1.17 watts measured at the photocell.

(Refer to 8-23) The output of U3-8 is the current command (CC) which is sent to the passbank drive
circuit, it varies from 1 to 7 Volts for a request of 5 to 35 amps of tube current. Before an exposure
begins, the integrator U3-8 output is held at approximately 1.5VDC (gnd ref) by the output of voltage
follower U3-14. U3-14’s output is connected to integrator U3-8’s pin 9 input via electronic switch U9
pins 14 to 15. The switch is energized by a high out of U13-3, which has a high in on its pin 2 input
(EXPOSURE TIMER IS low, output of U31-13 is open).

The exposure sequence begins with the pressing of the footswitch, or, when the control electronics
uses the /SAFETY MONITOR EXPOSURE TEST/ signal to simulate pressing the footswitch during
its power up checks. In either case, the result is that an electronic switch inside U23 closes. If the
footswitch is not depressed, and the SAFETY MONITOR EXPOSURE TEST signal is high, the light
command circuit is not connected to the CURRENT COMMAND line.

After the footswitch is depressed, the Control Electronics will wait until the delivery system eye
safety filter is pulled into place (if required for the attached delivery system), and then, at the next
(simulated) zero crossing, set the EXPOSURE TIMER signal high, and the TUBE POWER REQUEST
signal to the analog voltage corresponding to the power dialed in on the front panel.

THEORY OF OPERATION NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


4-54 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

The EXPOSURE TIMER high goes to U9 pin 9 to close an electronic switch which connects the light command
voltage to the MOSFET drive circuitry. The EXPOSURE TIMER high also goes to U31-13 negative input,
forcing the output of U31-13 low. The low turns on indicator DS7, which will remain on as long as EXPO-
SURE TIMER remains low. The low out of U31-13 is also sent to U14’s /B/ input, and to the pin 2 input of OR
gate U13-3. U14 will drive its pin 6 output high for 1 millisecond, after the high to low transition on its /B/
input. Once both OR gate U13-3 inputs are low, the electronic switch U9 pins 14 to 15 open, disconnecting the
voltage follower U3-14 output from the integrator U3-8 negative input. Note that for the first millisecond of
any exposure, the light command signal will be 1 volt, which translates to about 5 amps of tube current. This
first millisecond is used to allow the tube and feedback circuits to stabilize after tube start up, before at-
tempting to ramp up to the requested power level.

As indicated above, 1 millisecond after EXPOSURE TIMER goes high, the U3-14 output is disconnected from
the light control integrator U3-8. The output of the integrator U3-8 is now controlled by the TUBE POWER
REQUEST and POWER PHOTOCELL signals. The relative voltage between the two signals determines the
voltage at the common point between R47 and R25, which is also the negative input to light control integra-
tor U3-8. When the POWER PHOTOCELL signal is less than the TUBE POWER REQUEST signal, the current
will be negative, and the integrator will respond by increasing its output voltage, increasing current through
the passbank. If the POWER PHOTOCELL signal is greater than the TUBE POWER REQUEST, the current
will be positive, and the integrator will respond by decreasing its output voltage, decreasing current through
the passbank.

From 1 msec into the exposure, until POWER PHOTOCELL reaches 80% of TUBE POWER REQUEST, the
output of integrator U3-8 is influenced by the -15VDC (gnd ref) via R51 and U9 contacts 6/7. The switch U9
contacts 6/7 are closed by the EXPOSURE TIMER signal low to high transition as the exposure begins, which
clocks U12. U12’s Q output goes high to turn on the switch. The negative voltage to light control integrator
U3-8 causes its output to move more positive, requesting more current through the passbank. As light out of
the tube increases, the POWER PHOTOCELL signal will increase. When the POWER PHOTOCELL voltage
reaches 80% of the TUBE POWER REQUEST voltage, the junction of R24 and R48 will go positive, driving the
output of U22-1 low. The low out of U22-1 resets the U12 flip flop, de-energizing electronic switch U9 pins 6
to 7. The time period required to take the tube from the 5 amps to 80% requested power should be less than 3
milliseconds.

U3-1 is an emitter follower used to send the TUBE POWER REQUEST signal back to the Control Electronics,
where it is used to check that the TUBE POWER REQUEST signal made it to the laser power supply light
control circuit.

SW1 is used to place the system in current control, while in service mode. The current control potentiometer
is adjusted by the service technician to set the voltage of the current command to the passbank. Contacts C2
to NO. 2 of the switch turn off U6 contacts 2/3, which opens the ECHO TUBE POWER output of U1-1. The
Control Electronics senses that the laser power supply is in current control when it sees no return voltage on
the ECHO TUBE POWER line.

4.8.3.5 MOSFET Drive Circuit, and MOSFET's

(Refer to 8-25) The MOSFET drive circuit converts the ground referenced CC (current command signal) to B-
reference, inverts it, and sends the signal to the four integrators which control the gate voltage to the
MOSFET's. The MOSFET conduction determines the current through the tube.

The current command signal (1 to 7 VDC for 5 to 35 amps of tube current) is applied to the pin 17 input of U8.
U8 inverts the current command voltage and converts it to a B- reference out on pin 1 (T24). The voltage is
sent through R78 to the negative inputs of each MOSFET drive integrator (U6, U11, U17, U26) via 20K resis-
tors R41, R68, R94, and R118. The voltage at T23 is -.625V (B- ref)/5A of requested tube current.
NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL THEORY OF OPERATION
0614-134-01 08/98 4-55
®
®

A 5 amp command results in -.625 volts at the top of R41. Integrator U6 moves its output voltage in response
to the current command, via R42 and a .05A fuse, to the gate of MOSFET G1. The integrator attempts to drive
the MOSFET so that the output voltage of FET1 ISENSE AMP outputs .625 volts (ref to B-), which via R38,
will balance out the -.625 volts at the top of R41. Note that a .625 voltage out of the ISENSE AMP corresponds
to a current through the MOSFET of 1.25 amps, which is 1/4th of the requested 5 amp current. The other 3
MOSFET circuit do the same, resulting in a total current of 5 amps.

The POWER MOSFET POWER LIMIT CONTROL circuit monitors the passbank drain voltage (PBD) and the
current command signal. If the current and voltage exceed the power limitations of the MOSFETS, U7-1
outputs a positive voltage to move the current command signal less negative.

4.8.3.6 Tube Start Circuit

(Refer to 8-23) The tube start circuit provides a high voltage pulse to the tube anode sufficient to start the
tube. The circuit is controlled by the /START/ signal from the Control Electronics.

The /START/ signal is applied to the positive input of U31-14. The Control Electronics pulses the /
START/ signal low for 40µS. The output of U31-14 goes low, and is sent to the positive input of comparator
U22-14, via voltage divider R108/R109, resulting in approximately -1 volt. The comparators negative input
is the CC (current command signal). In order for the comparator output to go low, a current command signal
of at least 1 volt must be present. U29 on triggers TIMER U24, which will output a positive pulse (220µS) to
Q1, and DS2. Q1 on provides a discharge path for C2 through the starter transformer. As C2 is discharged, a
large DC voltage is induced in the secondary, and is felt on the tube anode. This ionizes the tube.

4.8.3.7 Magnet Control Circuit

(Refer to 8-23) The magnet control circuit turns on the magnet when the /MAGNET/ signal from the Control
Electronics goes to its active (low) state.

The Control Electronics sets the /MAGNET/ signal high three zero crossings prior to starting the tube. The
high drives the output of U31-1 low, turning off the opto-isolator U30. U30 off results in a high (inverted
twice) in on the gate of Q2. Q2 turns on, indicator DS1 turns on , and current flows through the magnet. R179
develops a voltage proportional to the magnet current, and sends it to the B+ switching control circuit.

4.8.3.8 Crowbar Circuit

(Refer to 8-23) The crowbar circuit provides a very fast means of shutting down the tube when certain fault
conditions are detected. The crowbar can be activated by the Control Electronics, Safety Monitor, or passbank
thermostat. When activated, the crowbar disables IGBT turn on, drives the passbank control voltage positive
(disabling the MOSFET integrators), places a negative (turn off) voltage directly on the MOSFET gates,
triggers on an SCR which provides a shunt path for current around the tube, and turns on indicator DS4.

THEORY OF OPERATION NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


4-56 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

The Control Electronics or Safety Monitor crowbar the power supply by driving the /SHUTDOWN/ input to
U13-6 low. The passbank thermostat closes to crowbar the power supply when cold plate temperature is
excessive. In either case, the result is a low to the base of Q5, which turns on, turning on opto-isolator U36.
U36 on causes:

U7-14 output goes to positive saturation, placing a positive voltage (B- ref) on the PASSBANK
CONTROL line, blocking the negative CCOM (current command ) signal from the MOSFET INTE-
GRATORS.

CFIRE goes negative. CFIRE is the positive input to U19-7, in the B+ Switching Control. The output of
U19-7 goes to negative saturation, disabling the preset inputs to FF U1. The IGBT's can not be turned
on until the crowbar goes away.

U19-14 output opens, turning on Q4 and triggering timer U28. The timer outputs a 10mS high (B- is
high, in this case). The timer insures that Q4 remains on for at least 10mS even if the signal that
initiated the crowbar goes away sooner. Q4 on:

• Discharges C11 through the crowbar transformer, which triggers SCR1, providing a shunt
path for current flow around the tube.

• Turns on indicator DS4.

• Connects B--12VDC directly to the MOSFET gates.

During the power up initialization and self tests, before the first actual firing of the laser, the Control Elec-
tronics tests the crowbar circuit by driving /CROWBAR/ low. This fires SCR1, sending a pulse through C10
to the CROWBAR SENSE line. The sense line runs to base of Q6 on the regulator board, turning it on briefly.
This trigger U37, which outputs a 10mS low on the /CROWBAR OK/ line. This is sent back to the Control
Electronics as an indication that the crowbar circuit responded to the crowbar command.

4.8.3.9 IGBT Overcurrent Trip Protection

(Refer to 8-22, 8-27) If the IGBT's are left on for too long, current through the B+/B- charging loop will rise
very quickly, to a level which can damage the IGBT's, and downstream B- parts.. While the IGBT's are on, the
polarity across Main Switching Inductor L4 is as shown on the schematic. C1 charges through R2. Diac CR3 is
in parallel with C1. If the voltage across the Diac reaches 32V, the diac will conduct, turning on U1. This is the
fault detected condition. R3 and CR1 provide a discharge path for C1 during IGBT off time. R4 is placed in
the circuit by switch SW1 to test the over current trip; it shortens the charge time of C1, causing a trip to occur
even when an overcurrent condition does not exist.

U1 on triggers timer U3, which outputs a 1 second 12V pulse to K1. K1 energizes, opening the 24VAC loop to
the main contactor coil. This shuts off the NOVUS 2000. Note that the 12VDC supply voltage (floating
ground) is developed from the secondary of the main contactor transformer.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL THEORY OF OPERATION


0614-134-01 08/98 4-57
®
®

4.8.3.10 Capacitor Charge Indicator Circuit

(Refer to 8-23) The capacitor charge indicator circuit provides a visual indication of the relative charge on the
B+/B- capacitors. The higher the charge, the faster it flashes. Even when there is no charge present between
B+/B-, the B+ side of the capacitors is directly connected to P+, and can be a very high voltage with respect to
ground. The P- capacitors discharge time after power is removed from the system is approximately 2 min-
utes. Always use extreme caution when working in this area.

4.8.3.11 B+ Overvoltage Protection Circuit

(Refer to 8-23) The B+ overvoltage protection circuit monitors B+, and trips the main contactor, via the
Control Electronics PCB, if B+ reaches 225 Volts. U10 output goes low to turn on opto-isolator U10, which
sends a ground to the Control Electronics contactor trip circuit.

4.9 SOFTWARE

The NOVUS 2000 software includes the software instructions stored in the Control Electronics EPROM, and
the software instructions stored in the Display EPROM. Software updates (revisions) can be made to the
NOVUS 2000 by replacing the EPROMs. A brief description of the Display software is included in the Display
topic. The operation of the Control Electronics software is provided in the following subtopic.

4.9.1 Control Electronics Software

Note that units sold with TUV approval will have a software EPROM which does not include the service and
diagnostic routines.

Following is a brief discussion of each of the main routines in the software:

POWER UP INITIALIZATION AND SELF TESTS - After the main contactor closes, or following a master
reset of the microprocessor, the power up initialization and self test software runs. It initializes memory,
TIMER

I/O's, and the UART; does a series of internal self tests; sets up the HeNe polarizer; waits for cathode warm-
up, and then conducts a series of self tests which include firing the laser (safety shutter closed). If all the self
tests pass, the laser moves on to the main loop.

MAIN LOOP - After successful completion of the power up initialization and self tests, the main loop begins
to run. The main loop cycles continuously, checking for fault conditions (exit to fault handler), footswitch
depression (exit to start exposure loop), diagnostics requests ( exit to diagnostics), timebase interrupts (exit to
timebase interrupt sequence), or communications requests (exit to communication sequence). After any one of
these called routines complete, the main loop is re-entered, and begins running again.

THEORY OF OPERATION NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


4-58 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

EXPOSURE START SEQUENCE - The exposure start sequence is entered from the main loop, when the
laser is in READY, no errors are active, and a footswitch depression is detected. This sequence pulls in the eye
safety filter if required by the attached delivery system), then supervises the power supply ramp up, tube
start, and beginning of the exposure. Once the tube is started, and the exposure is in progress, the exposure
sequence loop is entered.

TURN ON
SOFTWARE BLOCK DIAGRAM

POWER UP
INIT & EXPOSURE
SELF TESTS START
SEQUENCE

MAIN LOOP EXPOSURE END


SEQUENCE EXPOSURE
LOOP

COMMUNICATION TIMEBASE
FAULT
SEQUENCE INTERRUPT DIAGNOSTICS
HANDLER
SEQUENCE

EXPOSURE SEQUENCE LOOP - Once the exposure is successfully started, the exposure loop sequence is
entered. It cycles until the footswitch is released, the exposure times out, or a fault is detected. It continuously
checks for errors from the safety monitor, compares requested power to power photocell power, and checks
remote interlock, green filter, eye safety filter, delivery system voltage, coolant flow, slit lamp beam block, +/-
15VDC, and coolant temperature.

END EXPOSURE - Whenever an exposure ends, the end exposure sequence is run to turn off the exposure
timers, zero the DAC's, turn off the magnet, and remove the safety filter (if necessary), etc..

FAULT HANDLER - Whenever any error is detected, the error handler is called. The error handler deter-
mines what action should result from an error. Some errors will disable the system, and others are clearable
from the front panel, or clear themselves when the fault condition goes away.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL THEORY OF OPERATION


0614-134-01 08/98 4-59
®
®

COMMUNICATION SEQUENCE - The communication sequence is called from the main loop. It supervises
the communication between the Control Electronics and display, via the DUART.

TIMEBASE INTERRUPT SEQUENCE - Timebase interrupts occur at 5 millisecond intervals, during normal
operations. The timebase interrupt sequence services the watchdog timer and updates several software
counters used to time various events.

DIAGNOSTICS - Diagnostics can be run on the NOVUS 200 from a terminal connected to the remote RS-232
port. The diagnostics capability is covered in section 5.

4.10 OPTICS SUBSYSTEM

4.10.1 Photo-Sensor Board

The photo-sensor board generates the POWER PHOTOCELL, SAFETY PHOTOCELL, and /AIMING ON/
signals. +/- 15VDC (gnd ref) is sent to the board from the Control Electronics. This +/- 15VDC is used for the
op amp circuits on the board, and is also sent back to the Control Electronics, where it is used as input for the
+/- 15VDC checks.

There are two versions of this board. The original version (0612-904-01) is no longer in production, but can
still be found in many older units. The newer version of the board (0614-420-01) is essentially similar, but
makes use of the GREEN IN signal from a slotted optical switch operated by the position of the GREEN
ONLY solenoid to provide a different gain setting to the power and safety photocell circuits between GREEN
ONLY and ALL LINES operation. This is necessary due to the different transmission characteristics of the
green wavelength and all lines wavelengths, through the wedge which provides a sample of light to the
photocells.

4.10.1.1Photo-Sensor Board, Dual Channel (0612-904-01)

(Refer to 8-12) U1-1 outputs a DC voltage proportional to the light energy striking the power photocell. R1 is
adjusted so that the U2 output is 2.5VDC (gnd ref)/watt of delivered power.

U2-1 outputs a DC voltage proportional to the light energy striking the safety photocell. R4 is adjusted so that
the U2 output is 2.5VDC (gnd ref)/watt of delivered power.

U2-14 outputs a negative DC voltage proportional to the light energy striking the safety photocell. It is useful
in the range of light energy provided by the HeNe beam. An aiming beam of 10 microwatts results in an
output of approximately -.11VDC (gnd ref) at TP4. As HeNe power increases to maximum, the voltage at
TP4 moves more negative, typically in the 300mV range.

THEORY OF OPERATION NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


4-60 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

4.10.1.2 Photo-Sensor PCB, 2-Channel, 2 Gain

(Refer to 8-15) This board is essentially the same as the older PCB, with the additional capability of provid-
ing for separate gain adjustments between GREEN ONLY and ALL LINES. The GREEN IN signal is high
when in green only, which de-energizes the two switch contacts in U3. This places R3 and R4 in the gain loop
of the amplifiers. When GREEN IN is low, the switches are closed, bypassing R3 and R4.

4.10.2 HeNe Tube and Polarizer

The HeNe tube is mounted on the optics plate. The HeNe power supply is bolted to the underside of the
optics plate. The power supply operates off of 12VDC (grnd ref) from the control electronics board. The
control electronics sends the /HENE ENABLE/ signal to the HeNe power supply to turn the HeNe on. The
HeNe is turned on early in the power up initialization and self test sequence, and remains on thereafter.

The HeNe intensity is adjustable, in increments, from “just visible” to a maximum of a little less than 1 mW.
Intensity is set by a stepper motor which turns a polarizing wheel through 90 degrees. Each front panel knob
click turns the wheel 4.5 degrees, 20 clicks from minimum to maximum.

During the power up initialization and self test sequence, the software turns the wheel to locate the minimum
power point, and then sets the wheel at that point. If at least -.11VDC (gnd ref) cannot be obtained from the /
AIMING ON/ signal, the software assumes the HeNe is not present, and reports an E207 error.

The stepper motor is operated by U74, on the Control Electronics PCB. The software sends direction informa-
tion to U74 out of TIMER-I/O U30 pin 12. The software sends pulses to U74 out of TIMER-I/O U30 pin 13.
Each pulse moves the wheel 4.5 degrees. The pulses occur at 200 pulses/second, as needed, to position the
wheel.

4.10.3 Green Only Solenoid

The green only solenoid energizes to place a blue filter in the argon beam path. The filter removes most of the
blue light, resulting in a green only beam out of the system.

(Refer to 8-5) The software sets /GRN DRV/ low, out of TIMER-I/O U31 to energize the green only solenoid.
(Refer to 8-13) The /GRN DRV/ low is inverted by U63C to turn on Q2. Q2 provides a ground return path for
the solenoid, which has 12VDC (grnd ref) on its other side. The solenoid energizes, pulling the blue filter into
the beam path. In green only, the power is selected, in increments, from 50 mwatts to 1000 mwatts.

Blue filter position is sensed by two separate slotted optical switches mounted on a small PCB next to the blue
filter. One is the GREEN IN detector, and one is the GREEN OUT detector. The detectors run off of 5VDC
(grnd ref) supplied by the control electronics.

The GREEN IN detector outputs a low when the blue filter is out of the beam path, or a high when the filter is
in the beam path. The GREEN OUT detector provides the opposite. The detector outputs are sent to the
control electronics TIMER-I/O U31, pins 8 and 9.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL THEORY OF OPERATION


0614-134-01 08/98 4-61
®
®

4.10.3 Safety Shutter

The safety shutter solenoid energizes to pull the safety shutter out of the beam path. The shutter, when in the
beam path, blocks any laser light (HeNe or Argon) from entering the optical fiber.

(Refer to 8-5) The software enables the safety shutter solenoid supply voltage by outputting a low on TIMER-
I/O U31’s pin 26 (/SS DRIVE/). (Refer to 8-6) The low is sent to U63D, where it is inverted to turn on Q3. Q3
is in the ground return path (SAFETY SHUTTER DRIVE) for the safety shutter solenoid. The 12VDC (grnd
ref) and SAFETY SHUTTER DRIVE lines leave the Control Electronics and go to the Safety Monitor board.
(Refer to 8-9) At the Safety Monitor PCB the SAFETY SHUTTER DRIVE line passes through Q1, which is
turned off or on by the signal /SM SHUTTER DROP/. The safety monitor can open the SAFETY SHUTTER
DRIVE line to drop the safety shutter into the beam path in response to various error conditions. The 12VDC
(gnd ref) and SAFETY SHUTTER DRIVE lines leave the Safety Monitor board and go to the solenoid.

Safety shutter position is sensed by two separate photo-detectors. The detectors operate off of 5VDC (grnd
ref) supplied by the control electronics PCB. The SAFETY SHUTTER OPEN photo-detector returns a high
when the safety shutter is pulled out of the beam path, and a low when the safety shutter is blocking the
beam path. The SAFETY SHUTTER CLOSED photo-detector returns the opposite. The photo-detector
outputs are sent to the safety monitor board. (Refer to 8-9) The photodetector outputs enter the safety moni-
tor board at J54-3 and 4. The signals are used on the safety monitor board, in the SS OPEN, > MIN & FSW
INACTIVE fault detection circuit, and is also routed on to the control electronics, out on J52-10 and 11. (Refer
to 8-7) The signals enter the control electronics at J13-10 and 11. The signals go through amplifiers (U64C, D)
and on to (refer to 8-6) TIMER-I/O U31, pins 30 and 31.

(Refer to 8-6) During laser firing self tests, the software uses the /SM TEST/ output of TIMER-I/O U29, pin
13, to simulate the depressing of the footswitch. The /SM TEST/ signal is interlocked through a microswitch
which is closed by the safety shutter, when the shutter is in, blocking the beam. This insures that the safety
shutter is in during the self test laser firings.

THEORY OF OPERATION NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


4-62 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

5.0 TROUBLESHOOTING

5.1 OVERVIEW

5.1.1 Service Philosophy

The NOVUS is designed to require very little service technician adjustment/calibration, and to detect and
report most hardware malfunctions by error code, via the front panel display.

Calibration is limited to the adjustment of four potentiometers ( older systems have only two) which set the
output of the power and safety photocells. Other than potentiometers for speaker volume current control,
current control, and within the vendor supplied DC power supplies, these are the only adjustment potenti-
ometers in the NOVUS.

After power up, and before allowing the NOVUS to move to its STANDBY condition, the NOVUS software
performs an extensive series of system self tests. Self test failures result in an error code (or codes, if multiple
tests fail) displayed on the NOVUS front panel power display. Most hardware failures will be detected at this
time.

During normal operation, the software continues to monitor for system malfunctions, and to report any
detected malfunctions via error codes displayed on the front panel. A few detected malfunctions are serious
enough to cause a main contactor trip. Such malfunctions obviously can not be displayed by error code, as
the system is shutdown immediately after the fault is detected.

Error codes provide the service technician with an indication of what malfunction was detected, which
should point to a specific area of the system for further investigation. Explanations of the error codes are
included in this chapter, along with likely causes of the error.

A service mode is selected by a switch located on the Control Electronics PCB. TUV approved units do not
have the service software in the same EPROM as the user software. The service engineer must replace the
user EPROM with an EPROM which contains the service routines. In service mode, a wider range of deliv-
ered power is available, coolant temperature is displayed at the front panel, and many system errors which
would disable the laser system are bypassed.

In service mode, a “current control” mode of operation is selectable by the service technician, through a
switch on the laser power supply regulator board. When in current mode, “CURR” is displayed in the front
panel power display, the +/- 15VDC power supply check is bypassed (this allows a connector on the photo-
detector board to be disconnected, enabling the technician to adjust the wedge, so that the beam samples
strike the two photo-detectors), and a knob on the regulator board can be adjusted to set the level of current
through the tube during an exposure.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING


0614-134-01 08/98 5-1
®
®

A diagnostic mode of operation has been included in the NOVUS software. TUV approved units do not have
the diagnostic software in the same EPROM as the user software. The service engineer must replace the user
EPROM with an EPROM which contains the diagnostic routines. To use the diagnostic mode, an external
keyboard/display is connected to an RS-232 port on the Control Electronics board, and a switch on the
Control Electronics PCB is placed in its closed position. Commands can then be transmitted to the Control
Electronics 68000 microprocessor through the keyboard, and response messages sent from the NOVUS can be
seen on the terminal display.

Finally, it must be recognized that some hardware malfunctions will interfere with the error reporting
capability. If the system will not power up, the circuitry which reports errors isn’t going to be of much help.
Proper error reporting requires, at a minimum, that the Control Electronics 68000 microprocessor be capable
of running the software instructions stored in its associated ROM, communicate with the display
microcontroller, and that the display microcontroller be capable of driving the power indicator LED’s, where
the error codes are reported.

5.1.2 Level Of Field Repair

The NOVUS uses microprocessors on the Control Electronics and Display PCBs. It is often not possible to
isolate problems to a particular component on these boards without sophisticated test equipment, and plenty
of time. The Control Electronics board is a three layer board, and very few of its IC’s are socketed. Replace-
ment of most soldered components on the Control Electronics board is not recommended in the field.

Safety Monitor and Power Regulator PCB failures can often be isolated to a particular component, or group of
components. Only a few of the IC’s on these boards are socketed, so soldering will often be necessary if
component level repairs are to be done.

The field service technician should use his/her discretion, and the advice of technical support/regional
managers to decide if component level replacement, or board replacement, is appropriate for a particular
service call.

5.1.3 Safety Precautions

The following safety precautions are to be observed in addition to the general safety precautions which
always apply to those working with electrical/electronic equipment, and laser systems:

Never use an oscilloscope to observe signals on the NOVUS unless the oscilloscope is isolated from
the neutral line at the outlet the oscilloscope is plugged into. Use a 3 prong to 2 prong adaptor
between the plug on the end of the oscilloscope power cord and the power outlet.

Most circuits in the laser power supply are referenced to B-, not digital/analog/earth ground. When
the oscilloscope is used to observe these signals the probe ground plug should be connected to B-.
The probe ground line is connected to the oscilloscope's power cord ground line, so, if the ground
line of the power cord is not isolated, a current path from B- (as much as 90 Volts below earth
ground) directly to earth ground will be established. This is an extremely dangerous condition,
which will almost certainly result in serious and extensive damage to the NOVUS, and possible
injury/death to the servicing technician.

TROUBLESHOOTING NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


5-2 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

When using an oscilloscope with multiple probes, remember that all the probe grounding leads
are electrically common. Never attempt to connect a probe grounding lead to one reference while
another probe grounding lead is connected to a different reference. In this case, a current path will
be established between the two different references. Again, this will almost certainly result in serious
and extensive damage to the NOVUS, and possible injury/death to the servicing technician.

In the three phase system, the P+ /P- charge capacitors are at high voltage whenever the main
contactor is closed, and take at least 2 minutes to discharge once power is removed.

In the three phase system, even when the B+/B- potential is 0, the B+ line is directed connected to
the high voltage P+. Reading across the B+/B- capacitors would indicate no potential, but, the B+
side is still as much as 600 Volts above earth ground.

In the three phase system, use extreme caution around the cold plate. The cold plate is at ground
potential, the P plate (which is mounted on the Cold Plate) is at P- potential, and the IGBT assem-
bly (mounted on the P Plate, blue in color), is at another potential.

5.2 INTERIOR ACCESS

5.2.1 Opening the Side Doors

To access the interior of the NOVUS, one or both of the side doors are opened. The hinged doors swing out,
but are not removable. At the bottom rear of each door is a small hole. Insert a small screwdriver into the
hole, and press up on the bottom of the rod just inside to release the door.

Open the left door to access the Control Electronics, Safety Monitor, and tube. Open the right door to access
the Laser Power Supply.

Rear view

Laser Power Supply Control Electronics


Water Pump/Reservoir Tube
Main Transformer Safety Monitor

Interior Access to the Novus

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING


0614-134-01 08/98 5-3
®
®

Depress the button


to release the display panel.

Depress the button


to release the display panel.

TROUBLESHOOTING NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


5-4 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

5.2.2 Opening the Display Cover

To access the Display PCB, and/or optics assembly, open the display cover as follows:

1. Open both side doors, as described in 5.2.1.

2. Open the display panel.

Inside the side doors, behind the display panel, are two release buttons (one inside each door). Press
the two buttons to release the display panel, which can then be swung up to access the optics assem-
bly and/or display PCB.

5.3 SERVICE MODE

5.3.1 Entering Service Mode

Service mode can be entered, once the machine is on, using the Control Electronics PCB SW2. Move contacts
2 to 3 to the closed ("ON") position (If the switch is already in the “ON” position, move it from “ON” to off,
and then back to “ON”). Units with TUV approval will require the user software EPROM to be replaced by
an EPROM which has the service routines.

The system will go to service mode operation, as indicated by the front panel shot count displaying the
coolant temperature in degrees centigrade.

SW2:
ON
1
2

To enter service mode, move


switch contact labeled "2" to
the "ON" position (both switch
contacts shown in "OFF"
CONTROL ELECTRONICS
position).
PCB

5.3.2 Leaving Service Mode

To exit service mode, move the control electronics switch SW2, contacts 2 to 3, to the off position.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING


0614-134-01 08/98 5-5
®
®

5.3.3 Service Mode Characteristics

In the service mode, the shot count display indicates the coolant temperature, most error conditions are
ignored, and current control mode can be entered. Error codes ignored are indicated in the list of error codes
later in this section.

In the single phase system, measure tube current at T1 (B- ref, T0), which is the TUBE CURRENT
MONITOR, which 1V/5AMPs of tube current, e.g., 1 Volt (ref B-) at T1 indicates 5 amps of tube
current.

When in current control, the photo-sensor PCB can be disconnected without causing an E114/E115 error.
This allows for adjustment of the PCB position, to center the wedge optic samples on the photo-sensors. In
this case, a jumper may be required across CR26 on the Control Electronics PCB, to prevent intermittent
errors at power settings at or above approximately 1 watt. Jumpering across CR26 shorts out the POWER
PHOTOCELL input to the ADC conversion circuit on the Control Electronics PCB.

5.4 CURRENT CONTROL MODE

5.4.1 Entering and Using Current Control

In current control mode, the tube current is controlled directly by the current control potentiometer on the
Regulator PCB. When in current control, the front panel power display will display "CURR".

To enter current control:

1.) Enter service mode.

2.) Place SW1 on the Regulator PCB in the "current" position.

Once in current control, the current control potentiometer is rotated to set the tube current:

In the three phase system, measure tube current at T11 (B- ref, T0 or T2), which is the TUBI signal,
and is .2V/AMP of tube current, e. g., 1 Volt (ref B-) at T11 indicates 5 amps of tube current.

5.5 DIAGNOSTIC MODE

In diagnostic mode, an RS232 terminal is hooked up to the Control Electronics RS232 port, to act as an Input/
Output device, allowing the service technician to select and run a series of diagnostic routines inside the
NOVUS NVRAM.

To set up and enter diagnostics mode:

1.) Set up an RS232 terminal for 300 baud, 8 data bits, even parity.

TROUBLESHOOTING NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


5-6 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

2.) Connect the RS232 terminal Tx, Rx, and signal ground lines to Control Electronics J7, as shown
in schematic 8-3.

RS232 Terminal, J7 on Control


Elrctronics PCB.
or equiv.

NOVUS

3.) Close contacts 1 to 4 of SW2 on the Control Electronics PCB.

ENTERING DIAGNOSTICS MODE

SW2:
ON
1

Move this switch


2

contact to "ON".

4.) Type in a "T" & the number assigned to that diagnostic, to execute one of the 38 diagnostics,
then type control D (hold down the "CONTROL" key, and type in a "D"

The diagnostics are:

T0 - (Not available for early versions of the software) Lists the diagnostics, with their task numbers.

T1 - Software version is sent to the terminal display.

T2 - Sends calculated CRC and CRC as read from EPROM to the display.

T3 - Reads all 9 of the digital I/O ports, and sends the result to the display. Each port is shown as a
two digit hex number. Ports are displayed in ascending order.

T4 - Scans and reads all 16 analog inputs to the ADC, and sends the results to the display as signed
floating point values (volts). Sent in order, 0 thru 15.

T5 - Clear digital outputs. In this format: T5 XXX Y HH

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING


0614-134-01 08/98 5-7
®
®

Where XXX specifies U29, U30, or U31, Y specifies port A, B, or C. HH is a hex


number, port bits specified by 1's in a binary conversion of this number will be
cleared.

T6 - Set digital outputs. As T5, except specified chip, port, bits are set.

T7 - Analog outputs. Used to send a value to the safety monitor or LPS DAC. Beyond the scope of
this discussion.

T 8 - Set treatment power. In this format: T8 PPPP

Where PPPP is the power desired in milliwatts (Max allowed is 3000)

T 9 - Set exposure time. In this format: T9 TTTTT

Where TTTTT is time in milliseconds (Max allowed is 65000)

T10 - Set treatment interval. In this format: T10 TTTTT (Max allowed is 65000)

T11 - Read treatment power, and display it at the terminal.

T12 - Read exposure time, and display it at the terminal.

T13 - Read treatment interval, and display it at the terminal.

T14 - HeNe attenuator motor. In the format: T14 S

Where S is a signed integer indicating number of.5 degree steps to take.

T15 - Reads current error conditions and displays them at the terminal.

T16 - Set status. In format: T16 X

Where X is R or S for ready or standby.

T17 - Set color. In format: T17 C

Where C is G for green, or A for all lines.

T 18 - Set repeat mode.

T19 - Reset shot count.

T20 - Read status, and display at terminal.

T21 - Read color, and display it at the terminal.

TROUBLESHOOTING NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


5-8 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

T22 - Read repeat mode, and display it at the terminal.

T23 - Read shot count, and display it at the terminal.

T24 - Fire the laser (footswitch must be depressed). In format: T24 S

Where S is the number of shots to fire.

Reply consists of five data items;

Number of exposures delivered. Minimum measured power. Maximum


measured power. Average measured power. Standard deviation of mea-
sured power.

T25 - Timer check. In format: T 25 X TTTTT

Where X is P for power supply timer, or S for safety timer

TTTTTT is the time in msecs, for the timer to run (Max is 65000).

T26 - Measure and display the zero crossing period.

T27 - Read and display the coolant temperature in C.

T28 - Trip the circuit breaker.

T30 - Read the CIO registers. Reads the internal registers of the three CIO chips. Not useful as a
service function.

T31 - Clear any active errors.

T32 - Read and display the error log. The log gives the total number of times that each type of error
has occurred since the last time the error log was cleared.

T33 - Clear the error log. Clears out the error log.

T34 - Initialize NVRAM - Error and User logs are cleared, treatment values are set to their minimum
values.

T35 - Read the user log and display it at the terminal. The user log contains data on number of shots
fired at each power and exposure time setting, all lines or green only, repeat mode, etc. It also shows
a cumulative total of power on time, and tube on time.

T36 - Clear the user log.

T37 - Read the smart fiber resistance, and display at the terminal.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING


0614-134-01 08/98 5-9
®
®

T38 - Restart the microprocessor.

T39 - Read the copyright notice and display it at the terminal.

To leave the diagnostic mode, open contacts 1 to 4 of SW2 on the Control Electronics PCB.

5.6 FAULT ISOLATION PROCEDURES

5.6.1 Introduction

This topic provides procedures for isolating faults within the NOVUS. Most system malfunctions will fall
into one of the following categories:

NOVUS will not power up. Refer to POWER UP FAULT ISOLATION topic 5.6.2.

NOVUS powers up, but front panel does not display properly, or at all. Refer to "no error code
reported" FAULT ISOLATION, topic 5.6.3.

NOVUS powers up, goes through initialization and self test successfully, then fails to respond
properly to some operator input, but no error code is displayed. Refer to "no error code reported"
FAULT ISOLATION, section 5.6.3.

NOVUS shuts down (main contactor trips). Refer to MAIN CONTACTOR TRIP FAULT ISOLA-
TION, topic 5.6.4.

NOVUS displays one or more fault codes. Refer to FAULT CODES, topic 5.6.5.

5.6.2 Power Up Fault Isolation

5.6.2.1 Single Phase Systems

(Refer to 8-16) Primary power to the NOVUS is applied through circuit breaker CB1 to the main contactor,
and a contactor transformer. The contactor is energized to distribute primary power throughout the system.

With the keyswitch in the OFF position, there is no path for the 24VAC to reach the contactor winding. To
start the system, the keyswitch is turned to the “START” position. The 24VAC is applied to the contactor
winding, the contactor closes, and the system turns on. When the keyswitch is released, the 24VAC is applied
to the contactor winding through the hold-on relay K1 on the Control Electronics board, and the contactor
itself. The hold on relay must be energized by the time the keyswitch is in the RUN position, or the contactor
will de-energize, shutting the system back down.

If the unit does not power up at all, check for the presence of primary power, the primary and secondary
fuses of the contactor transformer, 24VAC off the secondary of the contactor transformer, and continuity
through the “start” loop (emergency off, keyswitch, contactor winding).

TROUBLESHOOTING NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


5-10 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

If the unit powers up in the start position, but then shuts off when the keyswitch is released, the hold on relay
on the Control Electronics board is probably not energizing. The relay is supplied with 12VDC, and a ground
via Q1. Q1 is kept on by the output of BUFFER/DRIVER U60F. The /CONTACTOR TRIP/ line controls the
output of U60F. When the line is held low, transistor Q1 will be off, and the hold on relay will open the
24VAC “run” loop. The Safety Monitor, Laser Power Supply, and Control Electronics can ground the /
CONTACTOR TRIP / line, to shut down the laser. Valid reasons for a /CONTACTOR TRIP/ low are:

SAFETY MONITOR - The safety monitor will trip the circuit breaker if it measures power in excess of
2.95W, or sees treatment power when the footswitch is not depressed and the safety shutter is not in.

LASER POWER SUPPLY - The single phase laser power supply will trip the main contactor when the
contactor trip circuit on the regulator board sees the B+ voltage reach 225VDC (ref B-).

CONTROL ELECTRONICS - The software will initiate a contactor trip when it detects treatment
power when none is being requested, and it cannot get the safety shutter in. The software will also
shut the system off, if, during the power up initialization and self tests, if the waterflow switch is
found to be stuck open, or the waterflow is found to be insufficient (the software will beep the
speaker three times, then shut down the system).

If the contactor is being tripped by one of these conditions, see topic 5.6.4

5.6.2.2 Three Phase Systems

(Refer to 8-21) Primary power to the three phase NOVUS is applied through the circuit breaker CB1 to the
main contactor, and a contactor transformer. The contactor is energized to distribute power through the
system.

With the keyswitch in the OFF position, there is no path for the contactor transformer 20 VAC secondary
output (20 VAC when hooked up to 50 Hz supply) to reach the main contactor control winding. To start the
system, the keyswitch is rotated to the START position. The 20 VAC is applied to the contactor control
winding, the contactor closes, and AC power is distributed throughout the system. Operation is essentially
similar to that described for the single phase system, with the following addition:

A relay on the IGBT OVER CURRENT TRIP CONTROL (Refer to 8-27) is in the main contactor
control winding's secondary loop. An overcurrent condition (IGBT's on) energizes K1, breaking the
supply to the contactor. The main contactor de-energizes, shutting down the system.

5.6.3 “No Error Code Reported” Fault Isolation

Some system malfunctions can not be reported by an error code. The most typical of these would be any
malfunction which disables the error reporting function itself, the lack of system response to a front panel (or
footswitch) operator input, or the unit moving from READY to STANDBY by itself.

When the front panel display is not working, the problem could be in the Display, Control Electronics, or the
RS485 bus. Check the following:

Is the microprocessor running? The action of the solenoids, HeNe, etc., indicate the Control Electron-
ics microprocessor is running. If these things are not happening, check the Power Supply voltages to
the Control Electronics.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING


0614-134-01 08/98 5-11
®
®

Is the display microprocessor running. The countdown sequence on the front panel is driven by the
display microprocessor. If it is occurring, the display microprocessor is running.

Is there RS485 communication? After the laser on self tests, the Control Electronics attempts to
establish communications with the display, via the RS485 lines. Check the continuity of both sides of
the bus wiring, and the connectors at both ends.

When the system fails to respond to a single front panel switch or knob, and all other front panel controls are
operating normally, check the knob/switch for proper mechanical operation. If the knob/switch is good,
replace the display board.

Some faults clear by themselves, when the detected malfunction clears. If the machine is in READY when one
of these faults is detected, and then the fault clears on a subsequent check, previous to the reporting of the
fault at the front panel, the system is sent from READY to STANDBY, but the operator sees no fault code.
This "READY to STANDBY" problem, with no fault reported, is a nuisance to the operator. To solve this
problem, use the diagnostic mode to determine which error is being detected. Common sources of this
problem are the +/-15VDC supply being slightly off (E140/141), DAC readbacks (E115,116,117), or smart
fiber (E1). Electrical noise can cause spurious detections of any of these faults, which, upon subsequent
checks, clear. Newer versions of the software employ techniques to eliminate some occurrences of these
spurious fault detections.

5.6.4 Main Contactor Trip Fault Isolation

The Safety Monitor, Laser Power Supply, and Control Electronics can ground the /CONTACTOR TRIP /
line, to shut down the laser. Valid reasons for a /CONTACTOR TRIP/ low are:

SAFETY MONITOR - The safety monitor will trip the circuit breaker if it measures power in excess of
2.95W, or sees treatment power when the footswitch is not depressed and the safety shutter is not in.

LASER POWER SUPPLY - The single phase and three phase laser power supplies will trip the main
contactor when the contactor trip circuit on the regulator board sees the B+ voltage reach 225VDC
(referenced B-). In addition, the three phase laser power supply will trip the main contactor when
excessive current flows through the IGBT's (Over current trip).

CONTROL ELECTRONICS - The software will initiate a contactor trip when it detects treatment
power when none is being requested, and it cannot get the safety shutter in. The Control Electronics
will also trip the circuit breaker during the power up initialization and self tests sequence, if it finds
the flow switch stuck closed, or that there is insufficient flow. In the case of either of these "water-
flow" faults, the system beeps three times, then shuts down.

Determine which of these contactor trip faults is occurring, and then proceed with troubleshooting of that
area:

SAFETY MONITOR - If the safety monitor is causing the trip, determine if it is the GREATER THAN MAX
SIGNAL POWER or SS OPEN, > MIN & FSW INACTIVE fault, by monitoring the pin 1 and 2 inputs of NOR
GATE U13A, when the trip occurs. Next monitor the inputs to the fault circuit which is causing the trip, to
determine if the fault detection is real, or a malfunction in the fault detection circuit itself. If either of these
two faults are actually being detected, the system has severe, and probably multiple, malfunctions; trou-
bleshoot the laser power supply and control electronics. If the problem is in the fault detection circuit itself,
troubleshoot the fault circuit.

TROUBLESHOOTING NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


5-12 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

LASER POWER SUPPLY - If the single phase laser power supply is tripping the main contactor, determine if
the trip is a valid detection of a B+ voltage of 225 VDC (B- ref), or if the fault detection circuit itself (U8 on the
regulator board) is malfunctioning. If B+ is actually reaching 225VDC (B- ref), troubleshoot the SCR firing
control and B+ power supply circuitry. This is an unlikely failure, as the power regulator board also includes
a circuit which disables SCR firing if B+ reaches 200VDC (B- ref), which should act to limit B+ before it can
reach the 225 volt level. If the error does occur, check for an SCR failure, or a constant triggering to one or
both SCRs.

The three phase laser power supply has two protection circuits which will trip the main contactor. It has a B+
overvoltage protection circuit which trips the main contactor via the Control Electronics hold on relay if B+
reaches 225V, and it has an IGBT Overcurrent Trip Protection circuit, which trips the main contactor if IGBT
current is excessive.

CONTROL ELECTRONICS - If the Control Electronics is tripping the circuit breaker, determine if there is a
valid fault (laser is making treatment power when none is detected, and the safety shutter is out when it
should be in). A real fault condition would indicate a problem with both the safety shutter circuit, and the
tube making power when none is requested; replace the control electronics board. For waterflow shutdowns,
check for proper flow, proper flow signals for the switch, coolant level, pump operation, flow restrictions, etc.

5.5.5 Error Code Fault Isolation

When the NOVUS detects a system malfunction, it displays an error code (EXXX, where XXX is an identifying
number for the error detected) on the front panel power display. If more than one error is detected, the
display will cycle continuously through the error codes, displaying each for about two seconds.

Some error conditions are checked only in the power up initialization and self test period (ex. ROM CRC
check, E101), others are checked at regular intervals, throughout system operation (ex. E140/E141 +/- 15
VDC supplies), and others are checked only when some specific event is about to occur (ex. E203, no zero
crossings, is checked at the beginning of an exposure).

Once an error occurs, further operation may or may not be possible, depending upon the error that was
detected. Some errors can be cleared by any operator input at the front panel. Other errors will clear them-
selves when the error condition is eliminated (ex. the smart fiber error will disappear when the fiber is
correctly attached to a delivery system). Finally, certain errors cannot be cleared at all, short of powering the
machine off and on (or reset to microprocessor).

Many fault conditions are ignored when the machine is placed in service mode. The E140 and E141 +/-
15VDC power supply faults are ignored when in the current control mode.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING


0614-134-01 08/98 5-13
®
®

The table below summarizes the error codes. A detailed description of each error code follows the table.

NOVUS ERROR CODES (for quick referencing)

NOTE: Parentheses indicate service mode (S if the error is active in service mode, N if not) followed by how
cleared (M=condition constantly monitored, C=control panel action, N=not cleared, try off/on cycle).

E1 No delivery system or unrecognized delivery system. (NM)


E2 Eye safety filter not connected, jumper plug not connected, or eye safety filter not inserted.
(NC)
E3 Remote interlock open. (NM)
E4 Coolant temperature. (SM)
E5 No footswitch. (NM)
E6 More than one footswitch. (NM)
E100 CPU malfunction. (SN)
E101 ROM CRC. (SN)
E102 NVRAM battery. (SC)
E104 Crystal clocks mutually inconsistent. (SN)
E105 Main program dead. (NN)
E111/112/113 U29/30/31 malfunction. (SN)
E114 ADC hang up. (SN)
E115/116/117 DAC readback from power supply direct/power supply indirect/safety monitor indirect.
(SC)
E120 Watchdog inactive state incorrect. (NN)
E121/122 Watchdog short timer too short/too long. (NN)
E123/124 Watchdog long timer too short/too long. (NN)
E125 Watchdog accepted early trigger. (NN)
E126 Watchdog accepted trigger when timed out. (NN)
E127 Watchdog not working. (NN)
E128 Watchdog timed out. (NN)
E129 Watchdog failed to shut down the power supply. (NN)
E140 +15VDC supply. (SN)
E141 -15VDC supply. (SN)
E142 Coolant temperature detector failure. (NM)
E165 DAC readback from power supply direct during power-on check. (SN)
E166 DAC readback from power supply indirect during power-on check. (NN)
E167 DAC readback from safety monitor indirect during power-on check. (NN)
E200 Crowbar not working. (NN)
E201 Software could not shut down power supply. (NN)
E202 Laser power output when there should be none. (NN)
E203 No zero crossings (single phase). Power supply optical interlock open (three phase). (SC)
E205 Laser overpower detected by software. ((NC)
E207 No aiming beam. (NN
E208 Hardware failed to terminate exposure. (SC)
E210/211/212 Safety monitor failed to shut down power supply/close shutter/return correct error code,
during overpower. (NN/ NN/ NC)
E213/214/215 Safety monitor failed to shut down power supply/close shutter/return correct error code,
during overtime. (NN/ NN/ NC)
E216/217/218 Safety monitor failed to shut down power supply/close shutter/return correct error code,
when eye safety filter out. (NN/ NN/ NC)
E219/220 Safety monitor returned incorrect code during Underpower/undertime. (NC)
E221/222/224/225 Safety monitor detected overpower/overtime/undertime/eye safety filter out. (NC)
E230/231 Safety shutter not closed/not opened. (NN/NC)
E233 Eye safety filter not removed. (NM)

TROUBLESHOOTING NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


5-14 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

E234/235 Green filter not inserted/not removed. (NM)


E236 No coolant flow. (SM)
E238 Some laser firings were skipped.
E239 Some power on self test was omitted. (NN)
E241 Safety monitor overpower error bit stuck on. (NC)
E242 Safety monitor overtime error bit stuck on. (NC)
E243 Safety monitor eye safety filter out error bit stuck on. (NC)
E244 Safety monitor underpower error bit stuck on. (NC)
E245 Safety monitor undertime error bit stuck on. (NC)
E246 Safety monitor test bit stuck on. (NN)
E300 Software error, line number in count display. (SN)

E1 - A “no or unrecognized delivery system” error occurs when the electrical loop through the smart fiber is open,
or at a resistance which the Control Electronics does not recognize (see table below). (Refer to
8-5) J10-12 and 13 are connected to the two lines which run through the optical fiber. At the
delivery system end of the fiber, the two lines are connected to a resistor inside the fiber socket.
The value of the resistor indicates the type of delivery system, as indicated on the schematic (table
just above and to left of the circuit). The external resistor and R51 form a voltage divider. The
voltage level between the two resistors is determined by the value of the external resistor (as
indicated in the table). The voltage is applied to ISOLATION AMPLIFIER U68A, whose output
goes to the pin 8 input of MULTIPLEXER U44. The voltage at pin 8 is passed to the ADC circuit
(via isolation amplifier U45A) each time the microprocessor sends a pass S12 address to the
multiplexer on its A0-A4 address lines. The ADC circuit converts the DC voltage to a digital
value. If the voltage is more than 10% off from any of the recognized values, the E1 error occurs.
The software monitors the DELIVERY SYSTEM TYPE voltage continuously. Software will clear
this fault when the voltage is changed to any valid value.

VOLTS DELIVERY SYSTEM RESISTANCE of


DELIVERY SYSTEM

1.13 LIO 5K

2.03 SLIT LAMP (MESF) 10K

3.378 YAG 20K

4.33 FIXED ESF LAMP 30K

5 MICROSURGICAL 39.2K

6.72 EPCP 80.6K

8.05 DERM 162K

8.49 SELECTABLE (SESF) 221K

NOTE: Refer to Field Service Bulletin #30 for additional delivery systems and their
corresponding resistor values.

E2 - An "eye safety filter not connected, jumper plug not connected, or eye safety filter not inserted" error occurs
when the eye safety filter sensor indicates the eye safety filter is not in when it should be. The
NOVUS software determines how to operate the safety filter by reading the value of the smart
fiber resistor:

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING


0614-134-01 08/98 5-15
®
®

Derm and EPCP values indicate that there is no eye safety filter.

The "selectable" value indicates that a "high visibility" eye safety filter is attached.
This filter is moved into place when the unit is placed in READY, and stays in place
as long as the unit stays in READY.

For installations with movable or selectable eye safety filters, check the connections between the
NOVUS and the delivery system. Note that the NOVUS determines the requirement for moving the
eye safety filter by reading the resistance of the smart fiber resistor. See the table above for informa-
tion on the correct smart fiber resistance for a particular delivery system. LIO and DERM systems
require a jumper plug at the delivery system connector (J76, rear of unit), which loops the EYE
FILTER RETURN to the EYE FILTER OPEN.

E3 - A “remote interlock” error occurs when the BRH loop is opened. (Refer to 8-6) A ground supplied from J3-
20 leaves the Control Electronics and goes to pin J77-C on the back of the system. A BRH plug
(supplied with the system) or external disable loop is connected to J77. The BRH plug provided
simply loops J77-C to J77-A, which is the enable condition. Alternately, pins A and C can be run
out to a remote disable switch. The switch should open the loop to disable the system, and close
the loop to enable the system. The ground return on J77-C is applied to control electronics J3-19.
If the loop is complete, the input will be ground, and U66C output will be low. If the loop is open,
the output of U66C will be high. U66C output is applied to pin 21 of TIMER- I/O U30. The
software reads this input during self test, main program loop, and during an exposure sequence.
If the input is high, the laser is disabled, and the E3 error is sent to the display.

E4 - A “coolant temperature” error occurs when the coolant temperature sensor (mounted on the cold plate)
indicates a temperature in excess of 65˚ C. The sensor is a thermistor whose resistance varies with
temperature changes. At room temperature it should indicate approximately 10K ohms. As
coolant temperature increases, the resistance will decrease.

(Refer to 8-6) The temperature sensor output enters the Control Electronics at J18-3, and goes to the S6
input of MULTIPLEXER U44. The voltage at S6 is applied to the ADC circuit (via U45A) when the
microprocessor selects the S6 input of the MUX. U41 converts the analog voltage to a digital value
that the microprocessor can read. If the value indicates that temperature exceeds 65˚ C, the E4 error is
reported, and firing of the laser is disabled. Once this fault occurs, the system continues to monitor
the sensor output, and will clear the error when the temperature drops below 65˚ C.

In service mode, the front panel count display displays the coolant temperature (as read by the sensor
and interpreted by the microprocessor). This can be a handy tool in evaluating overheating prob-
lems.

Note that an overtemp condition does not necessarily indicate a hardware problem. The NOVUS
cooling system is designed to provide more than enough cooling for typical use of the laser. The
specifications for the system call for no less than 20 minutes full power operation at a 16% duty cycle
without thermal shutdown. Although laser power settings, room temperature, etc., can have some
affect on the temperature rise of the coolant, it is the 16% duty cycle that is most important to con-
sider. If a user is having overheating problems, check the laser out as follows:

Discuss the problem with the user, to determine what treatment parameters are used when the
overtemperature conditions occur. If the duty cycle exceeds 16%, the laser will eventually reach over
temperature:

TROUBLESHOOTING NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


5-16 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

DUTY CYCLE = (rep rate)(exposure time)/1

Go to service mode, so that the coolant temp is displayed at the front panel. Begin firing the laser
with the treatment parameters at which the overtemperature conditions are occurring. As the
temperature increases, the fan speed should increase, especially as the temperature moves past 55 ˚ C.
If not, the fan or fan controller may be at fault.

When the temperature reaches 60˚ C, the temperature indicator at the front panel will turn on. This
indicates that the temperature is approaching the fault condition. The operator can decrease power/
exposure duration/duty cycle, or simply allow the unit to cool, to avoid reaching the fault condition.
At 65 C coolant temperature, the front panel temperature indicator will flash, and the E4 error will
occur.

E5 - A “no footswitch” error occurs when the Control Electronics sees a nontransient low on both the /FOOT SW
N.O./ and /FOOT SW N.C./ lines. These two signals are the inverted FOOT SW N.O. and
FOOTSW N.C. signals. The footswitch has three wires, a ground input, a normally open line, and
a normally closed line. “Normally” refers to the footswitch not depressed condition. The switch
places the ground input on the NC line when not depressed, and moves it to the NO line when
depressed.

(Refer to 8-6) The footswitch cable plugs into J77 on the back of the system. The FOOT SW N.O./N.C.
lines enter the system there, and are routed through the main harness to Control Electronics J3-10/11.
U64A and B provide signal isolation, and pass the high or low at their respective inputs out on the
FOOTSW N.O./N. C. WIRE OR lines. The WIRE OR lines are common to inputs at J4 (pins 2,3) and
J5 (pins 2, 3). These lines are intended for future use with “smart” delivery systems, which will use
these lines for footswitch inputs. At this time, all delivery systems compatible with the NOVUS use
the J77 connector at the rear of the unit. The WIRE OR lines are inverted by U67A and U67B to
become the /FOOT SW N.O/ and /FOOT SW N.C./ lines. These two signals are sent to three
different places:

• The Safety Monitor (J13-18/19).

• BUFFER U77 pins 7 and 8, and then on to the laser power supply J15-22/23.

• TIMER-I/O U31 pins 32 and 33, as input logic levels to be read by the microprocessor.

When the microprocessor reads both pins 32 and 33 of U31 as lows, and the condition persists (is not
just a transient, such as switch bounce) the E5 error will be reported. Note that both signals low
would result if the footswitch cable is disconnected.

E6 - A “more than one footswitch” error occurs when the Control Electronics sees a nontransient high on both the
/FOOT SW N.O./ and /FOOT SW N.C./ lines. These two signals are the inverted FOOT SW N.O.
and FOOTSW N.C. signals. The footswitch has three wires; a ground input, a normally open line,
and a normally closed line. “Normally” refers to the footswitch not depressed condition. The
switch places the ground input on the NC line when not depressed, and moves it to the NO line
when depressed.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING


0614-134-01 08/98 5-17
®
®

(Refer to 8-6) The footswitch cable plugs into J77 on the back of the system. The FOOT SW N.O./N.C.
lines enter the system there, and are routed through the main harness to the Control Electronics at J3-
10/11. U64A and B provide signal isolation, and pass the high or low at their respective inputs out
on the FOOTSW N.O./N. C. WIRE OR lines. The WIRE OR lines are common to inputs at J4 (pins
2,3) and J5 (pins 2, 3). These lines are intended for future use with “smart” delivery systems, which
will use these lines for footswitch inputs. At this time, all delivery systems compatible with the
NOVUS use the J77 connector at the rear of the unit. The WIRE OR lines are inverted by U67A and
U67B to become the /FOOT SW N.O/ and /FOOT SW N.C./ lines. These two signals are sent to
three different places:

• The safety monitor (J13-18/19)

• BUFFER U77 pins 7 and 8, and then on to the laser power supply J15-22/23.

• TIMER-I/O U31 pins 32 and 33, as input logic levels to be read by the microprocessor.

When the microprocessor reads both pins 32 and 33 of U31 as highs, and the condition persists (is not
just a transient, such as switch bounce) the E5 error will be reported. The “more than one footswitch”
name refers to the circuit reaction to a footswitch depressed condition if another footswitch is con-
nected to the system at the same time (through one of the “future use” connections J4, J5),i.e., the NC
and NO lines will both go low, /FOOT SW N.O./ and /FOOT SW N.C./ both go high, and the E6
error will occur.

E100 - A "CPU malfunction error" occurs when the CPU fails one of its self tests.

E101 - A “ROM CRC” error occurs during power up initialization and self test, when the microprocessor does a
“cyclic redundancy check" on the ROM. Replace the ROM , or the Control Electronics PCB, if this
error persists.

E102 - An “NVRAM battery” error occurs when the Control Electronics detects low backup battery voltage from
NVRAM U12 or U13. Both contain lithium batteries rated to last many years. This error can be
cleared by any front panel input, but the NVRAM chips should be replaced if the error persists.

E104 - A "Crystal clocks mutually inconsistent" error occurs during self testing when the two crystal clocks are
compared

E105 - A “main program dead” error occurs when the software fails to reset a software timer which insures that
the software is running the main program loop. If this error occurs, it could be a previously
unknown software bug, or a hardware problem on the Control Electronics PCB. Check all
connections to/from the board, replace ROM, replace Control Electronics PCB.

E111 - A “U29 malfunction” error occurs when the microprocessor detects a problem with the TIMER-I/O chip
U29 on the Control Electronics board. Once this error is detected, the microprocessor continues
to check until the error clears, or the system is turned off. The problem is probably confined to
the Control Electronics board. Replace the board if this error persists.

TROUBLESHOOTING NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


5-18 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

E112 - A “U30 malfunction” error occurs when the microprocessor detects a problem with the TIMER-I/O chip
U30 on the Control Electronics board. Once this error is detected, the microprocessor continues
to check until the error clears, or the system is turned off. The problem is probably confined to
the Control Electronics board. Replace the board if this error persists.

E113 - A “U31 malfunction” error occurs when the microprocessor detects a problem with the TIMER-I/O chip
U31 on the Control Electronics PCB. Once this error is detected, the microprocessor continues
to check until the error clears, or the system is turned off. The problem is probably confined to
the Control Electronics PCB. Replace the board if this error persists.

E114 - An “ADC hang up” error occurs after the Control Electronics microprocessor sends a request for analog
to digital conversion to ADC U41, and the ADC stays busy for twice its specified conversion time.
U41, U34, U60, U15 are possible sources of the malfunction. Replace the Control Electronics
board if the problem can not be isolated to one of these components.

E115 - A “DAC readback from power supply direct” error occurs during treatment delivery, when the voltage
output from the DAC U49 is read directly back through the ADC circuit, and the conversion from
the ADC differs more than 5% from the input to the DAC. The microprocessor uses the DAC to
send an analog voltage to the laser power supply indicating the level of power desired for an
exposure. The voltage sent is 2.5V/watt of power commanded. Note that the microprocessor
actually commands more than the power level dialed into the front panel, to make up for losses
in the fiber and delivery system.

This error is most likely a result of a failure on the Control Electronics board. U49, U56, U55, U44, are
possible faulty components. If the error cannot be isolated to a particular component on the board,
replace the Control Electronics board.

E116 - A “DAC readback from the power supply indirect” error occurs during treatment delivery, when the
voltage output from DAC U49 is read back through the ADC circuits, via the ECHO TUBE
POWER op amp in the laser power supply, and the conversion from the ADC varies by more than
5% from the value being sent to the DAC by the microprocessor. The microprocessor uses the
DAC to send an analog voltage to the laser power supply indicating the level of power desired
for an exposure. The voltage sent is 2.5V/watt of power commanded. Note that the micropro-
cessor actually commands more than the power level dialed into the front panel, to make up for
losses in the fiber and delivery system.

Note that the current control switch on the laser power supply (single phase) forces the ECHO TUBE
POWER line open (This is how the control electronics knows the laser is in current control) when
current control is selected.

This error indicates a problem in the line between the DAC and laser power supply regulator board,
or with the echo tube power circuit on the power regulator board.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING


0614-134-01 08/98 5-19
®
®

E117 - A “DAC readback from Safety Monitor indirect” error occurs during treatment delivery, when the voltage
output from DAC U50 is read through the ADC circuit, via the Safety Monitor board, and varies
by more than 5% from the value being sent to the DAC by the microprocessor. The DAC outputs
an analog voltage which varies with the digital value written to the DAC. This voltage is
normally used to indicate to the safety monitor what level of power is being requested (2.5V/
watt). In this self test, the voltage is sent out on J14-2 to the Safety Monitor (Refer to 8-8), and is
returned through U17A as ECHO SM TREAT to J14-4 on the Control Electronics board. It is
passed by MULTIPLEXER U44 (pin 7) to the ADC circuit, which converts the analog voltage to
a digital value. The microprocessor reads the digital output from the ADC circuit, and expects
it to be with 5% of the value originally sent to the DAC. This process is repeated, in increments,
to cover the entire range of DAC outputs.

This error could be caused by the Control Electronics, safety monitor, the connection between U50’s
output and the safety monitor (SM TREATMENT LEVEL) or the return signal from the safety moni-
tor to the Control Electronics (ECHO SM TREAT).

E120 - A “watchdog inactive state incorrect” error occurs when the Control Electronics watchdog is inactive (not
enabled), and one or both of the highdog or lowdog timer /Q/ outputs is high. This error is
normally detected during the watchdog self checks. (Refer to 8-5) When the watchdog is inactive,
both timers should be in the clear state. During the power up initialization and self tests, before
starting the watchdog, the microprocessor reads the 4.4 and 5.8 signals (/Q/ outputs from the
watchdog) thru the pin 21/22 inputs to TIMER-I/O U29. If either signal is high, the E120 fault
occurs. This error sometimes occurs spuriously; try powering the system off and back on. If the
error persists, troubleshoot the control electronics watchdog and associated circuits. If the
malfunction can not be isolated to a replaceable component on the board, replace the board.

E121 - A “watchdog short timer too short" error occurs during power up initialization and self test when the
lowdog timer active state is timed by a software timer, and found to be less than 3.864
milliseconds in duration. Troubleshoot the Control Electronics lowdog timer circuitry, U73A,
U19C, C93, R59, If the malfunction can not be isolated to a replacable component, replace the
board.

E122 - A “watchdog short timer too long” error occurs during power up initialization and self test, when the
lowdog time active state is timed by a software timer, and found to be greater than 4.530
milliseconds in duration. Troubleshoot the Control Electronics lowdog timer circuitry, U73A,
U19C, C93, R59. If the malfunction can not be isolated to a replacable component, replace the
board.

E123 - A “watchdog long timer too short” error occurs during power up initialization and self test, when the
highdog timer active state is timed by a software timer, and found to be less than 5.395
milliseconds in duration. Troubleshoot the Control Electronics highdog timer circuitry, U73B,
U19C, C92, R58. If the malfunction can not be isolated to a replacable component, replace the
board.

E124 - A “watchdog long timer too long” error occurs during power up initialization and self test, when the
highdog timer active state is timed by a software timer, and found to be more than 6.825
milliseconds in duration. Troubleshoot the Control Electronics highdog timer circuitry, U73B,
U19C, C92, R58. If the malfunction can not be isolated to a replacable component, replace the
board.

TROUBLESHOOTING NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


5-20 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

E125 - A “watchdog accepted early trigger” error occurs during power up initialization and self test, when the
watchdog circuit is triggered while the lowdog timer is active and the highdog timer remains
active (It should go to the inactive, fault state, when the lowdog timer gets an early trigger).
Troubleshoot the watchdog timer circuitry U73, U72B. If the malfunction can not be isolated to
a replacable component, replace the board.

E126 - A “watchdog accepted trigger when timed out” error occurs during the power up initialization and self
test, when the watchdog circuit is triggered after it has timed out, and one or both of the timers
goes to its active state (The trigger should be ignored once the two timers have timed out).
Troubleshoot the watchdog timer circuitry U73. If the malfunction can not be isolated to a
replacable component, replace the board.

E127 - A “watchdog not working” error occurs after the watchdog circuit has been enabled, when, during
watchdog service, the lowdog timer was found to still be active (the lowdog timer should time
out between each watchdog service)(4.4 input to U29 is still high), or either timer is found to be
inactive immediately following a trigger. This error may be a malfunction in the timer, or the
watchdog may have detected erratic software. Once the watchdog is enabled, the software must
provide watchdog service (retrigger the watchdog) at 5 millisecond intervals (during timebase
interrupt). Check the watchdog circuit. If the fault can not be isolated to a replacable component
in the watchdog circuitry, replace the board.

E128 - A “watchdog timed out” error occurs after the watchdog circuit has been enabled, when the highdog timer
times out (the highdog timer should always be retriggered before it times out) (5.8 input to U29
is low). If the highdog timer times out, the laser power supply is disabled, and CR19 is turned
on. This may a be malfunction in the timer, or the watchdog may have detected erratic software.
Once the watchdog is enabled, the software must provide watchdog service (retrigger the
watchdog) every 5 milliseconds (during timebase interrupt). If the software fails to service the
watchdog on time, the highdog timer times out. Check the watchdog circuit. If the malfunction
can not be isolated to a replacable component in the watchdog circuit, replace the board.

E129 - A “watchdog failed to shutdown the power supply” error occurs when the watchdog highdog timer /Q/
output goes low, during an exposure, and laser power is not terminated. This error is tested
during the third laser firing of the laser on checks in the self test sequence. In this self test, the
software initiates a 1000mw, 100msec exposure, and stops servicing the watchdog. The highdog
timer should time out, and its /Q/ output (5.8 signal) go low (the fault state). This 5.8 signal is
the enable to BUFFER U77, which provides all the enable and timing signals to the laser power
supply. When 5.8 goes high, the output enable to U77 is lost, and all the U77 outputs go open.
This results in a /SHUTDOWN/ low to the laser power supply, which should crowbar the tube,
ending the exposure. The POWER PHOTOCELL signal is measured by the ADC circuit for the
presence of treatment level power 10 milliseconds after the exposure is started. If treatment
power is still indicated, the E129 error occurs. This error tests some of the same circuitry tested
by the self test for E200/E201. If the error occurs in conjunction with the E201 error, refer to the
write up on E201. If this error occurs by itself, troubleshoot the watchdog circuitry (the E128 error
indicates a problem with the watchdog, output to U77). If the malfunction can not be isolated
to a replacable component in the watchdog circuitry, replace the board.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING


0614-134-01 08/98 5-21
®
®

E140/E141 - A +15VDC (E140) or -15VDC (E141) error occurs when the Control Electronics measures the
respective voltages from the photocell board (supplied from the ground referenced +/- 15VDC
power supply), and finds it to be more than 3% out of spec. This check is done continuously,
whenever the system is on. These checks are bypassed in current control mode, allowing the
connector on the photocell board to be removed, which allows the technician to align the beam
samples from the beam splitter (in the optics assembly) to strike the power and safety photocells.
(Refer to 8-6) The +/- 15VDC from the photocell board is sent to Control Electronics J11-4,6, and
thru voltage dividers to MULTIPLEXER U44 S10 and S11 inputs. When the microprocessor is
ready to measure one of these two voltages, it sends the appropriate address to U44’s A0 thru A3
inputs, and sets MUX ENABLE. The selected input is routed to the ADC circuit, where it is
converted to a digital value. The microprocessor reads in the digital value from the ADC circuit,
and if the result is more than 3% from spec, an E140 or E141 error results. Measure the supply
voltage out of the power supply; adjustment of the power supply output may be necessary (
access to the adjustment pots on the power supply is difficult). If the voltage will not adjust,
attempt to isolate the problem to a board/component loading down the supply line, or to the +/
- 15VDC power supply itself.

E142 - A “coolant temperature detector” failure error occurs when the temperature detector output indicates a
temperature less than 0˚ C, or greater than 89˚ C. The sensor is a thermistor. The resistance of
the thermistor decreases as coolant temperature increases. At room temperature, the resistance
is around 10KΩ. Its output enters the Control Electronics PCB at J18-3. The voltage is selected
at the MULTIPLEXER U44 and sent to the ADC circuit for conversion. The digital value out of
the ADC circuit is read by the microprocessor, and if it indicates the sensor output is reporting
less than 0˚ C or more than 89˚ C, the E142 error occurs. Troubleshoot the sensor (located on the
cold plate), the connection between the sensor and Control Electronics, and the Control
Electronics temperature sensor input circuitry.

E165 - A DAC readback from power Supply direct during a power on check. This is the same as the E115, except
that the readback was being done in preparation for one of the power up self test laser firings.

E166 - A DAC readback from power supply direct during a power on check. This is the same as the E116, except
that the readback was being done in preparation for one of the power up self test laser firings.

E167 - A DAC readback from power supply direct during a power on check. This is the same as the E117, except
that the readback was being done in preparation for one of the power up self test laser firings.

E200 - A “crowbar not working” error occurs during the power up initialization and self tests, when, after the
Control Electronics attempts to shutdown (crowbar) the laser power supply, and the crowbar OK
signal is not returned from the laser power supply to the Control Electronics. When the
shutdown signal is sent to the laser power supply, several actions occur in the laser power supply
to shutdown the tube:

• The current command voltage is dropped negative, forcing the passbank drive
integrator's outputs to turn off the passbank MOSFETS.

• The input to the passbank MOSFETs is dropped negative, to directly turn off the
passbank MOSFETs.

• The crowbar SCR is fired, providing a low resistance shunt for current around the
tube.

TROUBLESHOOTING NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


5-22 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

The E200 error indicates that no current flow has been detected through the shunt path, i.e., the third
item above is working properly. Note that even if the shunt path is not completed, the tube will still
turn off due to the loss of passbank MOSFET drive. The current shunt is important in that it provides
a back-up method of shutting down the light out of the tube, in case the MOSFETs do not turn off.

SINGLE PHASE - (Refer to 8-18) The control electronics initiates a 1000mw, 100msec exposure, and
then drops the /SHUTDOWN/ signal low. Q6 turns on, turning on opto-isolator U34, which turns
on Q5 via U38-13. Q5 on turns on indicator DS1, places a negative (B- ref) on the current command
and gate turnoff lines, and sends a pulse through the transformer T3 to fire crowbar SCR3. When the
crowbar SCR turns on, it provides a shunt path for current around the tube. (Refer to 8-19) A 100 pf,
3KV capacitor passes a voltage spike which turns on Q7, triggering U35. The /Q/ output of U35 (/
CROWBAR OK/) goes low, and is sent back to the control electronics, where it is an input to TIMER-
I/O U29, pin 30. If this error occurs in conjunction with E201, refer to the write up on E201. If this
error occurs by itself, the malfunction may be that the trigger is not reaching the SCR, a shunt path
component has failed, or that the detector circuitry is failing to properly detect the current through
the shunt path.

THREE PHASE - Essentially similar to the circuit in the single phase. See the write up in section 4.8
for a description of the laser power supply components that detect the crowbar action.

E201 - A “software could not shutdown laser power supply” error occurs during the second laser firing in the
power up initialization and self tests, when the Control Electronics attempts to end an exposure
by setting the /SHUTDOWN/ signal low, and treatment power fails to terminate in response.
(Refer to 8-5) The software initiates a 1000mw, 100msec exposure, and then sets /SHUTDOWN/
low, out of U29-33. The signal is sent to the laser power supply, via U77 and U17C, out on J15-
9.

SINGLE PHASE - (Refer to 8-18) The /SHUTDOWN/ signal enters the laser power supply regulator
board on J31-9, and turns on Q6. Q6 on turns on Q7, which turns on opto-isolator U38. U38 on turns
on Q5, via U38. When Q5 turns on, the following four things occur:

• Lights indicator DS1, on the regulator board.

• Places negative voltage on the current control line.

• Places negative voltage on the gate turnoff line.

• Fires SCR3, via T3.

The tube should turn off in response to the /SHUTDOWN/ low.

THREE PHASE - See the write up in section 4.8.

(Refer to 8-6) After setting the /SHUTDOWN/ signal low, the software selects the POWER PHOTO-
CELL signal into MULTIPLEXER U44, which passes the signal to the ADC circuit. The ADC circuit
converts the analog voltage POWER PHOTOCELL to a digital value. The digital value from the ADC
circuit is read, and should indicate no treatment power is being delivered. This confirms that the
shutdown sent to the laser power supply succeeded in terminating exposure power. If treatment
power is still present, the E201 error occurs.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING


0614-134-01 08/98 5-23
®
®

For a single phase system, check first to see if the DS1 indicator comes on during the power up self
tests, on the second pulse of laser light. If not, trace back towards the control electronics /SHUT-
DOWN/ source. If the DS4 indicator does light, the shutdown is probably occurring, but not fast
enough, or not being properly sensed by the Control Electronics.

E202 - A “laser putting out light when it shouldn’t be” error occurs when the POWER PHOTOCELL input to the
control electronics indicates treatment power (>40mw), but the Control Electronics is not
requesting treatment power. If this error occurs, try to determine if the laser is actually on when
this error occurs. If not, the power photocell circuit on the photocell board, or the power photocell
circuitry on the Control Electronics is possibly at fault. Check for a false indication of power on
the POWER PHOTOCELL line.

E203 - A “no zero crossings” error occurs when the zero crossing signal from the laser power supply is not present
at the control electronics, to begin an exposure.

SINGLE PHASE - (Refer to 8-17) The Zero crossing signal to the control electronics is the output of
opto-isolator U10, which leaves the regulator board and is routed to the control electronics TIMER-I/
O U30, pin 28 (refer to 8-5). Check TP8 (ground ref) on the control electronics PCB for the zero
crossing pulses (approx. 8.3 msec). If the pulses are not present there, trace back towards the laser
power supply zero crossing circuit. If the pulses are present at TP8, replace the control electronics
PCB.

THREE PHASE - The three phase system does not actually detect zero crossings, but uses a timer
chip to simulate the zero crossing signal to the Control Electronics. An E203 error in a three phase
system indicates that the "INTERLOCK" circuit, as described in section 4.8, has disabled the timer
output, causing the error. This is most likely because the LEM module is not plugged in, the IGBT
circuits P-+/-15VDC supply circuit has failed, or the light interlock has become disconnected.

E205 - A “laser overpower detected by software” error occurs when the POWER PHOTOCELL signal exceeds the
TUBE POWER REQUEST signal by 25 % or more, during treatment. In normal operation, the
laser power supply light control circuitry works to control the tube current so that the output of
the power photocell circuit is equal to the TUBE POWER REQUEST signal from the Control
Electronics. (Refer to 8-5) The TUBE POWER REQUEST is an analog voltage of 2.5VDC /watt of
power requested. The Control Electronics enables this output at the beginning of each exposure.
The signal is sent to the laser power supply.

SINGLE PHASE - (Refer to 8-19) The TUBE POWER REQUEST signal enters the laser power supply
regulator board at J31-2. The POWER PHOTOCELL signal from the power photocell enters the
board at J31-6. The two signals are input to integrator U1-8, which outputs a voltage to control
passbank drive (when in light control). For the first millisecond of every exposure, the output of U1-8
is forced to a small positive voltage, sufficient to maintain about 5 amps of tube current, by U1-14,
through electronic switch U6. One millisecond into the exposure, the switch opens. At this time, if
the POWER PHOTOCELL signal is less than 75% of the TUBE POWER REQUEST signal, switch U6
contacts 6 to 7 are closed, and the input to integrator U1-8 is forced to a high negative. The integrator
output moves positive, increasing passbank drive, and the POWER PHOTOCELL signal should
increase as the tube current increases. When the POWER PHOTOCELL signal reaches 75% of the
TUBE POWER REQUEST signal, the voltage divider R28/R58 input to U20-1 will go negative, and
the output of U20-1 will go low, resetting U11, and opening switch U6 pins 6 to 7. From this point,
the output of integrator U1-8 is controlled by the POWER PHOTOCELL signal and TUBE POWER
REQUEST (inverted by U1-7). When working properly, the U1-8 output will control passbank drive
so that the POWER PHOTOCELL signal is equal to the TUBE POWER REQUEST voltage.

TROUBLESHOOTING NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


5-24 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

The Control Electronics measures laser power by sending the POWER PHOTOCELL signal through
its ADC circuitry. It measures the laser power repeatedly, through the duration of an exposure. This
error could indicate a real overpower occurrence, or a false detection by the Control Electronics.
Check for proper operation of the light control circuitry. If the light control circuitry is working, the
TUBE POWER REQUEST and POWER PHOTOCELL signals will be brought equal within a few
milliseconds of the beginning of the exposure.

E207 - The “no aiming beam” error occurs during power up initialization and self tests, when, after the HeNe is
turned on, the /AIMING BEAM/ signal from the safety photocell circuit on the photo-sensor
board does not go to at least -.11VDC (grnd ref) as the polarizing wheel is turned through its
range.

(Refer to 8-15) A 10 microwatt aiming beam is sufficient to cause the output of U2-7 to reach -.11
volts. The signal leaves the photo-sensor board at J60-11, and goes to control electronics J11-11. The
/AIMING/ signal is input to MULTIPLEXER U44, pin 6, where it can be selected and sent through
U44 to the ADC circuit for conversion to a digital value which can be read by the microprocessor.

The /HENE ENABLE/ signal (TIMER-I/O U30, pin 11 output) is set low by the microprocessor
during power up initialization and self tests. The /HENE ENABLE/ signal leaves the control elec-
tronics at J10-11 (via U66E), and goes to the HeNe power supply. The low should turn on the HeNe
tube. The HeNe power supply runs of 12VDC from control electronics J10. This error could be
caused by a HeNe enable or 12VDC failure, HeNe power supply failure, HeNe tube failure, misalign-
ment in the optics assembly, a failure in the photo-sensor circuit that detects HeNe power, or a failure
of the Control Electronics.

E208 - A “hardware failed to terminate exposure” error occurs when an exposure continues beyond the requested
time, and is not terminated by the hardware (software had to terminate the exposure). If this fault
occurs, it indicates that there may be two problems; the exposure continued after the control
electronics power request, and the safety monitor overtime circuit failed to terminate the
exposure. It is possible that the actual problem lies in the control electronics, and that the
exposure was not actually too long. If this error persists, turn the system off, and then back on,
to run the power up initialization and self tests. If the self tests pass, the safety monitor overtime
fault circuit is probably OK. Replace the control electronics board.

E210/E211/E212 - These three error codes are all tested during the laser firing of the power up initialization and
self test sequence. In this self test, the software initiates a 1000mw, 100msec exposure, and then
increases the TUBE POWER REQUEST signal to the laser power supply to request 1400mw, but
leaves the SM TREAT LEVEL signal to the safety monitor at the 1000mw level. When the laser
power supply responds to raise the power out of the tube, the safety monitor sees the increase
via the safety photocell SAFETY PHOTOCELL POWER signal. When the SAFETY PHOTOCELL
POWER signal exceeds the SM TREAT LEVEL signal by 20%, then safety monitor overpower
circuit should respond by:

• Setting the /SHUTDOWN/ signal low, to crowbar the laser power supply and end
the exposure. If this fails to happen, the E210 error occurs.

• Closing the safety shutter. If this fails to happen, the E211 error occurs.

• Setting the /SMERR3 OVERPOWER/ signal low to report the detected overpower
to the Control Electronics. If this fails to happen, the E212 error occurs.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING


0614-134-01 08/98 5-25
®
®

(Refer to 8-8) After cathode warm-up, the Control Electronics tests the safety monitor overpower fault
detection circuit by sending a LASER POWER REQUEST signal to the laser power supply which is
40% higher than the SM TREAT LEVEL signal sent to the Safety Monitor PCB. The DIFFERENCE
AMP U17B outputs the difference voltage between SAFETY PHOTOCELL POWER (via U15B and
U15C) and the SM TREAT LEVEL (via U17A). The output polarity indicates which signal input is
larger; A positive U17B output if SAFETY PHOTOCELL POWER > SM TREAT LEVEL, or negative
U17B output if SAFETY PHOTOCELL POWER < SM TREAT LEVEL. For this self test, SAFETY
PHOTOCELL POWER should be 40% higher than the SM TREAT LEVEL signal, so the output of the
difference amp should be a positive voltage. The U17B output is sent to comparator U18B, where it is
compared to output of the 20% voltage divider RP4/R11. The voltage divider output is 20% of the
SM TREAT LEVEL signal, e.g., 20% of the requested power. U18B’s output goes high if the output of
U17B is a higher voltage than the output of the 20% voltage divider circuit, which should be true for
this self test. The resulting high out of U18B goes to and gate U14C, whose other input (GO) should
already be high, resulting in a high out of U14C. The high out of the and gate goes two places:

• To INVERTER U6B to set the /SMERR3 UNDERPOWER/ signal low, which leaves
the board and is sent to the Control Electronics to report the error.

• Forces NOR GATE U13B low, which forces AND GATE U8D output low, trigger-
ing TIMER U3A. The /Q/ output of U3A goes low for 50msecs. This low is sent to
the laser power supply through U10C as /SHUTDOWN/, to activate the crowbar.
The low out of U3B is also used to turn off Q1 (through U12A and U10A), which
opens the SAFETY SHUTTER DRIVE line to the safety shutter solenoid, moving the
safety shutter into the beam path.

E213/E214/E215 - These three errors are tested during laser firing of the power up initialization and self test
sequence. The software initiates a 1000mw, 50 msec exposure, and allows the EXPOSURE
TIMER active signal to the safety monitor to end 5 msecs earlier than the EXPOSURE TIMER
active signal to the laser power supply. When the EXPOSURE TIMER signal to the safety monitor
drops low, indicating the treatment should have timed out, the safety photocell continues to see
treatment power, as the laser power supply EXPOSURE TIMER signal stays high. The safety
monitor overtime circuit should respond by:

• Setting the /SHUTDOWN/ signal low, to crowbar the laser power supply and end
the exposure. If this fails to happen, the E213 error occurs.

• Closing the safety shutter. If this fails to happen, the E214 error occurs.

• Setting the /SMERR5 OVERTIME/ signal low to report the detected overtime to
the Control Electronics. If this fails to happen, the E215 error occurs.

(Refer to 8-8) The overtime circuit monitors both the footswitch and EXPOSURE TIME signals, and
causes a fault if SAFETY PHOTOCELL POWER continues more than two milliseconds past the
footswitch being released, or the EXPOSURE TIMER signal going low. These three faults test the
EXPOSURE TIMER + 2msec portion of the circuit. The software initiates an exposure, and then drops
the EXPOSURE TIMER signal to the safety monitor low, while keeping the same signal to the laser
power supply high (for 5 msec's longer). The high to low transition on the EXPOSURE TIMER line
triggers U5B, which outputs a 2 msec high on its Q output, to U7A. The other input to U7A is the
EXPOSURE TIMER signal. Two msecs after the EXPOSURE TIMER signal goes low, the Q out put
from U5B goes low, allowing the output of U7A (EXP+2Mmsec) to go low. The low is inverted (U9A)
and sent to U8A. The other input to U8A is > MIN SIGNAL. If the > MIN SIGNAL is still high
(indicating treatment power is still being delivered) when the EXP + 2msec's goes low, the U8A
output goes high, which is the detected fault condition.
TROUBLESHOOTING NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL
5-26 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

E216/E217/E218 - These three errors are tested during laser firing of the power up initialization and self test
sequence, if the attached delivery system has a moving (or selectable) eye safety filter. The
software initiates a 1000mw exposure, and then releases the eye safety filter. The safety monitor
ESF out circuit should respond by:

• Setting the /SHUTDOWN/ signal low, to crowbar the laser power supply and end
the exposure. If this fails to happen, the E216 error occurs.

• Closing the safety shutter. If this fails to happen, the E217 error occurs.

• Setting the /SMERR5 OVERTIME/ signal low to report the detected overtime to
the Control Electronics. If this fails to happen, the E218 error occurs.

(Refer to 8-8) The eye safety filter position is reported to the safety monitor board by the GO and /
GO/ signals (GO is high, /GO/ is low, when the filter is pulled in to protect the operator). When the
eye safety filter is in place, the output of U12C will be high. The high is inverted by U11D and
applied to U8C. The other input to U8C is > MIN SIGNAL, which is high when treatment power is
present at the safety photocell. When the software pulls out the eye safety filter, the GO and /GO/
signals reverse, resulting in a high in at pin 9 of U8C, and, since the treatment power continues, the
output of U8C goes high, the detected fault condition. The software checks to see that treatment
power is terminated, the safety shutter is moved in, and the /SMERR 5 OVERTIME/ fault is re-
ported. The reported errors indicate which of these did not happen.

E219 - A “safety monitor returned incorrect code during underpower” error is tested during the fifth laser firing
of the power up initialization and self test sequence. The software initiates an exposure and
forces an underpower condition by setting the TUBE POWER REQUEST signal level 40% lower
than the SM TREAT LEVEL signal. The safety monitor underpower circuit should report an
underpower condition to the Control Electronics by setting the /SMERR 3 UNDER POWER/
signal low. If the safety monitor fails to report the underpower condition, the E219 error occurs.
Troubleshoot the safety monitor underpower circuitry.

E220 - A “safety monitor returned incorrect code during undertime” error is tested during the seventh laser firing
of the power up initialization and self test sequence. The software initiates an exposure, and
forces an undertime fault by holding the SAFETY MONITOR EXPOSURE TIMER signal to the
Safety Monitor PCB high 5 msecs longer than the EXPOSURE TIME signal to the Laser Power
Supply. The safety monitor undertime circuit should report the undertime condition to the
Control Electronics by setting the /SMERR 2 UNDERTIME/ signal low. If the safety monitor
fails to report the undertime condition, the E219 error occurs. Troubleshoot the safety monitor
undertime circuitry.

E221 - A “safety monitor detected overpower” error occurs when, during an exposure, the safety monitor reports
that actual power, as measured by the safety photocell, exceeds requested power (SM TREAT
LEVEL) by 20% or more. Check the calibration of the safety and power photocell circuits, and
the outputs of the SM TREAT LEVEL and TUBE POWER REQUEST DACs, if these are OK, go
to current control and confirm that tube current can be adjusted through its range by the current
control knob. If not, troubleshoot the laser power supply passbank drive and passbank. If
current control operates properly, check the light control circuitry in the laser power supply if
the light control circuitry operates normally, check the safety monitor overpower circuitry for a
false detection of the error.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING


0614-134-01 08/98 5-27
®
®

E222 - A “safety monitor detected overtime” error occurs when, during an exposure, the safety monitor reports
that the treatment power, as measured by the safety photocell, continued for more than 2 msecs
after the EXPOSURE TIMER signal went to its low state, or the footswitch was released.

E224 - A “safety monitor detected undertime” error occurs when, during an exposure, the safety monitor detects
the GREATER THAN MINIMUM SIGNAL (POWER) signal drops low more than 1 msec before
the EXPOSURE TIME signal drops low to end an exposure.

E225 - A “safety monitor detected eye safety filter out” error occurs when the safety monitor detects the eye safety
filter out (GO is low, /GO/ is high) while the safety photocell is indicating the presence of
treatment power (GREATER THAN MINIMUM SIGNAL (POWER) is high). Check for proper
operation of the eye safety filter, the eye safety filter drive from the Control Electronics, the eye
safety filter position sensor, and the Control Electronics circuits which process the eye safety filter
signal to generate the GO and /GO/ signals. The eye safety filter is driven by the Control
Electronics /SOL DRIVE A/ low from U30 pin 33, which is inverted to turn on Q4, the ground
return path for the 34VDC supplied to the eye safety filter solenoid. The 34VDC is made from
the 24VAC used to power the main contactor.

E230/231 - The “safety shutter not closed” (E230) or “safety shutter not open” (E231) errors occur when the safety
shutter position sensor output indicates that the shutter is out, when the software wants it in, or
in, when the software wants it out. The safety solenoid energizes to pull the shutter out of the
beam path. The shutter solenoid is supplied with 12VDC from the Control Electronics (J3-2), and
can be disabled by the Control Electronics or Safety Monitor, either of which can independently
open the ground return path to the solenoid. The Control Electronics controls the safety shutter
position with its /SS DRIVE/ signal from U31 pin 26, turning Q3 on /off via INVERTER U63D.
The 12VDC and SAFETY SHUTTER DRIVE pass through the Safety Monitor PCB in route to the
shutter solenoid. Q1 on the Safety Monitor PCB must be on in order for the SAFETY SHUTTER
DRIVE path to be complete. The Safety Monitor turns Q1 off to close the safety shutter when it
detects overpower, overtime, ESF, > max power, or SS OPEN->MIN & FSW INACTIVE faults.
Two opto-detectors sense the position of the safety shutter, and return the SS OPEN, SS CLOSED
signals to the Control Electronics.

E233 - The "eye safety filter not removed” error occurs when the eye safety filter position sensor indicates the eye
safety filter is in, when it should be out. The eye safety filter is driven by the Control Electronics
/SOL DRIVE A/ low from U30 pin 33, which is inverted to turn on Q4, the ground return path
for the 34VDC supplied to the eye safety filter solenoid. The 34VDC is made from the 24VAC
used to power the main contactor. The eye safety filter provides an indication of its position
through the footswitch cable to J3-8 of the Control Electronics. The signal is high when the eye
safety filter is inserted, and low when the eye safety filter is removed. This fault will appear when
an attached LDS-20 is not turned on during the power up self tests.

E234/E235 - The “green filter not inserted” (E234) or “green filter not removed” (E235) errors occur when the green
only filter position sensors indicate the green only filter is not in the position the software expects
it to be in.

(Refer to 8-6) The green only filter solenoid is supplied with 12VDC and ground from the Control
Electronics board. The /GRN DRV/ signal from TIMER-I/O U31 pin 10, through inverter U63C,
turns on/off Q2 to close/open the ground return line, turning the solenoid on/off. Two opto-
detectors at the filter sense the filter position, providing a GREEN IN and GREEN OUT signal back to
the control electronics. The two sensor signals are routed through isolation amplifiers U64F and
U64E to U31 input ports pins 8/9.

TROUBLESHOOTING NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


5-28 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

E236 - A “no coolant flow” error occurs when the flow sensor in the coolant loop outputs a “no flow” high to the
Control Electronics.

The COOLANT FLOW signal goes from the flow switch to Control Electronics J18-2, and through
ISOLATION AMPLIFIER U66F, to TIMER-I/O U31 pin 11. The flow switch closes on a flow of .5
GPM or greater. No coolant flow could result from a pump motor or pump failure, or restriction in
the coolant flow loop.

E238 - Any of the laser firings were skipped (due to other faults). Most often, this fault appears with other faults,
indicating that some self test laser firings were skipped due to the detection of the other faults.

The error can be caused by a degraded tube, low AC power, magnet, filament transformer, or a
malfunction in the control electronics, power photocell circuit, or laser power supply. If the tube is
not starting, or not making enough power, see topic 5.6, NO/LOW POWER PROBLEMS.

E239 - A " some power on self tests omitted" error occurs when the software is unable to conduct one or more of
the "laser on" self tests. For example, if the safety shutter can not be closed, the test firings do not
occur, and, along with an error code indicating that the safety shutter was not moving in, the E239
would occur to indicate that the "laser on" tests were not conducted. There are a number of
conditions which can cause the E239 error to occur, although most will also cause other errors
to be displayed as well: hazard condition, could not reach 85% of power, Eye Safety Filter will
not move into place, etc..

E241/E242/E243/E244/E245 -These are the spurious error faults. These faults are reported during the laser on self
tests, when the software reads in the safety monitor error lines, via the "1's catcher", and finds an
error has been reported from the safety monitor, when none was expected.

E241 - Spurious overpower.

E242 - Spurious overtime.

E243 - Spurious ESF out.

E244 - Spurious underpower error.

E245 - Spurious undertime error.

E246 - Safety Monitor Test bit stuck on.

E300 - A “software bug “ error occurs when the software detects an inconsistent state which never should have
happened. This typically indicates a software problem. The shot count display will show a
program line number which will help the software engineer in fixing the problem. If an E300
error occurs, record the line number that appears in the shot count display, and notify technical
support.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING


0614-134-01 08/98 5-29
®
®

5.7 OVER/UNDER POWER PROBLEMS

Over or under power problems with the NOVUS are normally indicated by one or more of the following
error codes/conditions:

E205 - The software has read the output of the power photocell, compared it to the requested power
level, and found delivered power is more than 125% of requested power.

UNDERPOWER CONDITION - The software has read the output of the power photocell, compared
it to the requested power level, and found delivered power is less than 75% of requested power. In
this case the system is placed in Standby, and the power display is decreased (approximately 10%).

E221 - The safety monitor overpower circuit has read the output of the safety photocell, compared it
to the requested power level, and found that measured power exceeds requested power by 20% or
more.

Most often, if the tube is starting, over or underpower faults occur as a result of an improperly calibrated
power/safety photocell circuit, or in the case of underpower faults only, low line voltage. There have also
been problems associated with the Green Filter and Photocell beam splitter optics.

Problems with line voltage show up as "failed to reach" or "underpower condition" towards the top of the
power ranges, while lower power settings will work. Measure the line voltage UNDER LOAD, that is, when
the laser is firing at a power setting that is faulting. Note that the tube is working hardest when making
maximum GREEN ONLY power.

The E239 error will appear on systems where the tube itself is not ionizing, has degraded performance, or
where there is a failure in the laser power supply circuitry. The E238 error will occur during power up self
tests, with delivery systems that do not have moving eye safety filters, when the proper jumper plug is not
installed on the system.

To start, the tube needs:

Cathode current (typically 24-25 amps). Cathode current should be present whenever the unit is on.

Magnet on, The magnet is turned on by the signal /MAGNET ON/, from the Control Electronics to
the laser power supply regulator PC. The signal goes low three zero crossings before the exposure
starts (at the same time as /RAMP UP/). The signal remains low throughout the duration of the
exposure.

B+ RAMP UP, In the single phase system only. It is used to raise B+ from its 155VDC resting voltage
to around 170VDC (B- ref) (Actually the voltage level that is reached at ramp up varies with the level
of AC voltage supplied to the system, and can be much higher than 170VDC). The /RAMP UP/
signal is generated by the Control Electronics and sent to the laser power supply regulator PCB.
Three zero crossings before the exposure starts, the Control Electronics sets the /RAMP UP / signal
low, and keeps it low until just before tube start. The regulator board SCR firing control circuitry
forces both of the SCR's to fire at the beginning of their respective positive half cycles, throughout the
period of /RAMP UP/ low. This forces the B+ voltage up, in preparation for the tube start.

TROUBLESHOOTING NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


5-30 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

Passbank bias, which, at tube start time, is forced to a level which provides about 5 amps of tube
current at tube start. This low current bias is always used at tube start time, and then, 1 msec after
the tube is started, the passbank bias begins to move towards whatever level is necessary to maintain
the requested tube power. Check for turn on passbank bias directly at the MOSFET gates. It should
be approximately 10 to 11 Volts (B- ref) for the single phase, and 6.2 Volts for the three phase. Both
these values represent max MOSFET drive. As soon as the tube starts making power, the light
control will begin to back these voltages down. For the single phase and three phase systems,
normally 4 to 5 Volts once the tube is started.

/START/ low , from the Control Electronics, to the laser power supply power regulator PCB. DS4
(single phase)/D21 (three phase) on the power regulator PCB flashes to indicate that the FET Q2
turned on, which causes the discharge of C29 through the starter transformer. The best method for
checking for the START pulse is to use a high voltage probe at the tube anode. Hook the probe
ground lead to ground, and look for a 100µsec positive pulse of between 800 to 1500 Volts.

If the tube is not starting, check the four fuses on the regulator PCB, and visually inspect the MOSFET pack-
ages. Blown MOSFETS tend to bulge out (a little bit) on the side. The crowbar circuit is also a possible cause.
In this case, the crowbar SCR gates on due to noise or component failure, during the exposure, creating a
shunt path for current around the tube. If all other indications are good, and the MOSFETs are good, open
the shunt path by disconnecting the inductor( L1 in the single phase, L6 in the three phase), and then see if
the tube will start. If the tube starts, there is a failure in the crowbar circuit.

SINGLE PHASE POWER REGULATOR INDICTOR LIGHTS:

DS1 - RED, Shutdown indicator. This light turns on while a shutdown is occurring. A shutdown
signal can originate in the control electronics, safety monitor, or the passbank thermostat.

DS2 - YELLOW, magnet indicator. Turns on while the magnet is on. The magnet is turned on 3 zero
crossings before each exposure, and is kept on throughout the exposure. If B+ is above 155 VDC (B-
ref) at the end of the exposure, the magnet remains on to help drain the B+ voltage back down to its
155VDC level.

DS3 - YELLOW, Start pulse indicator. Flashes on with each start pulse to the tube.

DS4 - RED, Cap charge indicator. Flashes at a rate proportional to the charge on the B+ power supply
capacitors. When off, B+ is below 10VDC (B- ref). Use this indicator to see what is happening to B+,
but do not rely on this as an indication that it is safe to touch any of the laser power supply circuitry.
Turn off the unit and discharge the capacitors, in every case, before coming into contact with laser
power supply components.

DS5 - YELLOW, expose indicator. Turns on while the signal EXPOSURE TIMER is high. The EXPO-
SURE TIMER signal originates at the Control Electronics, and is high for the length of exposure.

THREE PHASE INDICATOR LIGHTS

POWER REGULATOR PCB:

DS1 - YELLOW, magnet indicator. Turns on with the turn on of Q2, which supplies B=/B- to the
magnet.

DS2 - YELLOW, start pulse indicator. Pulse on when the output of U24-3 goes high (start command).
NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING
0614-134-01 08/98 5-31
®
®

DS3 - GREEN, interlock indicator. Turns off if the LEM is disconnected, or the Interlock signal from
the IGBT Drive Power Amplifier is not supplying light through the INTERLOCK light fiber. If the
light is off, check the interlock light fiber, LEM, and the +/-12VDC (P- ref) supply outputs.

DS4 - RED, shutdown indicator. Lights when the crowbar is active.

DS5 - YELLOW, the IGBT on indicator. Is on when the IGBT GATE DRIVE TIMING CONTROL is
sending an "ON" command over the IGBT CONTROL light fiber.

DS6 - RED, B+ ≥10V. Flashes at a rate proportional to the charge on B+.

DS7 - YELLOW, expose indicator. Turns on while the signal EXPOSURE TIMER is high. The EXPO-
SURE TIMER signal originates at the Control Electronics, and is high for the length of exposure.

IGBT DRIVE POWER AMPLIFIER PCB:

DS1 - GREEN, IGBT ON/DS2 -YELLOW, IGBT OFF -These two indicators indicate by the their
relative intensities, the ratio of IGBT on time to IGBT off time.

P+ CHARGED RELAXATION INDICATOR - Although shown on early revisions of the prints, this
indicator is not implemented.

5.8 SEQUENCE OF EVENTS

The following subtopics provide the sequence of events for the power up initialization and self test, main
loop, and exposure sequences. 5.7.1 is the initialization and self test sequence. 5.7.2 is the main loop se-
quence. 5.7.3 is the exposure sequence.

5.8.1 Initialization and Self Test Sequence

Once the main contactor closes, the software runs through the following sequence of events, before moving to
the standby condition ("*" indicate visual/audible indications of the step can be observed):

1.) NVRAM BATTERY CHECK - The lithium battery in each of the two NVRAM chips is tested. If
the test fails, an E102 error occurs. This error can be cleared by any front panel input.

2.) INITIALIZE THE TIMER-I/O CHIPS - The three Z8536 chips in the Control Electronics are
initialized. The microprocessor writes to internal registers within each chip to configure its ports,
and timers. If any failure is noted at the initialization, the E111 (U29), E112 (U30), or E113 (U31)
error(s) occur.

3.) READ THE FLOW SENSOR - At this point, the pump has not had time to create the .5gpm water
flow required to close the switch. The software expects the switch to show insufficient flow. If it
does not, the flow switch is assumed to be bad, and the system will beep three times and then
shutdown, but not until step 23.

TROUBLESHOOTING NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


5-32 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

4.) RAM CHECKERBOARD TEST - The NVRAM is tested. If the test fails, it is re-tried until suc-
cessful. No error is reported.

5.) RAM INITIALIZATION - The "RAM" portion of the NVRAM is initialized.

6.) UART CHANNEL B DISABLED - The channel B port of the DUART, which is used for diagnos-
tics, is disabled.

7.) START CATHODE WARM-UP TIMER - A 30 second timer is started. Laser firing is not enabled
until this warm-up period is complete.

8.) MEASURE HENE BACKGROUND - With the HeNe off, the aiming beam power circuit output is
measured.

*9.) AIMING BEAM - The HeNe is turned on, so that any HeNe noise that might interfere with
circuit operation will be present during the self tests.

10.) NVRAM INITIALIZE - The NVRAM portion of the NVRAM is initialized, if not already initial-
ized.

11.) TIMER CHECK - The hardware timers in the U29 and U30 chips are tested against a software
timer.

12.) CHECK POWER SUPPLY +/- 15VDC - The +15 and -15 VDC (ground ref) are checked using the
ADC circuit. The voltage measured must be within 1.5%. If the supplies are greatly out, the
ADC itself will not work. If a test fails, the E140 (+15) or E141 (-15) errors occur.

13.) DAC READBACK CHECK - The U49 and U50 DAC outputs are checked by reading their
outputs back through the ADC circuit. Each DAC is run through its entire range of outputs.
Three different checks are done; the power supply DAC is readback through the ADC directly,
the power supply DAC is readback via the laser power supply ECHO TUBE POWER circuit, and
the safety monitor DAC is read back via the ECHO SM TREAT circuit on the safety monitor.

14.) REMOTE INTERLOCK CHECK - The remote interlock is checked. The loop must be complete,
or an E3 error will occur.

15.) DELIVERY SYSTEM CHECK - The smart fiber voltage is read to determine what type of
delivery system is connected to the system. If an invalid voltage is read, an E1 error occurs.

*16.) SAFETY SHUTTER CHECK - The safety shutter is moved in and out, and the sensor voltages
read to check for proper operation. If the sensors indicate a problem, the E230 (safety shutter not
closed) or E231 (safety shutter not open) error occurs. Note that the HeNe is turned off during
this check to prevent any laser emission.

*17.) GREEN FILTER CHECK - The green filter is moved in and out, and the position sensor outputs
are read. If the sensor outputs are not as expected, an E234 (green filter not inserted) or E235
(green filter not removed) error occurs.

*18.) EYE SAFETY FILTER CHECK - The eye safety filter (if movable) is moved in and out, and the
sensor outputs are read. If the outputs are not as expected, an or E233 or E2 error occurs.
NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING
0614-134-01 08/98 5-33
®
®

*19.) WATCHDOG CHECKS - A series of checks are run on the watchdog. The watchdog outputs
are checked before triggering. The watchdog is triggered, and a software timer times the dura-
tion of the highdog and lowdog timer pulses. The watchdog is triggered early, and then trig-
gered after a watchdog time-out. During these tests, some action of the watchdog circuit LED
can be observed. Any of the watchdog self test errors, E120 through E126, as appropriate, are
reported.

20.) CRYSTAL TIMING CHECK - The two timers are checked for mutually consistentency. The
tolerance is ±5%.

21.) ENABLE TIMEBASE INTERRUPTS - Timebase interrupts are enabled. Once enabled, the
timebase interrupt occurs every 5 msecs, and is used to service the watchdog and HeNe attenua-
tor motor, and to time various software events.

22.) ROM CHECK - A cycle redundancy check is done on the ROM. If the test fails, the E101 error
occurs.

23.) COOLING SYSTEM CHECK - Check the coolant flow and temperature.

24.) NO FLOW TRIP - If the flow switch was found to be defective, or low has not reached .5gpm,
beep three times, then trip the main contactor.

*25.) LOCATE AIMING POWER MIN - The aiming beam attenuator wheel is turned through 210
degrees, and the aiming beam power signal is read every 5 degrees, to find the minimum power
point. The attenuator wheel is positioned at the minimum power position. The aiming beam
power signal (from the safety photocell) goes more negative as aiming beam power increases.

26.) TREATMENT PARAMETER INIT - The treatment parameter pointers are kept in NVRAM.
Tables with all valid power settings and exposure times are permanently stored in ROM. In this
check, the pointers in NVRAM are checked against the tables for validity. If the pointers do not
point to valid table entries, the default is min power/exposure time. This means that normally,
the system will come up at the power and exposure time in use before the last turn off. Color (all
lines or green only) is also remembered. “Standby” and “rep mode off” are forced.

27.) CATHODE WARM-UP WAIT - Once all of the previous complete, the cathode warm up period
delays the remaining (laser on) self tests. A few of the previous tests, if failed, will continue to be
re-tested through the warm-up period. The wait time counts down in the display, along with any
error codes reported from the previous self tests.

Once the cathode warm-up time is completed, the following "laser on" tests are done (all are skipped in
service mode). Each firing is separated by at least .25 seconds to provide visibly distinct flashes. In each
firing, the laser is turned on, the software waits until power reaches at least 85% of requested, and then waits
another 10 milliseconds before continuing the test. The 10 millisecond delay insures a visible flash of light for
each test. In some cases it is not possible to do one or more tests (e.g. - power does not reach 85%, or, safety
shutter will not move in). In this case, the E239 error is displayed.

TROUBLESHOOTING NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


5-34 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

*28.) PREPARE FOR LASER FIRING - The safety shutter is closed, the eye safety filter is inserted,
and the safety monitor test bit is set (simulates depression of footswitch to safety monitor and
laser power supply). The watchdog is enabled, and then a three second delay allows the laser
power supply to charge the caps to 155VDC (ref B-). Up to this point, the /SUPPLYOFF/ signal
has been low, and the SCR’s were not firing (no B+). The power supply shutdown (crowbar)
signal is set, and .5 msec later, the crowbar fail signal is read (an E200 error will occur if this check
does not pass).

*29.) FOUR WARM UP FIRINGS - The laser is fired four times, 1000mw, 200msecs each. These
dummy shots are used to overcome hard starting problems.

From this point, the nine "laser on" self tests are done:

*30.) NORMAL EXPOSURE - A 1000 mW, 200 msec exposure is done. Power is measured, and if a
deviation of more than 25% of requested power occurs, the overpower (E205) or underpower
(E206) error occurs.

31.) SAFETY MONITOR TEST BIT SET - The safety monitor test bit is turned off. It should not be
possible to operate the laser. The software tries to turn on the laser, and, if any power is detected,
E246 occurs.

*32.) SOFTWARE SHUTDOWN - A 1000mW, 100 msec exposure is initiated. The software issues a
/SHUTDOWN/ low, waits .5 msecs, and then reads power photocell voltage. The power
photocell voltage must be no more than 50 mv (grnd ref). If the power photocell reads greater
than 50mv (grnd ref) after the .5 msec wait, an E201 error occurs.

*33.) WATCHDOG SHUTDOWN - A 1000 mW, 100 msec exposure is initiated. The software stops
servicing the watchdog. After 10 msecs, the power photocell is read. The power photocell
voltage must be no more than 50mv (grnd ref). When the watchdog is not triggered, the highdog
timer should time out, disabling the laser power supply. If this test fails, an E129 error occurs.
After the test, the watchdog is restarted.

*34.) OVERPOWER CHECK - A 1000mW, 100 msec exposure is initiated. The power is surged to
1400mW by raising the power supply DAC output (40% increase). The safety monitor DAC
output remains at the 1000mW level. After 5 msecs, the power photocell must be reading no
more than 50mv (grnd ref), the safety monitor must be trying to close the safety shutter, and the /
SMERR 6 OVERPOWER/ signal must be low. If the safety monitor fails to shutdown the laser
power supply, the E210 error occurs. If the safety monitor fails to shut the safety shutter, the
E211 error occurs. If the safety monitor fails to set the SMERR 6 OVERPOWER bit low, the E212
error occurs.

*35.) UNDERPOWER CHECK - A 1000 mW, 100 msec exposure is initiated. The power is dipped to
600 mW’s by lowering the laser power supply DAC output (40%). The safety monitor DAC
output remains at the 1000 mW level. After 5 msecs, the /SMERR 3 UNDERPOWER/ signal
must be low. If the safety monitor fails to set the /SMERR 3 UNDERPOWER/ bit low, the E219
error occurs.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING


0614-134-01 08/98 5-35
®
®

*36.) OVERTIME CHECK - A 1000 mW, 50 msec exposure is initiated. The safety monitor exposure
timer is set 5 msecs shorter than the laser power supply exposure timer. 4 msecs after the safety
monitor time ends, the power photocell output must be no more than 50mv’s (gnd ref), the safety
monitor must be trying to close the safety shutter, and the /SMERR 5 OVERTIME/ bit must be
set. If the safety monitor fails to shutdown the laser power supply, an E213 error occurs. If the
safety monitor fails to shut the safety shutter an E214 error occurs. If the safety monitor fails to
set the /SMERR 5 OVERTIME / bit, an E215 error occurs.

*37.) UNDERTIME CHECK - An exposure is initiated. The safety monitor exposure timer is set 5
msecs longer than the laser power supply exposure timer. 2 msecs after the timing signal to the
laser power supply is dropped, the safety monitor must have set the /SMERR 2 UNDERTIME/
bit low. If the safety monitor fails to set the /SMERR 2 UNDERTIME/ bit low, an E220 error
occurs.

*38.) ESF OUT CHECK - (This check is skipped on delivery systems with nonmoving safety filters)
An exposure is initiated. The eye safety filter is removed during the exposure. Two msecs after
the sensor indicates removal, the power photocell output must be less than 50mv (grnd ref), the
safety monitor must be trying to shut the safety shutter, and the safety monitor must have set the
/SMERR 4 ESF OUT/ bit low. If the eye safety filter fails to move out, an E238 error occurs. If
the safety monitor fails to shutdown the laser power supply, an E216 error occurs. If the safety
monitor fails to close the safety shutter, an E217 error occurs. If the safety monitor fails to set the
/SMERR 2 ESF OUT/ bit low, an E218 error occurs.

39.) ENABLE WATCHDOG SERVICE

40.) RS-485 COMMUNICATION INIT. - Communications begin between the front panel and
Control Electronics. The front panel should go to its standby condition.

*41.) BEEP - Beep at 1111 Hz for .3 seconds, and 889 Hz for .5 seconds.

42.) EXIT - Enter the main program loop.

5.8.3 Main Loop Sequence

After completion of power up initialization and self test, the software runs in a loop as indicated below.
When an exposure sequence begins, the main loop is exited, and the exposure sequence is run.

1.) ZERO MAIN PROGRAM DEAD COUNTER - In order to insure that the main loop runs regu-
larly, a counter which is serviced during the time base interrupt is zeroed every time the main
program loop runs. If the main program loop does not reset the counter before it reaches a
specified count, (and the watchdog continues to be serviced, and so doesn’t fault ), the counter
will cause an E105 error to occur (detected at the same time the counter is incremented, timebase
interrupt time).

2.) CONTROL PANEL COMMUNICATION - The program checks for any reply from the display
over the RS-485 bus. If there is a reply ready, it is read in from the DUART, checked for correct-
ness, and then the next message is transmitted.

3.) DIAGNOSTICS - If there are any diagnostic requests from the external RS-232 port, they are done
at this time.

TROUBLESHOOTING NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


5-36 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

4.) FOOTSWITCH CHECK - If the footswitch is depressed, reset the inactivity counter.

5.) CHECK FOR EXIT TO TREATMENT - If the footswitch has made an off to on transitions, no
errors are disabling laser operation, and the laser is in ready, go to the exposure sequence.

6.) SYSTEM STATUS CHECK - The software checks system status, as indicated below, setting or
clearing error conditions accordingly:

a.) Check safety shutter position. (Ignored for 100 msecs after a motion command is
given, to allow the motion to complete).

b.) Check remote interlock.

c.) Check +/- 15VDC (gnd ref) supplies.d.) Check for presence of laser power (there
shouldn’t be any).

e.) Check green filter position (Ignored for 100 msecs after a motion command is
given, to allow the motion to complete).

f.) Check the smart fiber voltage to determine the type of delivery system attached.

g.) Check the eye safety filter position (Ignored for 100 msecs after a motion com-
mand is given, to allow the motion to complete).

h.) Check flow sensor and coolant temperature sensor.

i.) If the system is in service mode, check for current or light regulation at the laser
power supply. This check is done by loading the laser power supply DAC with 5V,
and then measuring the ECHO TUBE POWER back from the laser power supply. In
current control, the ECHO TUBE POWER request will be approximately 0 vdc (grnd
ref.) regardless of the DAC output. If current control mode is sensed, the +/- 15VDC
power supply checks are bypassed on subsequent loops, allowing the technician to
disconnect the connector to the photocell power sense board without getting an E205
or E206 error. Disconnecting the connector enables the technician to position the
wedge optic so that the two beam samples strike the photocells on the photo-sensor
board.

j.) Check for slit lamp beam block (LDS10A systems ).

7.) LOOP BACK - Go to the beginning of the main loop and start again.

5.8.4 Exposure Sequence

The exposure sequence is entered from the main program loop, after a footswitch open to close transition is
detected, if the laser is in ready, and no errors which disable laser operation are active. Treatment power
ends when the exposure time expires, the footswitch is released, or the when a malfunction is detected. The
sequence is as follows:

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING


0614-134-01 08/98 5-37
®
®

1.) Insert the eye safety filter (For systems with movable eye safety filters). The software reads the
sensor and waits until the filter has been inserted. If the filter sensor does not respond in 500
msecs, the treatment is aborted, and an E2 error will occur.

2.) Re-check the footswitch, and if there are no error conditions active, proceed with the exposure
sequence

3.) Wait for intershot delay. A timer which is incremented during timebase interrupt is checked. It
times out to indicate that a sufficient delay has been provided between previous laser firing and
the firing about to occur. The delay is required to satisfy hardware constraints in the laser power
supply.

4.) Enable zero crossing interrupts. The software will be notified of each zero crossing, so that it can
provide proper timing of the control signals to the laser power supply.

5.) Wait for first zero crossing.

6.) Set /RAMP UP/ to laser power supply low (active). The single phase laser power supply firing
control circuits respond by firing the SCRS at the beginning of each their respective half cycles,
raising B+ towards 170 (or more, depending on the AC supply voltage level) VDC (B- ref) in
preparation for the tube start.

7.) Set /MAGNET/ low (active). The laser power supply magnet control circuits respond by turning
on magnet supply voltage.

8.) Calculate the DAC outputs, and load the DACs. DAC voltage is determined by the system
calibration of 2.5VDC /watt. If the power supply is in current control, the safety monitor DAC is
loaded with maximum value, to prevent a shutdown when the exposure begins. The signals out
of the DACs are the TUBE POWER REQUEST (to laser power supply) and SM TREAT LEVEL (to
the safety monitor).

9.) Read back the DAC outputs through the ADC circuits. The laser power supply DAC is readback
directly, and via the laser power supply (ECHO TUBE POWER). The safety monitor DAC is
readback via the safety monitor board (ECHO SM TREAT). If any of the three compares are
more than 34mv or 5% off, the exposure sequence is aborted, and the E115, E116, or E117 error
occurs.

10.) Prepare the exposure timers for the power supply and safety monitor. The hardware timers
within the Z8536 chips are “programmable”. The microprocessor loads digital values into Z8536
internal registers to select operating parameters for the timers. Each exposure timer uses two of
the 16 bit timers in the Z8536, the first timer counts at 2 MHZ to produce 1 msec pulses. The
second timer counts the 1 msec pulses to create the desired exposure pulse. Note that the timers
are not started here, they are just prepared to start.

11.) Wait for the fourth zero crossing (three zero crossings after /RAMP UP/ and /MAGNET/ went
active). While waiting for the fourth zero crossing, check the footswitch and eye safety filter. If
the eye safety filter is pulled out, or the footswitch is released, the exposure is aborted.

12.) Power Supply ramp up off.

TROUBLESHOOTING NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


5-38 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

13.) Begin time critical code. The software disables UART interrupts. The timebase interrupt contin-
ues, but is serviced in an abbreviated form.

14.) The timers are started. The SAFETY MONITOR EXPOSURE TIMER and laser power supply
EXPOSURE TIME signals will go high 1 msec later. For the first .9 msecs, the software waits. .9
msec’s after the timers are started, all interrupts are disabled in preparation for the tube start.

15.) After a 100 usec delay, the /START/ signal goes low, to start the tube. The signal remains low
for 40 usecs.

16.) End time critical code. All interrupts are enabled.

17.) Wait 500 usecs, then clear the safety monitor error bits in the 1’s catcher.

18.) /RAMP UP/ goes to its inactive (high) state. For revision A software only. B+ control circuits in
the laser power supply will now operate to maintain a B+ voltage 12 volts above the tube voltage.

19.) Disable zero crossing interrupts, which were only needed during the ramp up and tube start
period.

20.) Clear the safety monitor error bits. That is, clear out any "caught" errors. As the tube is started,
and until it stabilizes, safety monitor errors are ignored. This steps clears out any such errors,
and from this point forward, any detected error will be valid.

21.) Increment the shot count. (the display will not be updated at this time, just the stored value of
shots), and update the user statistics (the systems maintains a running total of shots, shots at each
power exposure level, etc. These totals can be read out in the diagnostic mode].

22.) Update user statistics. The portion of NVRAM containing the user log is updated.

23.) Zero the loop count. The loop counter is a software timer which runs during the exposure (see
next step) It provides a backup check of exposure time. If the hardware exposure timers fail to
terminate the exposure, the loop counter will.

At this point, the exposure is in progress, ramp up is complete, and the software runs in the following loop
until the exposure is terminated:

24.) Reset the main program dead count.

25.) Increment the loop count. The loop counter is a software timer which provides a backup check
of exposure time. Each time the software begins the loop, the counter is incremented. The count
is checked against exposure time later in the loop, and if the count indicates that the exposure
should have already ended, the software terminates the exposure and reports an E208 error.

26.) Read the safety monitor error codes. If any error bits are set, and not in service mode, the error is
acted on.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING


0614-134-01 08/98 5-39
®
®

27.) Read power. The power photocell power is read through the ADC circuits, and if it is more than
15% above requested power, the exposure is terminated, and the E205 error occurs. If the power
is below requested power by more than 15%, the E206 error occurs, the power icon is turned on,
and the power display is updated to the highest power setting which does not exceed the power
measured during the exposure which caused the fault.

28.) Check system status. The following system statuses are checked. If a fault condition occurs, the
exposure is terminated, and the associated fault is reported.

* Remote interlock - The loop should be complete.

* Green filter - Position must correspond to selected color.

* Eye safety filter position - The filter must be in.

* Delivery system - A valid delivery system voltage must be present.

* Coolant flow - Coolant flow must be present.

* Slit lamp beam block - Beam must not be blocked.

* +/- 15VDC - The voltages must be within 1.5 %.of normal.

* Coolant temperature - must be below 65 C.

29.) The software loop count is checked against the exposure time. If the loop count indicates that
the exposure has continued longer than the exposure time, the power supply crowbar is acti-
vated, and the exposure is terminated.

30.) This is the end of the exposure loop. The loop runs until the footswitch is released, an error is
detected, or the exposure times out.

TROUBLESHOOTING NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


5-40 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

PHOTO-SENSOR PCB TEST POINTS


(TEST POINTS ARE SAME FOR 2 AND 4 POT PCB'S)

All TP voltages on the photo-sensor PCB are referenced to analog ground.

TEST SIGNAL COMMENTS


POINT

TP1 GROUND (+/-15VDC SUPPLY)

TP2 POWER PHOTOCELL 2.5VDC per watt of power measured


by the power photocell.

TP3 SAFETY PHOTOCELL 2.5VDC per watt of power measured


by the dafety photocell.

TP4 /AIMING ON/ -.11VDC for aiming beam power of


10 microwatts. More negative as
aiming beam power increases.

SINGLE PHASE REGULATOR PCB TEST POINTS

Test points on the regulator PCB can be referenced to analog ground or B-. Determine the reference to be used
before measuring the signal.

TEST SIGNAL COMMENTS


POINT

TP0 B-

TP1 SBUSS FEEDFORWARD (Tube current = Voltage x 5)

TP2 PASSBANK CONTROL The control voltage to the passbank


integrators. .625V will provide about
5 amps of tube current.

TP3 /POWER LIMIT/ Goes to negative voltage when the MOSFET


power limit control circuit detects excessive
passbank drain. This shuts off the Passbank
control bias.

TP4 +5VDC Reference to analog ground.

TP5 +15VDC Reference analog ground.

TP6 ANALOG GROUND

TP7 -15VDC Reference analog ground.

TP8 TUBE POWR REQUEST 2.5VDC (analog grnd) per watt of requested
power. Present during the exposure.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING


0614-134-01 08/98 5-41
®
®

SINGLE PHASE REGULATOR PCB TEST POINTS (CONT.)

TEST SIGNAL COMMENTS


POINT

TP9 POWER PHOTOCELL 2.5VDC (analog grnd ref) per watt of


power measured by the power photocell.

TP10 SCR CATHODES

TP11 A HALF SINE

TP12 B HALF SINE

TP13 SCR2

TP14 SCR1

TP15 B- +12VDC

TP16

TP17 B- -12VDC

TP18 GATE 2 DRIVE normally 4 to 5VDC (B- ref) while tube is on. This is
The drive to MOSFET2.

TP19 E SUPPLY A 5% sample of the B+ voltage (ref B-).

TP20 CURRENT COMMAND 1VDC to 7VDC for request of 5 to 35 amps of tube


(B- ref) current.

TP21 CURRENT COMMAND 1VDC to 7VDC for request of 5 to 35 amps of tube


(Ground ref) current.

TP22 /EXPOSE/ Low while the EXPOSURE TIMER signal


from the control electronics is high, indicating
the duration of an exposure.

TP23 /SCR2 RST/ When high, trigger pulses are aent to SCR2.

TP24 /SCR1 RST/ When high, trigger pulses are sent to SCR1.

TP25 ZERO RAMP A ramp voltage from 0VDC to approx. 8 to 10


VDC each half cycle.

TP26 GATE 1 DRIVE Normally 4 to 5VDC (B- ref) while tube is on.
This is the MOSFET1 gate drive.

(CONT. NEXT PAGE)


TROUBLESHOOTING NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL
5-42 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

SINGLE PHASE REGULATOR PCB TEST POINTS (CONT.)

TEST SIGNAL COMMENTS


POINT

TP27 GATE 3 DRIVE Normally 4 to 5VDC (B- ref) while tube is on.
This is MOSFET3 gate drive.

TP28 /FULL RECT/ 120HZ voltage peaks used to generate the


ZERO RAMP and /ZERO CROSSING/ signals.

TP29 GATE 4 DRIVE Normally 4 to 5VDC while tube is on.


This is MOSFET4 gate drive.

TP30 B+ DIFF

TP31 INTEG Toggles high/low, to open/close switch U32, between


exposures, to keep B+ at 155VDC (ref B-).

TP32 /CHARGE/ Voltage determines how early or late the SCR's


will fire during their positive half cycles. Varies from
0VDC (fire at start of half cycle), to about 12VDC
(more than off, no SCR firing), ref to B-.

TP33 /SOFTSTART/ When negative, the /SUPPLY/ signal from the control
electronics is low, indicating that the watchdog is
disabled, or has timed out. No B+ voltage is generated in
this case.

TP34 B+ INT The output of B+ INTEG U25-14.

TP35 RAMP UP High when the control electronics sets


/POWER SUPPLY RAMP UP/ low. This
should begin 3 zero crossings before each exposure,
and continue 1 zero crossing into the exposure.

TP36 /RAMP DOWN/ Holds B+ to 12VDC (B- ref) above tube voltage
after ramp up, until end of exposure.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING


0614-134-01 08/98 5-43
®
®

YEL DS5 EXPOSE

T22
J31 T8
T9

CURRENT

LIGHT T21
SW1
T30
T34
R25 T33
T32
TP20 T35
TP28
TP19
J300 TP28
TP33
TP7
J35
TP6 TP32
TP4 T3
TP5 T2
T1
T0
RED DS1 SHUTDOWN T18
T26
T29
J36 T27
T31
T17
T15
T25
B+≥10V RED
T24
DS4
J37 T14
T13
T23

J33 T12
T11
T10

YEL DS2 MAGNET YEL DS3 START PULSE

DIAGRAM OF SINGLE PHASE REG. PCB TEST POINTS

TROUBLESHOOTING NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


5-44 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

THREE PHASE POWER REGULATOR TEST POINTS

Test points on the regulator PCB can be referenced to analog ground, P-, or B-. Determine the reference to be used
before measuring the signal.

TEST POINT SIGNAL COMMENTS

T0/T2 B-

T1 B- +15VDC +15VDC @ .4Amps

T3 B- -15VDC - 15VDC @ .4Amps

T5 MIN ON TIME /Q/ The Q output of U4-10. high for the


first 14µsecs of IGBT "ON" time.

T6 B-+12VDC +12VDC @ .4Amps

T7 B- - 12VDC -12VDC @ .4Amps

T8 ON TIME High to turn on Q3, which generates an


IGBT "ON" signal, via the light fiber, to the
IGBT Power Amplifier.

T9 MIN OFF TIME Q The Q output of U4-6, high for the first
50µsecs of each IGBT "OFF" period.

T10 RESET When low, inhibits any further "ON" cycles


of the IGBT's (B- ref).

T11 TUBI .2V/AMP


of tube current (B- ref).

T12 ANALOG GROUND

T13 +5VDC REF DIGITAL 5VDC @ 2Amps


GROUND

T14 +15VDC REF ANALOG +15VDC @ .4Amps


GROUND

T15 -15VDC REF ANALOG - 15VDC @ .4Amps


GROUND

T16 /TUBE POWER REQUEST/ -2.5VDC (gnd ref)/watt of requested power.


Note that requested power is the power
at the front panel multiplied by a delivery
system transmission factor (determined by
the smart fiber resistance).

CONT. NEXT PAGE

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING


0614-134-01 08/98 5-45
®
®

THREE PHASE POWER REGULATOR TEST POINTS(CONT)


TEST POINT SIGNAL COMMENTS

T17 POWER PHOTOCELL 2.5V (analog ground ref)/watt of measured


power, at the power photocell.

T18/21/28/32 FET CURRENT SENSE .5V/A of current through the associated


FET (B- ref).

T19/T22/T29/T33 GATE DRIVE The gate drive to FET1/2/3/4 respectively,


negative voltage cuts off the FET's, typically
3 - 5 V (ref B-) when tube is on.

T20 POWER LIMIT CONTROL Normally -10V, goes to positive when an


over power condition is detected through the
MOSFET's.

T23 PASSBANK CONTROL This is the passbank control voltage,


-.625V/5AMPS of desired tube current.
(B- ref).

T24 CCOM The "CC" signal inverted, and referenced


to B-. -1 to -7Volts for 5 to 35 amps.

T25 CC (current command) Positve voltage which increases to increase


the current through the tube 1 to 7 Volts,
for 5 to 35 amps (gnd ref).

T26 /EXPOSE/ Goes low for as long as the EXPOSURE


TIMER signal from the Control Electroncis
is high. Referenced to analog ground.

T27 ZERO CROSSING Goes high at 8.3msec intervals

T30 START PULSE 220µsec high (B- ref) to turn on Q1.

T31 RAMP ENABLE Near B- -12VDC (B- ref) for first 5msecs
of an exposure.

T34 MAGNET ON Goes high (B- ref) to turn on Q2, which


switches on magnet supply.

T35 RAMP BACK A positive voltage which acts to decrease


the CURRENT COMMAND

T36 1/20 PBD Inverted 1/20th sample of passbank drain


(B- ref).

CONT. NEXT PAGE

TROUBLESHOOTING NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


5-46 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

THREE PHASE POWER REGULATOR TEST POINTS(CONT)

TEST POINT SIGNAL COMMENTS

T37 1/20 B+ Inverted 1/20th sample of B+ (ref B-)

T38 MAGNET ISENSE A negative voltage .2V/Amp of


magnet current.

T39 RALPH's RAMP Positive voltage proportional to IGBT


current.

T40 TOTAL CURRENT From LEM. 1 volt/5 Amps of detected


current.

T41 /COMMAND COMPARATOR/ High to clear U1-9.

CONTROL ELECTRONICS PCB TEST POINTS

All Control Electronics test points are referenced to digital or analog ground.

TEST SIGNAL COMMENTS


POINT

TP1 Ground (5VDC supply)

TP2 WD STAY ALIVE When watchdog is enabled, a low pulse approx.


every 5msecs, to retrigger the high and lowdog timers.

TP3 SAFETY MONITOR Set high at the beginning of an exposure, goes back low
EXPOSURE TIME at the end of the exposure. Duration is the exposure time.

TP4 EXPOSURE TME

TP5 BEEP High pulses to run the speaker.

TP6 /START/ Pulses low to start the tube. Signal is sent to laser
power supply.

TP7 /SHUTDOWN/ Low to cause a crowbar of the laser power supply. The low
can originate at the control electronics or safety monitor.

TP8 /ZERO CROSSING/ Low pulse every 8.3 milliseconds (for 60HZ supply) from
laser power supply zero crossing circuit.

TP9 GROUND (+/-15VDC)

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING


0614-134-01 08/98 5-47
®
®

T26
DS7 YEL EXP.
J31 T16
T17
T25

CURRENT

LIGHT T24
SW1

T20
R25
T15
T23
J35 J300

T12
T13 T41
T14 T40

J301 T0
J302 T11
T19
T22
RED DS4 SHUTDOWN
T39
T37
DS5 T33
DS3
T29
J36
T36
T38
T32
T28
T21
J37 T18
DS6
T8
T10
J33
T7
T30
T2
T9
T3
T1
YEL DS1 MAGNET YEL DS2 START PULSE T5

DIAGRAM OF THREE PHASE POWER REG. PCB TEST POINTS

TROUBLESHOOTING NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


5-48 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

SAFETY MONITOR PCB TEST POINTS

All TP voltages on the Safety Monitor PCBare referenced to analog or digital ground.

TEST SIGNAL COMMENTS


POINT

TP1 Analog ground

TP2 SAFETY PHOTOCELL 2.5VDC per watt of power


POWER measured by the safety photocell

TP3 SAFETY PHOTOCELL+ The PHOTOCELL INJECTION signal


PHOTOCELL INJECTION is not connected/used in normal operations.
This signal should be the same as TP2.

TP4 SM TREAT LEVEL 2.5VDC per watt of requested power


from the control electronics.

TP5 REQUEST-PHOTOCELL Voltage is the difference between requested


and measured power. Negative if measured
power is > requested. Positive if measured is
< requested.

TP6 PHOTOCELL-REQUEST Voltage is difference between requested


and measured power. Positive if measured
power is > requested. Negative if measured is
< requested.

TP7 PHOTOCELL INJECTION Not used in normal operations.

TP8 >20% UNDERPOWER A high when measured power is less than


80% of requested power.

TP9 > 20% OVERPOWER A high when measured power is 20% more
than requested power.

TP10 > MIN SIG POWER A high when measured power is more than
40 mwatts.

TP11 > MAX SIG POWER A high when measured power exceeds 3.95 watts.
A main contactor trip occurs if this signal goes high.

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING


0614-134-01 08/98 5-49
®
®

POWER REG PCB

1
2
3
4
5

A B
51324 MODE CHOKE

C+ A- D+ B-
DC SUPPLY
P300
+OUTPS3
PASSBANK

COM
PCB

-OUT B-

3KV CAP
P36 P38

1 4
I-SENSE
B-

P37

P33

HV STARTER CAPACITORS
10 KV DIODE TB1-1 TB1-2 TB1-3

4802-0559 DIODE

SINGLE PHASE LPS, FRONT VIEW, SHOWING


COMPONENTS LOCATED BEHIND THE PASSBANK

TROUBLESHOOTING NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


5-50 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

SINGLE PHASE LPS, SHOWING BACK SIDE OF PASSBANK

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING


0614-134-01 08/98 5-51
®
®

SINGLE PHASE LPS, FRONT SIDE OF PASSBANK

TROUBLESHOOTING NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


5-52 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING


0614-134-01 08/98 5-53
®
®

THREE PHASE LPS, SHOWING BACK SIDE OF PASSBANK

TROUBLESHOOTING NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


5-54 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

THREE PHASE LPS, FRONT VIEW, SHOWING COMPONENTS BEHIND THE PASSBANK

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING


0614-134-01 08/98 5-55
®
®

THREE PHASE LPS, SHOWING FRONT SIDE OF PASSBANK

TROUBLESHOOTING NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


5-56 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

6.0 PARTS LIST

The Bill of Materials for the NOVUS laser is maintained under document control at Coherent Medical Group
in Santa Clara, California, and is subject to change. The following list is provided for convenience - always
confirm the part number for a given part through Technical Support before ordering.

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION


0618-917-01 ATTENUATOR,HENE,NOVUS,FRU
0618-922-01 BEAM BLOCK, NOVUS,NO VANE,FRU
0619-356-01 BEAMSPLITTER, NOVUS,W/PCB,UPGRADE
0613-711-01 BEZEL, PANEL,CONTROL,NOVUS 2000
0613-711-02 BEZEL, PANEL,CONTROL,NOVUS L
0621-737-01 BLOCK,IGBT,NOVUS,FRU
5108-0122 BREAKER, CIRCUIT,20A,3PH 480V,NOVUS
5108-0086 BREAKER,CIRCUIT,60A,1PH 240V,NOVUS,930
0613-052-01 BUTTON, PUSH,DISPLAY,NOVUS
0618-477-01 CABLE, ADAPTOR,METAL PLUG,TUV NOVUS
0618-477-02 CABLE, ADAPTOR,PLASTIC PLUG,TUV NOVUS
0613-388-01 CABLE, F/S EXT,LDS-20,NOVUS/930/920A
0614-056-01 CABLE, IF-2000,S\L CONN,NOVUS
0611-817-05 CABLE, INTERCONNECT, COMBO, NOVUS/930
0614-370-01 CABLES, CPU-P/S-OPTICS,NOVUS
0614-356-01 CABLES, CPU-SAFETY MONITOR,I/O,NOVUS
0612-912-01 CABLES, DC SUPPLY,NOVUS,PS1/PS2
0616-248-01 CABLES, DUAL FIBER,NOVUS
2520-0101 CAP, PROTECTIVE,FIBER,NOVUS,RED
1502-0170 CAPACITOR, 100PF,3KV,NOVUS CROWBAR SENSE
1501-1042 CAPACITOR, 14000UF,250V,NOVUS 1PH B+
1501-1049 CAPACITOR, 2000UF,250V,NOVUS 3PH,B+
1501-1050 CAPACITOR, 2000UF,450V,NOVUS 3PH,P-
1504-0158 CAPACITOR, 5UF,370VRMS,OIL,NOVUS CATHODE
0614-809-01 CHOKE, COMMON MODE,3PH,NOVUS
0613-885-01 CLIP, FIBER,SPRING,NOVUS
2106-0145 CONNECTOR, FEMALE,NOVUS J17
4501-0432 CONTACTOR, 25A,3 PH,24V,NOVUS OLD
4501-0439 CONTACTOR, 45A,3PH,10HP,NOVUS SOFTSTART

4501-0515 CONTACTOR, 60A,1 PH,24V,NOVUS


4501-0516 (Note: These two part numbers replace the 4501-0421 assembly. These two parts
must be ordered together.)

6005-0010 CORD, POWER, NOVUS/LDS-20


0616-030-01 COUPLER, ACCULITE,NOVUS,930
0613-840-01 COVER, OPTIC HEAD,NOVUS,S/FIBER
0613-349-01 COVER, P/S,NOVUS
0613-614-01 COVER, WHEEL,NOVUS
2115-0021 CRIMPS,WIRE,18-24GA,NOVUS J17 CONN
4802-0595 DIODE, BY3291000,3PH NOVUS P/S

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL PARTS LIST


0614-134-01 08/98 6-1
®
®

4802-0551 DIODE, CS240650,1PH NOVUS,SCR PROTECT


4802-0582 DIODE, CS52-10KV,10MA,NOVUS START PROTEC
0616-847-01 DIODE, DSE130-10A,100V,NOVUS,D1 D3 FRU
0616-848-01 DIODE, DSE130-60A,100V,NOVUS,D2 FRU
4802-0559 DIODE, MR826,600V,5A,3PH NOVUS P/S
3701-0071 DIODE, RECEIVER,LIGHT,SFH250V,3PH NOVUS
4802-0553 DIODE, STARTER,NOVUS,CD412499 POWEREX
4802-0610 DIODE, TUBE,D2,NOVUS
3701-0072 DIODE,XMTR,INFRARED,SFH450V,3PH NOVUS
0613-843-01 DISK, POLARIZER,AIMING,NOVUS
R616-373-01 DRIVER,DUAL ESF,NOVUS,REFURB.
2602-0040 EXCHANGER, HEAT,NOVUS
0618-447-01 EXTENTION, FOOTSWITCH, METAL, NOVUS
0618-447-02 EXTENTION, FOOTSWITCH, NOVUS
2601-0115 FAN, AIR,NOVUS,CONSOLE
4801-0363 FET, 2M150S-050,P/S,1PH NOVUS
0619-359-02 FIBER, HC80, 5 METER, 930/ NOVUS
6008-0026 FIBER, P/S,3PH NOVUS,SNG/JAC,1MM
0613-111-01 FILTER, GREEN,NOVUS,VANE AND GLASS ONLY
0618-916-01 FILTER, GREEN,NOVUS,W/PCB,FRU
0613-867-02 FILTER, SAFETY,LDS-10A,NOVUS,HI-VIS
0613-867-04 FILTER, SAFETY,NOVUS,30SL,HI-VIS
0609-108-04 FILTER, SAFETY,NOVUS,LDS-20,HI-VIS
R610-821-06 FILTER, SAFETY,O.R.WILD,NOVUS,REFURBISH
0625-019-01 FILTER, SAFETY,O.R.,ZEISS,NOVUS
5106-0072 FITTING, 1/2MPT,FLOW SWITCH,NOVUS
5106-0071 FITTING, 1/4 FPT,FLOW SWITCH,NOVUS
2518-0517 FITTING, 1/4FPTX3/8 BRASS,FEMALE,NOVUS
2518-0516 FITTING, BARB,HOSE,WATER,FEMALE,NOVUS
2518-0025 FITTING, BARB,HOSE,WATER,MALE,NOVUS
2516-0256 FITTING, ELBOW,MALE,45oFL,1/2X3/8,NOVUS
2519-0213 FITTING, HOSE,QUIK CONNECT,3/8,NOVUS
2517-0114 FITTING, MALE TEE,1/2T X 3/8MPT,NOVUS
0614-136-01 FOOTSWITCH, 30SL/10A/DERM/LIO,NOVUS
0618-405-01 FOOTSWITCH,NOVUS,WATERPROOF
0621-649-01 FOOTSWITCH,NOVUS,WATERPROOF,TUV,FRU
5110-0252 FUSE, 1.25A,SB,5X20MM,NOVUS F2/6/ULTIMA
5110-0256 FUSE, 1.6A,SB,5X20MM,NOVUS F4
5110-0235 FUSE, 1/20A,MINI,NOVUS P/S
5110-0248 FUSE, .25A,SB,5X20,NOVUS,OMNI,F5,F2
5110-0253 FUSE, 2A,SB,5X20MM,NOVUS F9,OMNI F6
5110-0255 FUSE, 3.15A,SB,5X20MM,NOVUS F5
5110-0249 FUSE, .63A,SB,5X20MM,NOVUS/ULTIMA
2601-0106 GUARD, FAN,NOVUS
0613-135-01 HANDLE, FRONT,NOVUS,TUBE
0613-753-01 HENE, .8MW,POLARIZED,NOVUS
0613-525-01 HOLDER, CORD,POWER,REAR,NOVUS 4X
0616-913-01 HOOK, FILTER,TUV,GERMAN NOVUS 3PH
2521-0102 HOSE, 3/8ID,LOW PRESSURE,NOVUS
3133-0185 IC, X2444 16 X 16 NOVRAM
0615-801-01 INDUCTOR, 12MH,TUV,NOVUS,3 PH
0613-116-01 INDUCTOR, 1PH NOVUS,COMMON MODE,L1
0614-649-01 INDUCTOR, 2.2MH,3PH NOVUS,SWITCHING L4
0614-651-01 INDUCTOR, 3MH,3PH NOVUS,FILTER L2
0614-689-01 INDUCTOR, 50MH,3PH NOVUS,SNUB L5
0613-754-01 INDUCTOR, 6MH,40A,1PH NOVUS,CHOKE L2-3

PARTS LIST NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


6-2 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

1801-0130 INDUCTOR, 8.8MH,1PH NOVUS,CHOKE


0613-132-01 KEEPER, FILTER,GREEN,NOVUS
0616-165-01 KIT, NOVUS 60A SMALL PWR CONN.
0618-085-01 KIT,REMOTE UPGRADE,NOVUS
0618-180-01 KIT, SOFTSTART,NOVUS UPGRADE,FRU
0622-284-01 KIT,SOFTWARE,NOVUS 2000
0622-285-01 KIT,SOFTWARE,NOVUS L
0622-286-01 KIT,SOFTWARE,NOVUS TUV
0613-023-01 KNOB, EXPOSURE,PANEL,NOVUS
0613-024-02 KNOB,POWER,NOVUS
0613-024-01 KNOB, POWER,PANEL,NOVUS
0613-025-01 KNOB, UAM INTENSITY, NOVUS REPEAT
0611-475-01 LABEL, ETL,NOVUS/930
0616-328-01 LABEL, FIBER 1,DF NOVUS
0616-328-02 LABEL, FIBER 2,DF NOVUS
0616-940-01 LABEL, SLIT LAMP,LIO,ENDO,DF NOVUS
0609-864-02 LABEL,USE WITH SYSTEM NOVUS
0619-868-05 LASERLINK HS,NOVUS,UK
2200-0006 LEM, LA50-P,3PH NOVUS
0618-924-01 LENS,FOCUS,NOVUS,FRU
0614-134-01 MANUAL, SERVICE,NOVUS 2000
0613-162-01 MIRROR, COMBINER,NOVUS,ARG/HENE
0618-978-01 MOUNT,FIBER,DF NOVUS
0618-928-01 MOUNT, FIBER,SINGLE,NOVUS,FRU
4802-0290 MOV,275V,GE,VARISTOR,NOVUS/920/2.1
2520-0174 NUT, CAP,45o FLARE,1/2,BRASS,NOVUS
0613-752-01 OVERLAY, PANEL,NOVUS,ENGLISH
0613-752-04 OVERLAY, PANEL,NOVUS,FRENCH
0613-752-02 OVERLAY, PANEL,NOVUS,GERMAN
0615-082-01 OVERLAY, PANEL,NOVUS L,ENGLISH
0618-196-01 P-PLATE, P/S,3PH NOVUS,UPGRADE,FRU
0614-882-01 PAD, INSULATION,3PH NOVUS,5X5
0614-995-01 PAD, INSULATION,3PH NOVUS,P-PLATE
0614-883-01 PAD, INSULATION,3PH NOVUS,IGBT,P-PLATE
0612-810-01 PCB, CONTROL ELECTRONICS,CPU,NOVUS
0612-676-01 PCB, DISPLAY,NOVUS
0612-676-02 PCB, DISPLAY,NOVUS L
0615-447-01 PCB, DUAL FIBER,NOVUS
2601-0116 PCB, FAN SPEED, NOVUS OMNI
0612-977-01 PCB, GREEN FILTER/BEAM BLOCK,NOVUS
0618-953-01 PCB, I-SENSE,1PH NOVUS,FRU
0614-601-01 PCB, IGBT DRIVER,3PH NOVUS
0614-789-01 PCB, OVER-CURRENT TRIP,3PH NOVUS
0614-420-01 PCB, PHOTOSENSOR,2-CHAN,NOVUS
0613-029-01 PCB, POWER REG,P/S,1PH NOVUS
0614-691-01 PCB, POWER REG,P/S,3PH NOVUS
0612-927-01 PCB, SAFETY MONITOR,NOVUS
0607-294-01 PCB, SMART RES,10K,MESF,NOVUS
0607-294-04 PCB, SMART RES,162K,DERM,NOVUS
0607-294-02 PCB, SMART RES,20K,YAG,NOVUS
0607-294-08 PCB, SMART RES,221K,SESF,NOVUS
0607-294-05 PCB, SMART RES,39.2K,MICRO,NOVUS
0607-294-06 PCB, SMART RES,5K,LIO,NOVUS
0607-294-03 PCB, SMART RES,80.6K,EPCP,NOVUS
0616-134-01 PLATE, DUAL FIBER SWITCH, NOVUS
0609-281-01 PLATE, SPACER,ZEISS,OB TUBE,NOVUS
0618-124-01 PLUG, DUMMY,DERM/LIO,3PH NOVUS,METAL
NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL PARTS LIST
0614-134-01 08/98 6-3
®
®

0614-262-01 PLUG, DUMMY,DERM/LIO,NOVUS,PLASTIC


4711-0463 POT,TRIM,100 OHM,3/4 TURN,NOVUS,I-BOX
3501-0127 PUMP, WATER,NOVUS,INCL MOTOR
4802-0614 RECTIFIER, BRIDGE,3PH NOVUS,90A,1600V
4501-0409 RELAY, 12VDC,DPDT,SUBMIN,NOVUS CPU K1
4501-0448 RELAY,DPDT,24VAC,DELAY,NOVUS
1408-0098 RESERVOIR, WATER,NOVUS
4802-0591 SCR, CROWBAR,NOVUS / OMNI,1600V,90A
4802-0549 SCR, P/S,1PH NOVUS,800V,90A
7247-0002 SCREW,SET,0-80 X 1/8,NOVUS
7152-0604 SCREW,SET,ACT ARM,NOVUS
2601-0117 SENSOR, AIR,FAN TEMP,NOVUS
0613-887-01 SHIELD, CATHODE,NOVUS
0614-104-01 SHIELD, CIRCUIT BREAKER,NOVUS
0615-753-01 SOLENOID ACTUATOR,NOVUS
2204-0134 SOLENOID, GREEN/BEAM BLOCK,NOVUS
4001-0174 SUPPLY, PWR,B- +/-12V,1PH NOVUS
0613-746-01 SUPPLY, PWR,12V,HENE,NOVUS
4001-0160 SUPPLY, PWR,12VDC,6.8A,NOVUS CONTROL
4001-0178 SUPPLY, PWR,B- +/-15V,3PH NOVUS
4001-0123 SUPPLY, PWR,+/-15V +5V,9XX,NOVUS
5102-0115 SWITCH, EMERGENCY OFF,NOVUS
5106-0070 SWITCH, FLOW,WATER,NOVUS
5107-0159 SWITCH, KEY,3POS,2POLE,NOVUS,NOT A FRU
0618-920-01 SWITCH, KEY,NOVUS,FRU
5105-0067 SWITCH, LIMIT,BEAM BLOCK,NOVUS / OMNI
0616-415-01 SWITCH, ROTARY,DUAL FIBER,NOVUS
5101-0113 SWITCH, ROTARY,NOVUS DISPLAY SW1-4
0501-518-03 TELESCOPE, S/L,30SL/10A,NOVUS
5301-0036 THERMISTOR, PROBE,SURFACE,NOVUS P/S,OMNI
0614-143-01 THERMOSTAT, 160F,NC,NOVUS P/S
0613-857-01 TOP, TABLE,SLITLAMP,30SL,NOVUS
0613-857-02 TOP, TABLE,SLITLAMP,LDS-10A,NOVUS
0613-860-01 TOP, TELESCOPE,FIBER,10A/30SL,NOVUS
0624-605-01 TUBE,W/MAG.AND NVRAMS,NOVUS,FRU
0613-202-01 VANE, BEAMBLOCK,NOVUS,SINGLE FIBER,BLACK
0613-131-01 VANE, GREEN FILTER,NOVUS,NO FILTER
0617-320-01 WASHER,ALUMINUM,NOVUS
1407-0149 WHEEL, CASTER,SWIVEL,FRONT,NOVUS
1407-0150 WHEEL, REAR,NOVUS/OMNI
0613-888-01 WINDOW, CONTROL PANEL,NOVUS
0614-873-01 WIRES, P/S,P-PLATE,3PH NOVUS
0622-926-01 WRAP,CORD,DF,NOVUS
0613-953-01 WRAP, FIBER,NOVUS,TOP HORNS
0614-650-01 XFMR, 15UH,SNUBBING,3PH NOVUS
5601-0155 XFMR, 24V,INTERLOCK,1PH NOVUS
0614-536-01 XFMR, 24V,INTERLOCK,3PH NOVUS
0612-673-01 XFMR, CATHODE,FERRO,NOVUS
0614-537-01 XFMR, ISOLATION,380-415V,3PH NOVUS
0613-228-01 XFMR, STARTER, NOVUS/ULTIMA/OMNI

PARTS LIST NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


6-4 0614-134-01 08/98
®
®

8.0 SCHEMATICS AND DRAWINGS

8.1 LIST OF SCHEMATICS

TITLE NUMBER SHEETS PAGE

COMMON:

Interconnection schematic 0613-205-01 1 8-3

Control electronics assembly


schematic 0612-810-01 4 8-4 thru 8- 7

Safety monitor board


schematic 0612-927-01 2 8-8, 9

Display schematic 0612-676-01 3 8-10, 11

Photo-sensor board
dual channel 0612-904-01 1 8-12

Assy, green filter


board 0612-977-01 1 8-13

Assy, Illumination PCB 0614-247-01 1 8-14

Photosensor, 2 channel, 0614-420-01 1 8-15


2 gain

Block diagram 0612-674-01 2 8-29, 30

Dual fiber selector 0615-44-01 2 8-31, 32

Dual filter driver interface 0615-796-01 1 8-33

NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL SCHEMATICS & DIAGRAMS


0614-134-01 09/97 8-1
®
®

SINGLE PHASE SPECIFIC:

AC interconnection diagram 0614-006-01 1 8-16


single phase

SCR power supply board,


single phase 0613-029-01 4 8-17 thru 8-20

THREE PHASE SPECIFIC:

AC Interconnect diagram, 0614-441-01 1 8-21


three phase

IGBT driver 0614-601-01 1 8-22

3 phase power regulator 0614-691-01 4 8-23 thru 8-26

Over current trip board 0614-789-01 1 8-27

Isense bd., LEM version 0614-704-1 1 8-28

SCHEMATICS & DIAGRAMS NOVUS SERVICE MANUAL


8-2 0614-134-01 09/97

Potrebbero piacerti anche